42 USC CHAPTER 6A, SUBCHAPTER III: NATIONAL RESEARCH INSTITUTES
Result 1 of 1
   
 
42 USC CHAPTER 6A, SUBCHAPTER III: NATIONAL RESEARCH INSTITUTES
From Title 42—THE PUBLIC HEALTH AND WELFARECHAPTER 6A—PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE

SUBCHAPTER III—NATIONAL RESEARCH INSTITUTES

Codification

Title IV of the Public Health Service Act, comprising this subchapter, was originally enacted by act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, 58 Stat. 707, at which time title IV related solely to the National Cancer Institute. Because of the extensive amendments, reorganization of the subject matter, and expansion of title IV by the acts listed below, title IV is shown herein as having been added by Pub. L. 99–158, without reference to intervening amendments.

The provisions of title IV as originally enacted were subsequently redesignated as part A of title IV and amended, and parts B to I of title IV were added and amended by the following acts: June 16, 1948, ch. 481, 62 Stat. 464; June 24, 1948, ch. 621, 62 Stat. 598; Aug. 15, 1950, ch. 714, 64 Stat. 443; Oct. 5, 1961, Pub. L. 87–395, 75 Stat. 824; Oct. 17, 1962, Pub. L. 87–838, 76 Stat. 1072; Aug. 16, 1968, Pub. L. 90–489, 82 Stat. 771; Oct. 30, 1970, Pub. L. 91–515, 84 Stat. 1297; Dec. 23, 1971, Pub. L. 92–218, 85 Stat. 778; May 19, 1972, Pub. L. 92–305, 86 Stat. 162; Sept. 19, 1972, Pub. L. 92–423, 86 Stat. 679; Apr. 22, 1974, Pub. L. 93–270, 88 Stat. 90; May 14, 1974, Pub. L. 93–282, 88 Stat. 126; May 31, 1974, Pub. L. 93–296, 88 Stat. 184; July 12, 1974, Pub. L. 93–348, 88 Stat. 342; July 23, 1974, Pub. L. 93–352, 88 Stat. 358; July 23, 1974, Pub. L. 93–354, 88 Stat. 373; Jan. 4, 1975, Pub. L. 93–640, 88 Stat. 2217; July 29, 1975, Pub. L. 94–63, 89 Stat. 304; Nov. 28, 1975, Pub. L. 94–135, 89 Stat. 713; Apr. 21, 1976, Pub. L. 94–273, 90 Stat. 375; Apr. 22, 1976, Pub. L. 94–278, 90 Stat. 401; Oct. 19, 1976, Pub. L. 94–562, 90 Stat. 2645; Aug. 1, 1977, Pub. L. 95–83, 91 Stat. 383; Nov. 9, 1978, Pub. L. 95–622, 92 Stat. 3412; Nov. 9, 1978, Pub. L. 95–623, 92 Stat. 3443; July 10, 1979, Pub. L. 96–32, 93 Stat. 82; Oct. 7, 1980, Pub. L. 96–398, 94 Stat. 1564; Dec. 17, 1980, Pub. L. 96–538, 94 Stat. 3183; Aug. 13, 1981, Pub. L. 97–35, 95 Stat. 358; Apr. 26, 1984, Pub. L. 98–24, 97 Stat. 175.

Title IV was subsequently amended generally and completely reorganized by Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 822.

Subchapter Referred to in Other Sections

This subchapter is referred to in section 9660 of this title.

Part A—National Institutes of Health

§281. Organization of National Institutes of Health

(a) Agency of Public Health Service

The National Institutes of Health is an agency of the Service.

(b) Agencies within

(1) The following national research institutes are agencies of the National Institutes of Health:

(A) The National Cancer Institute.

(B) The National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute.

(C) The National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases.

(D) The National Institute of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases.

(E) The National Institute on Aging.

(F) The National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases.

(G) The National Institute of Child Health and Human Development.

(H) The National Institute of Dental and Craniofacial Research.

(I) The National Eye Institute.

(J) The National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke.

(K) The National Institute of General Medical Sciences.

(L) The National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences.

(M) The National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders.

(N) The National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism.

(O) The National Institute on Drug Abuse.

(P) The National Institute of Mental Health.

(Q) The National Institute of Nursing Research.


(2) The following entities are agencies of the National Institutes of Health:

(A) The National Library of Medicine.

(B) The National Center for Research Resources.

(C) The John E. Fogarty International Center for Advanced Study in the Health Sciences.

(D) The National Center for Human Genome Research.

(E) The Office of Dietary Supplements.

(F) The National Center for Complementary and Alternative Medicine.

(c) Establishment of additional national research institutes; reorganization or abolition of institutes

(1) The Secretary may establish in the National Institutes of Health one or more additional national research institutes to conduct and support research, training, health information, and other programs with respect to any particular disease or groups of diseases or any other aspect of human health if—

(A) the Secretary determines that an additional institute is necessary to carry out such activities; and

(B) the additional institute is not established before the expiration of 180 days after the Secretary has provided the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate written notice of the determination made under subparagraph (A) with respect to the institute.


(2) The Secretary may reorganize the functions of any national research institute and may abolish any national research institute if the Secretary determines that the institute is no longer required. A reorganization or abolition may not take effect under this paragraph before the expiration of 180 days after the Secretary has provided the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate written notice of the reorganization or abolition.

(d) "National research institute" defined

For purposes of this subchapter, the term "national research institute" means a national research institute listed in subsection (b) of this section or established under subsection (c) of this section. A reference to the National Institutes of Health includes its agencies.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §401, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 822; amended Pub. L. 100–553, §2(1), Oct. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 2769; Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §101(1), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3048; Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238; Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §121(a), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 358; Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §§1501(1), 1511(b)(1), 1521(1), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 172, 179, 180; Pub. L. 103–417, §13(b), Oct. 25, 1994, 108 Stat. 4335; Pub. L. 105–277, div. A, §101(f) [title II, §212, title VI, §601(k)], Oct. 21, 1998, 112 Stat. 2681–337, 2681-359, 2681-388.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (b)(1)(H). Pub. L. 105–277, §101(f) [title II, §212], substituted "National Institute of Dental and Craniofacial Research" for "National Institute of Dental Research".

Subsec. (b)(2)(F). Pub. L. 105–277, §101(f) [title VI, §601(k)], added subpar. (F).

1994—Subsec. (b)(2)(E). Pub. L. 103–417 added subpar. (E).

1993—Subsec. (b)(1)(Q). Pub. L. 103–43, §1511(b)(1)(A), added subpar. (Q).

Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 103–43, §1501(1), amended subpar. (B) generally, substituting "National Center for Research Resources" for "Division of Research Resources".

Subsec. (b)(2)(D). Pub. L. 103–43, §§1511(b)(1)(B), 1521(1), added subpar. (D) and struck out former subpar. (D) which read as follows: "The National Center for Nursing Research."

1992—Subsec. (b)(1)(N) to (P). Pub. L. 102–321 added subpars. (N) to (P).

1988—Subsec. (b)(1)(J), (M). Pub. L. 100–553 and Pub. L. 100–607 made identical amendments, striking out "and Communicative" after "Neurological" in subpar. (J), and adding subpar. (M). Pub. L. 100–690 amended subsec. (b)(1) to read as if the amendments by Pub. L. 100–607 had not been enacted.

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

Effective Date of 1992 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–321 effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as a note under section 236 of this title.

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

For effective date of amendment by Pub. L. 100–690, see section 2613(b)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as an Effect of Enactment of Similar Provisions note under section 285m of this title.

Report on Medical Uses of Biological Agents in Development of Defenses Against Biological Warfare

Section 1904 of Pub. L. 103–43 directed Secretary of Health and Human Services, in consultation with Secretary of Defense and with heads of other appropriate executive agencies, to report to Congress, not later than 12 months after June 10, 1993, on the appropriateness and impact of the National Institutes of Health assuming responsibility for the conduct of all Federal research, development, testing, and evaluation functions relating to medical countermeasures against biowarfare threat agents.

Research on Lupus Erythematosus

Section 5 of Pub. L. 99–158, as amended by Pub. L. 102–531, title III, §312(f), Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3506, directed Secretary of Health and Human Resources to establish a Lupus Erythematosus Coordinating Committee to plan, develop, coordinate, and implement comprehensive Federal initiatives in research on Lupus Erythematosus, provided for composition of committee and meetings, and directed Committee to prepare a report for Congress on its activities, to be submitted not later than 18 months after Nov. 20, 1985, with Committee to terminate one month after the report was submitted.

Interagency Committee on Learning Disabilities

Section 9 of Pub. L. 99–158 directed Director of the National Institutes of Health, not later than 90 days after Nov. 20, 1985, to establish an Interagency Committee on Learning Disabilities to review and assess Federal research priorities, activities, and findings regarding learning disabilities (including central nervous system dysfunction in children), provided for composition of the Committee, directed Committee to report to Congress on its activities not later than 18 months after Nov. 20, 1985, and provided that the Committee terminate 90 days after submission of the report.

§282. Director of National Institutes of Health

(a) Appointment

The National Institutes of Health shall be headed by the Director of the National Institutes of Health (hereafter in this subchapter referred to as the "Director of NIH") who shall be appointed by the President by and with the advice and consent of the Senate. The Director of NIH shall perform functions as provided under subsection (b) of this section and as the Secretary may otherwise prescribe.

(b) Duties and authority

In carrying out the purposes of section 241 of this title, the Secretary, acting through the Director of NIH—

(1) shall be responsible for the overall direction of the National Institutes of Health and for the establishment and implementation of general policies respecting the management and operation of programs and activities within the National Institutes of Health;

(2) shall coordinate and oversee the operation of the national research institutes and administrative entities within the National Institutes of Health;

(3) shall assure that research at or supported by the National Institutes of Health is subject to review in accordance with section 289a of this title;

(4) for the national research institutes and administrative entities within the National Institutes of Health—

(A) may acquire, construct, improve, repair, operate, and maintain, at the site of such institutes and entities, laboratories, and other research facilities, other facilities, equipment, and other real or personal property, and

(B) may acquire, without regard to section 34 of title 40, by lease or otherwise through the Administrator of General Services, buildings or parts of buildings in the District of Columbia or communities located adjacent to the District of Columbia for use for a period not to exceed ten years;


(5) may secure resources for research conducted by or through the National Institutes of Health;

(6) may, without regard to the provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, and without regard to the provisions of chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of such title relating to classification and General Schedule pay rates, establish such technical and scientific peer review groups and scientific program advisory committees as are needed to carry out the requirements of this subchapter and appoint and pay the members of such groups, except that officers and employees of the United States shall not receive additional compensation for service as members of such groups;

(7) may secure for the National Institutes of Health consultation services and advice of persons from the United States or abroad;

(8) may use, with their consent, the services, equipment, personnel, information, and facilities of other Federal, State, or local public agencies, with or without reimbursement therefor;

(9) may, for purposes of study, admit and treat at facilities of the National Institutes of Health individuals not otherwise eligible for such treatment;

(10) may accept voluntary and uncompensated services;

(11) may perform such other administrative functions as the Secretary determines are needed to effectively carry out this subchapter;

(12) after consultation with the Director of the Office of Research on Women's Health, shall ensure that resources of the National Institutes of Health are sufficiently allocated for projects of research on women's health that are identified under section 287d(b) of this title;

(13) may conduct and support research training—

(A) for which fellowship support is not provided under section 288 of this title; and

(B) which does not consist of residency training of physicians or other health professionals; and


(14) may appoint physicians, dentists, and other health care professionals, subject to the provisions of title 5 relating to appointments and classifications in the competitive service, and may compensate such professionals subject to the provisions of chapter 74 of title 38.


The Federal Advisory Committee Act shall not apply to the duration of a peer review group appointed under paragraph (6). The members of such a group shall be individuals who by virtue of their training or experience are eminently qualified to perform the review functions of such group. Not more than one-fourth of the members of any such group shall be officers or employees of the United States.

(c) Availability of substances and organisms for research

The Director of NIH may make available to individuals and entities, for biomedical and behavioral research, substances and living organisms. Such substances and organisms shall be made available under such terms and conditions (including payment for them) as the Secretary determines appropriate.

(d) Services of experts or consultants; number; payment of expenses, conditions, recovery

(1) The Director of NIH may obtain (in accordance with section 3109 of title 5, but without regard to the limitation in such section on the period of service) the services of not more than 220 experts or consultants, with scientific or other professional qualifications, for the National Institutes of Health.

(2)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), experts and consultants whose services are obtained under paragraph (1) shall be paid or reimbursed, in accordance with title 5, for their travel to and from their place of service and for other expenses associated with their assignment.

(B) Expenses specified in subparagraph (A) shall not be allowed in connection with the assignment of an expert or consultant whose services are obtained under paragraph (1) unless the expert or consultant has agreed in writing to complete the entire period of the assignment or one year of the assignment, whichever is shorter, unless separated or reassigned for reasons which are beyond the control of the expert or consultant and which are acceptable to the Secretary. If the expert or consultant violates the agreement, the money spent by the United States for such expenses is recoverable from the expert or consultant as a debt due the United States. The Secretary may waive in whole or in part a right of recovery under this subparagraph.

(e) Dissemination of research information

The Director of NIH shall—

(1) advise the agencies of the National Institutes of Health on medical applications of research;

(2) coordinate, review, and facilitate the systematic identification and evaluation of, clinically relevant information from research conducted by or through the national research institutes;

(3) promote the effective transfer of the information described in paragraph (2) to the health care community and to entities that require such information;

(4) monitor the effectiveness of the activities described in paragraph (3); and

(5) ensure that, after January 1, 1994, all new or revised health education and promotion materials developed or funded by the National Institutes of Health and intended for the general public are in a form that does not exceed a level of functional literacy, as defined in the National Literacy Act of 1991 (Public Law 102–73).

(f) Associate Director for Prevention; functions

There shall be in the National Institutes of Health an Associate Director for Prevention. The Director of NIH shall delegate to the Associate Director for Prevention the functions of the Director relating to the promotion of the disease prevention research programs of the national research institutes and the coordination of such programs among the national research institutes and between the national research institutes and other public and private entities, including elementary, secondary, and post-secondary schools. The Associate Director shall—

(1) annually review the efficacy of existing policies and techniques used by the national research institutes to disseminate the results of disease prevention and behavioral research programs; and

(2) recommend, coordinate, and oversee the modification or reconstruction of such policies and techniques to ensure maximum dissemination, using advanced technologies to the maximum extent practicable, of research results to such entities.

(g) Enhancing competitiveness of certain entities in obtaining research funds

(1)(A) In the case of entities described in subparagraph (B), the Director of NIH, acting through the Director of the National Center for Research Resources, shall establish a program to enhance the competitiveness of such entities in obtaining funds from the national research institutes for conducting biomedical and behavioral research.

(B) The entities referred to in subparagraph (A) are entities that conduct biomedical and behavioral research and are located in a State in which the aggregate success rate for applications to the national research institutes for assistance for such research by the entities in the State has historically constituted a low success rate of obtaining such funds, relative to such aggregate rate for such entities in other States.

(C) With respect to enhancing competitiveness for purposes of subparagraph (A), the Director of NIH, in carrying out the program established under such subparagraph, may—

(i) provide technical assistance to the entities involved, including technical assistance in the preparation of applications for obtaining funds from the national research institutes;

(ii) assist the entities in developing a plan for biomedical or behavioral research proposals; and

(iii) assist the entities in implementing such plan.


(2) The Director of NIH shall establish a program of supporting projects of biomedical or behavioral research whose principal researchers are individuals who have not previously served as the principal researchers of such projects supported by the Director.

(h) Increased participation of women and disadvantaged individuals in biomedical and behavioral research

The Secretary, acting through the Director of NIH and the Directors of the agencies of the National Institutes of Health, shall, in conducting and supporting programs for research, research training, recruitment, and other activities, provide for an increase in the number of women and individuals from disadvantaged backgrounds (including racial and ethnic minorities) in the fields of biomedical and behavioral research.

(i) Discretionary fund; uses; report to Congressional committees; authorization of appropriations

(1) There is established a fund, consisting of amounts appropriated under paragraph (3) and made available for the fund, for use by the Director of NIH to carry out the activities authorized in this chapter for the National Institutes of Health. The purposes for which such fund may be expended include—

(A) providing for research on matters that have not received significant funding relative to other matters, responding to new issues and scientific emergencies, and acting on research opportunities of high priority;

(B) supporting research that is not exclusively within the authority of any single agency of such Institutes; and

(C) purchasing or renting equipment and quarters for activities of such Institutes.


(2) Not later than February 10 of each fiscal year, the Secretary shall submit to the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives, and to the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate, a report describing the activities undertaken and expenditures made under this section during the preceding fiscal year. The report may contain such comments of the Secretary regarding this section as the Secretary determines to be appropriate.

(3) For the purpose of carrying out this subsection, there are authorized to be appropriated $25,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 and 1996.

(j) Data bank of information on clinical trials for drugs for serious or life-threatening diseases and conditions

(1)(A) The Secretary, acting through the Director of NIH, shall establish, maintain, and operate a data bank of information on clinical trials for drugs for serious or life-threatening diseases and conditions (in this subsection referred to as the "data bank"). The activities of the data bank shall be integrated and coordinated with related activities of other agencies of the Department of Health and Human Services, and to the extent practicable, coordinated with other data banks containing similar information.

(B) The Secretary shall establish the data bank after consultation with the Commissioner of Food and Drugs, the directors of the appropriate agencies of the National Institutes of Health (including the National Library of Medicine), and the Director of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

(2) In carrying out paragraph (1), the Secretary shall collect, catalog, store, and disseminate the information described in such paragraph. The Secretary shall disseminate such information through information systems, which shall include toll-free telephone communications, available to individuals with serious or life-threatening diseases and conditions, to other members of the public, to health care providers, and to researchers.

(3) The data bank shall include the following:

(A) A registry of clinical trials (whether federally or privately funded) of experimental treatments for serious or life-threatening diseases and conditions under regulations promulgated pursuant to section 355(i) of title 21, which provides a description of the purpose of each experimental drug, either with the consent of the protocol sponsor, or when a trial to test effectiveness begins. Information provided shall consist of eligibility criteria for participation in the clinical trials, a description of the location of trial sites, and a point of contact for those wanting to enroll in the trial, and shall be in a form that can be readily understood by members of the public. Such information shall be forwarded to the data bank by the sponsor of the trial not later than 21 days after the approval of the protocol.

(B) Information pertaining to experimental treatments for serious or life-threatening diseases and conditions that may be available—

(i) under a treatment investigational new drug application that has been submitted to the Secretary under section 360bbb(c) of title 21; or

(ii) as a Group C cancer drug (as defined by the National Cancer Institute).


The data bank may also include information pertaining to the results of clinical trials of such treatments, with the consent of the sponsor, including information concerning potential toxicities or adverse effects associated with the use or administration of such experimental treatments.


(4) The data bank shall not include information relating to an investigation if the sponsor has provided a detailed certification to the Secretary that disclosure of such information would substantially interfere with the timely enrollment of subjects in the investigation, unless the Secretary, after the receipt of the certification, provides the sponsor with a detailed written determination that such disclosure would not substantially interfere with such enrollment.

(5) For the purpose of carrying out this subsection, there are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary. Fees collected under section 379h of title 21 shall not be used in carrying out this subsection.

(k) Day care for children of employees

(1) The Director of NIH may establish a program to provide day care services for the employees of the National Institutes of Health similar to those services provided by other Federal agencies (including the availability of day care service on a 24-hour-a-day basis).

(2) Any day care provider at the National Institutes of Health shall establish a sliding scale of fees that takes into consideration the income and needs of the employee.

(3) For purposes regarding the provision of day care services, the Director of NIH may enter into rental or lease purchase agreements.

(l) Interagency research on trauma

The Director of NIH shall carry out the program established in part F of subchapter X of this chapter (relating to interagency research on trauma).

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §402, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 823; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §111, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3052; Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §163(b)(3), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 376; Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §141(b), title II, §§201, 202, 206, 208, 210(b), (c), title III, §303(b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 139, 144, 148-150, 153; Pub. L. 105–115, title I, §113(a), Nov. 21, 1997, 111 Stat. 2310; Pub. L. 105–362, title VI, §601(a)(1)(A), Nov. 10, 1998, 112 Stat. 3285; Pub. L. 105–392, title IV, §409, Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3589.)

References in Text

The provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, referred to in subsec. (b)(6), (14), are classified generally to section 3301 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The General Schedule, referred to in subsec. (b)(6), is set out under section 5332 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The provisions of title 5 relating to classifications, referred to in subsec. (b)(14), are classified generally to chapter 51 (§5101 et seq.) and to subchapter III (§5331 et seq.) of chapter 53 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Federal Advisory Committee Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, as amended, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The provisions of title 5 relating to reimbursement for travel expenses, referred to in subsec. (d)(2)(A), are classified generally to section 5701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The National Literacy Act of 1991, referred to in subsec. (e)(5), is Pub. L. 102–73, July 25, 1991, 105 Stat. 333, as amended, which was repealed by Pub. L. 105–220, title II, §251(a)(2), Aug. 7, 1998, 112 Stat. 1079. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (b)(13), (14). Pub. L. 105–392 added pars. (13) and (14).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 105–362 inserted "and" at end of par. (1), substituted a period for "; and" at end of par. (2), and struck out par. (3) which read as follows: "annually prepare and submit to the Director of NIH a report concerning the prevention and dissemination activities undertaken by the Associate Director, including—

"(A) a summary of the Associate Director's review of existing dissemination policies and techniques together with a detailed statement concerning any modification or restructuring, or recommendations for modification or restructuring, of such policies and techniques; and

"(B) a detailed statement of the expenditures made for the prevention and dissemination activities reported on and the personnel used in connection with such activities."

1997—Subsecs. (j) to (l). Pub. L. 105–115 added subsec. (j) and redesignated former subsecs. (j) and (k) as (k) and (l), respectively.

1993—Subsec. (b)(12). Pub. L. 103–43, §141(b), added par. (12).

Subsec. (e)(5). Pub. L. 103–43, §210(b), added par. (5).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 103–43, §201, substituted "other public and private entities, including elementary, secondary, and post-secondary schools. The Associate Director shall—" and pars. (1) to (3) for "other public and private entities. The Associate Director shall annually report to the Director of NIH on the prevention activities undertaken by the Associate Director. The report shall include a detailed statement of the expenditures made for the activities reported on and the personnel used in connection with such activities".

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 103–43, §202, added subsec. (g).

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 103–43, §206, added subsec. (h).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 103–43, §208, added subsec. (i).

Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 103–43, §210(c), added subsec. (j).

Subsec. (k). Pub. L. 103–43, §303(b), added subsec. (k).

1992—Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 102–321 substituted "220" for "two hundred".

1988—Subsec. (b)(6). Pub. L. 100–607 inserted "and scientific program advisory committees" after "peer review groups".

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

Effective Date of 1997 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 105–115 effective 90 days after Nov. 21, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 501 of Pub. L. 105–115, set out as a note under section 321 of Title 21, Food and Drugs.

Effective Date of 1992 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–321 effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as a note under section 236 of this title.

Collaboration and Report

Section 113(b) of Pub. L. 105–115 provided that:

"(1) In general.—The Secretary of Health and Human Services, the Director of the National Institutes of Health, and the Commissioner of Food and Drugs shall collaborate to determine the feasibility of including device investigations within the scope of the data bank under section 402(j) of the Public Health Service Act [subsec. (j) of this section].

"(2) Report.—Not later than two years after the date of enactment of this section [Nov. 21, 1997], the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall prepare and submit to the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate and the Committee on Commerce of the House of Representatives a report—

"(A) of the public health need, if any, for inclusion of device investigations within the scope of the data bank under section 402(j) of the Public Health Service Act;

"(B) on the adverse impact, if any, on device innovation and research in the United States if information relating to such device investigations is required to be publicly disclosed; and

"(C) on such other issues relating to such section 402(j) as the Secretary determines to be appropriate."

Chronic Fatigue Syndrome; Experts and Research Representatives on Advisory Committees and Boards

Section 902(c) of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "The Secretary of Health and Human Services, acting through the Director of the National Institutes of Health, shall ensure that appropriate individuals with expertise in chronic fatigue syndrome or neuromuscular diseases and representative of a variety of disciplines and fields within the research community are appointed to appropriate National Institutes of Health advisory committees and boards."

Third-Party Payments Regarding Certain Clinical Trials and Certain Life-Threatening Illnesses

Section 1901(a) of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "The Secretary of Health and Human Services, acting through the Director of the National Institutes of Health, shall conduct a study for the purpose of—

"(1) determining the policies of third-party payors regarding the payment of the costs of appropriate health services that are provided incident to the participation of individuals as subjects in clinical trials conducted in the development of drugs with respect to acquired immune deficiency syndrome, cancer, and other life-threatening illnesses; and

"(2) developing recommendations regarding such policies."

Personnel Study of Recruitment, Retention and Turnover

Section 1905 of Pub. L. 103–43 directed Secretary of Health and Human Services, acting through Director of National Institutes of Health, to conduct a study to review the retention, recruitment, vacancy and turnover rates of support staff, including firefighters, law enforcement, procurement officers, technicians, nurses and clerical employees, to ensure that National Institutes of Health is adequately supporting conduct of efficient, effective and high quality research for the American public, and to submit a report to Congress on results of such study not later than 1 year after June 10, 1993.

Chronic Pain Conditions

Section 1907 of Pub. L. 103–43 directed Director of the National Institutes of Health to submit to Congress, not later than 2 years after June 10, 1993, a report and study on the incidence in the United States of cases of chronic pain, including chronic pain resulting from back injuries, reflex sympathetic dystrophy syndrome, temporomandibular joint disorder, post-herpetic neuropathy, painful diabetic neuropathy, phantom pain, and post-stroke pain, and the effect of such cases on the costs of health care in the United States.

Support for Bioengineering Research

Section 1912 of Pub. L. 103–43 directed Secretary of Health and Human Services, acting through Director of the National Institutes of Health, to conduct a study for the purpose of determining the sources and amounts of public and private funding devoted to basic research in bioengineering, including biomaterials sciences, cellular bioprocessing, tissue and rehabilitation engineering, evaluating whether that commitment is sufficient to maintain the innovative edge that the United States has in these technologies, evaluating the role of the National Institutes of Health or any other Federal agency to achieve a greater commitment to innovation in bioengineering, and evaluating the need for better coordination and collaboration among Federal agencies and between the public and private sectors, and, not later than 1 year after June 10, 1993, to prepare and submit to Committee on Labor and Human Resources of Senate, and Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives, a report containing the findings of the study together with recommendations concerning the enactment of legislation to implement the results of such study.

Master Plan for Physical Infrastructure for Research

Section 2002 of Pub. L. 103–43 directed Secretary of Health and Human Services, acting through Director of the National Institutes of Health, not later than June 1, 1994, to present to Congress a master plan to provide for replacement or refurbishment of less than adequate buildings, utility equipment and distribution systems (including the resources that provide electrical and other utilities, chilled water, air handling, and other services that the Secretary, acting through the Director, deemed necessary), roads, walkways, parking areas, and grounds that underpin the laboratory and clinical facilities of the National Institutes of Health, and provided that the plan could make recommendations for the undertaking of new projects that are consistent with the objectives of this section, such as encircling the National Institutes of Health Federal enclave with an adequate chilled water conduit.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 283, 284, 285g–4, 289a of this title; title 21 section 360bbb.

§283. Biennial report of Director to President and Congress; contents

The Secretary shall transmit to the President and to the Congress a biennial report which shall be prepared by the Director of NIH and which shall consist of—

(1) a description of the activities carried out by and through the National Institutes of Health and the policies respecting the programs of the National Institutes of Health and such recommendations respecting such policies as the Secretary considers appropriate;

(2) a description of the activities undertaken to improve grants and contracting accountability and technical and scientific peer review procedures of the National Institutes of Health and the national research institutes;

(3) the reports made by the Associate Director for Prevention under section 282(f) of this title during the period for which the biennial report is prepared;

(4) a description of the health related behavioral research that has been supported by the National Institutes of Health in the preceding 2-year period, and a description of any plans for future activity in such area; and

(5) the biennial reports of the Directors of each of the national research institutes, the Director of the Division of Research Resources, and the Director of the National Center for Nursing Research.


The first report under this section shall be submitted not later than July 1, 1986, and shall relate to the fiscal year ending September 30, 1985. The next report shall be submitted not later than December 30, 1988, and shall relate to the two-fiscal-year period ending on the preceding September 30. Each subsequent report shall be submitted not later than 90 days after the end of the two-fiscal-year period for which the report is to be submitted.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §403, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 826; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §112, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3052.)

Amendments

1988—Pars. (4), (5). Pub. L. 100–607 added par. (4) and redesignated former par. (4) as (5).

Change of Name

Division of Research Resources changed to National Center for Research Resources by Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1501, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 172.

National Center for Nursing Research changed to National Institute of Nursing Research by Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1511, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 178.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 283e, 284b, 285g–4, 285q–3, 287a–1, 287d, 287d–2, 289a–2 of this title.

§283a. Establishment of program regarding DES

(a) In general

The Director of NIH shall establish a program for the conduct and support of research and training, the dissemination of health information, and other programs with respect to the diagnosis and treatment of conditions associated with exposure to the drug diethylstilbestrol (in this section referred to as "DES").

(b) Education programs

In carrying out subsection (a) of this section, the Director of NIH, after consultation with nonprofit private entities representing individuals who have been exposed to DES, shall conduct or support programs to educate health professionals and the public on the drug, including the importance of identifying and treating individuals who have been exposed to the drug.

(c) Longitudinal studies

After consultation with the Office of Research on Women's Health, the Director of NIH, acting through the appropriate national research institutes, shall in carrying out subsection (a) of this section conduct or support one or more longitudinal studies to determine the incidence of the following diseases or disorders in the indicated populations and the relationship of DES to the diseases or disorders:

(1) In the case of women to whom (on or after January 1, 1938) DES was administered while the women were pregnant, the incidence of all diseases and disorders (including breast cancer, gynecological cancers, and impairments of the immune system, including autoimmune disease).

(2) In the case of women exposed to DES in utero, the incidence of clear cell cancer (including recurrences), the long-term health effects of such cancer, and the effects of treatments for such cancer.

(3) In the case of men and women exposed to DES in utero, the incidence of all diseases and disorders (including impairments of the reproductive and autoimmune systems).

(4) In the case of children of men or women exposed to DES in utero, the incidence of all diseases and disorders.

(d) Exposure to DES in utero

For purposes of this section, an individual shall be considered to have been exposed to DES in utero if, during the pregnancy that resulted in the birth of such individual, DES was (on or after January 1, 1938) administered to the biological mother of the individual.

(e) Authorization of appropriations

In addition to any other authorization of appropriations available for the purpose of carrying out this section, there are authorized to be appropriated for such purpose such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 2003.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §403A, as added Pub. L. 102–409, §2, Oct. 13, 1992, 106 Stat. 2092; amended Pub. L. 105–340, title I, §101(a), Oct. 31, 1998, 112 Stat. 3191.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 105–340 substituted "2003" for "1996".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 300u–9 of this title.

§283b. Office of Research on Minority Health

(a) Establishment

There is established within the Office of the Director of NIH an office to be known as the Office of Research on Minority Health (in this section referred to as the "Office"). The Office shall be headed by a director, who shall be appointed by the Director of NIH.

(b) Purpose

The Director of the Office shall—

(1) identify projects of research on minority health that should be conducted or supported by the national research institutes;

(2) identify multidisciplinary research relating to research on minority health that should be so conducted or supported;

(3) promote coordination and collaboration among entities conducting research identified under paragraph (1) or (2);

(4) encourage the conduct of such research by entities receiving funds from the national research institutes;

(5) recommend an agenda for conducting and supporting such research;

(6) promote the sufficient allocation of the resources of the national research institutes for conducting and supporting such research; and

(7) assist in the administration of section 289a–2 of this title with respect to the inclusion of members of minority groups as subjects in clinical research.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §404, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §151, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 139.)

§283c. Office of Behavioral and Social Sciences Research

(a) There is established within the Office of the Director of NIH an office to be known as the Office of Behavioral and Social Sciences Research (in this section referred to as the "Office"). The Office shall be headed by a director, who shall be appointed by the Director of NIH.

(b)(1) With respect to research on the relationship between human behavior and the development, treatment, and prevention of medical conditions, the Director of the Office shall—

(A) coordinate research conducted or supported by the agencies of the National Institutes of Health; and

(B) identify projects of behavioral and social sciences research that should be conducted or supported by the national research institutes, and develop such projects in cooperation with such institutes.


(2) Research authorized under paragraph (1) includes research on teen pregnancy, infant mortality, violent behavior, suicide, and homelessness. Such research does not include neurobiological research, or research in which the behavior of an organism is observed for the purpose of determining activity at the cellular or molecular level.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §404A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title II, §203(a), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 145.)

Effective Date

Section 203(c) of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "The amendment described in subsection (a) [enacting this section] is made upon the date of the enactment of this Act [June 10, 1993] and takes effect July 1, 1993. Subsection (b) [107 Stat. 145] takes effect on such date."

§283d. Children's Vaccine Initiative

(a) Development of new vaccines

The Secretary, in consultation with the Director of the National Vaccine Program under subchapter XIX of this chapter and acting through the Directors of the National Institute for Allergy and Infectious Diseases, the National Institute for Child Health and Human Development, the National Institute for Aging, and other public and private programs, shall carry out activities, which shall be consistent with the global Children's Vaccine Initiative, to develop affordable new and improved vaccines to be used in the United States and in the developing world that will increase the efficacy and efficiency of the prevention of infectious diseases. In carrying out such activities, the Secretary shall, to the extent practicable, develop and make available vaccines that require fewer contacts to deliver, that can be given early in life, that provide long lasting protection, that obviate refrigeration, needles and syringes, and that protect against a larger number of diseases.

(b) Report

In the report required in section 300aa–4 1 of this title, the Secretary, acting through the Director of the National Vaccine Program under subchapter XIX of this chapter, shall include information with respect to activities and the progress made in implementing the provisions of this section and achieving its goals.

(c) Authorization of appropriations

In addition to any other amounts authorized to be appropriated for activities of the type described in this section, there are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section $20,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 and 1996.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §404B, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title II, §204, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 146.)

References in Text

Section 300aa–4 of this title, referred to in subsec. (b), was repealed by Pub. L. 105–362, title VI, §601(a)(1)(H), Nov. 10, 1998, 112 Stat. 3285.

1 See References in Text note below.

§283e. Plan for use of animals in research

(a) Preparation

The Director of NIH, after consultation with the committee established under subsection (e) of this section, shall prepare a plan—

(1) for the National Institutes of Health to conduct or support research into—

(A) methods of biomedical research and experimentation that do not require the use of animals;

(B) methods of such research and experimentation that reduce the number of animals used in such research;

(C) methods of such research and experimentation that produce less pain and distress in such animals; and

(D) methods of such research and experimentation that involve the use of marine life (other than marine mammals);


(2) for establishing the validity and reliability of the methods described in paragraph (1);

(3) for encouraging the acceptance by the scientific community of such methods that have been found to be valid and reliable; and

(4) for training scientists in the use of such methods that have been found to be valid and reliable.

(b) Submission to Congressional committees

Not later than October 1, 1993, the Director of NIH shall submit to the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives, and to the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate, the plan required in subsection (a) of this section and shall begin implementation of the plan.

(c) Periodic review and revision

The Director of NIH shall periodically review, and as appropriate, make revisions in the plan required under subsection (a) of this section. A description of any revision made in the plan shall be included in the first biennial report under section 283 of this title that is submitted after the revision is made.

(d) Dissemination of information

The Director of NIH shall take such actions as may be appropriate to convey to scientists and others who use animals in biomedical or behavioral research or experimentation information respecting the methods found to be valid and reliable under subsection (a)(2) of this section.

(e) Interagency Coordinating Committee on the Use of Animals in Research

(1) The Director of NIH shall establish within the National Institutes of Health a committee to be known as the Interagency Coordinating Committee on the Use of Animals in Research (in this subsection referred to as the "Committee").

(2) The Committee shall provide advice to the Director of NIH on the preparation of the plan required in subsection (a) of this section.

(3) The Committee shall be composed of—

(A) the Directors of each of the national research institutes and the Director of the Center for Research Resources (or the designees of such Directors); and

(B) representatives of the Environmental Protection Agency, the Food and Drug Administration, the Consumer Product Safety Commission, the National Science Foundation, and such additional agencies as the Director of NIH determines to be appropriate, which representatives shall include not less than one veterinarian with expertise in laboratory-animal medicine.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §404C, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title II, §205(a), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 146.)

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

§283f. Requirements regarding surveys of sexual behavior

With respect to any survey of human sexual behavior proposed to be conducted or supported through the National Institutes of Health, the survey may not be carried out unless—

(1) the proposal has undergone review in accordance with any applicable requirements of sections 289 and 289a of this title; and

(2) the Secretary, in accordance with section 289a–1 of this title, makes a determination that the information expected to be obtained through the survey will assist—

(A) in reducing the incidence of sexually transmitted diseases, the incidence of infection with the human immunodeficiency virus, or the incidence of any other infectious disease; or

(B) in improving reproductive health or other conditions of health.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §404D, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title II, §207, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 148.)

Prohibition Against SHARP Adult Sex Survey and American Teenage Sex Survey

Section 2015 of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "The Secretary of Health and Human Services may not during fiscal year 1993 or any subsequent fiscal year conduct or support the SHARP survey of adult sexual behavior or the American Teenage Study of adolescent sexual behavior. This section becomes effective on the date of the enactment of this Act [June 10, 1993]."

§283g. Repealed. Pub. L. 105–277, div. A, §101(f) [title VI, §601(1)], Oct. 21, 1998, 112 Stat. 2681–337, 2681-387

Section, act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §404E, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title II, §209, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 149, related to Office of Alternative Medicine.

Part B—General Provisions Respecting National Research Institutes

§284. Directors of national research institutes

(a) Appointment

The Director of the National Cancer Institute shall be appointed by the President and the Directors of the other national research institutes shall be appointed by the Secretary. Each Director of a national research institute shall report directly to the Director of NIH.

(b) Duties and authority; grants, contracts, and cooperative agreements

(1) In carrying out the purposes of section 241 of this title with respect to human diseases or disorders or other aspects of human health for which the national research institutes were established, the Secretary, acting through the Director of each national research institute—

(A) shall encourage and support research, investigations, experiments, demonstrations, and studies in the health sciences related to—

(i) the maintenance of health,

(ii) the detection, diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of human diseases and disorders,

(iii) the rehabilitation of individuals with human diseases, disorders, and disabilities, and

(iv) the expansion of knowledge of the processes underlying human diseases, disorders, and disabilities, the processes underlying the normal and pathological functioning of the body and its organ systems, and the processes underlying the interactions between the human organism and the environment;


(B) may, subject to the peer review prescribed under section 289a(b) of this title and any advisory council review under section 284a(a)(3)(A)(i) of this title, conduct the research, investigations, experiments, demonstrations, and studies referred to in subparagraph (A);

(C) may conduct and support research training (i) for which fellowship support is not provided under section 288 of this title, and (ii) which is not residency training of physicians or other health professionals;

(D) may develop, implement, and support demonstrations and programs for the application of the results of the activities of the institute to clinical practice and disease prevention activities;

(E) may develop, conduct, and support public and professional education and information programs;

(F) may secure, develop and maintain, distribute, and support the development and maintenance of resources needed for research;

(G) may make available the facilities of the institute to appropriate entities and individuals engaged in research activities and cooperate with and assist Federal and State agencies charged with protecting the public health;

(H) may accept unconditional gifts made to the institute for its activities, and, in the case of gifts of a value in excess of $50,000, establish suitable memorials to the donor;

(I) may secure for the institute consultation services and advice of persons from the United States or abroad;

(J) may use, with their consent, the services, equipment, personnel, information, and facilities of other Federal, State, or local public agencies, with or without reimbursement therefor;

(K) may accept voluntary and uncompensated services; and

(L) may perform such other functions as the Secretary determines are needed to carry out effectively the purposes of the institute.


The indemnification provisions of section 2354 of title 10 shall apply with respect to contracts entered into under this subsection and section 282(b) of this title.

(2) Support for an activity or program under this subsection may be provided through grants, contracts, and cooperative agreements. The Secretary, acting through the Director of each national research institute—

(A) may enter into a contract for research, training, or demonstrations only if the contract has been recommended after technical and scientific peer review required by regulations under section 289a of this title;

(B) may make grants and cooperative agreements under paragraph (1) for research, training, or demonstrations, except that—

(i) if the direct cost of the grant or cooperative agreement to be made does not exceed $50,000, such grant or cooperative agreement may be made only if such grant or cooperative agreement has been recommended after technical and scientific peer review required by regulations under section 289a of this title, and

(ii) if the direct cost of the grant or cooperative agreement to be made exceeds $50,000, such grant or cooperative agreement may be made only if such grant or cooperative agreement has been recommended after technical and scientific peer review required by regulations under section 289a of this title and is recommended under section 284a(a)(3)(A)(ii) of this title by the advisory council for the national research institute involved; and


(C) shall, subject to section 300cc–40b(d)(2) of this title, receive from the President and the Office of Management and Budget directly all funds appropriated by the Congress for obligation and expenditure by the Institute.

(c) Coordination with other public and private entities; cooperation with other national research institutes; appointment of additional peer review groups

In carrying out subsection (b) of this section, each Director of a national research institute—

(1) shall coordinate, as appropriate, the activities of the institute with similar programs of other public and private entities;

(2) shall cooperate with the Directors of the other national research institutes in the development and support of multidisciplinary research and research that involves more than one institute;

(3) may, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute and with the approval of the Director of NIH—

(A) establish technical and scientific peer review groups in addition to those appointed under section 282(b)(6) of this title; and

(B) appoint the members of peer review groups established under subparagraph (A); and


(4) may publish, or arrange for the publication of, information with respect to the purpose of the Institute without regard to section 501 of title 44.


The Federal Advisory Committee Act shall not apply to the duration of a peer review group appointed under paragraph (3).

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §405, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 826; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §116, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3053; Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(c), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4239; Pub. L. 103–43, title III, §301(a)(1), (b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 150.)

References in Text

The Federal Advisory Committee Act, referred to in subsec. (c), is Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, as amended, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (b)(2)(C). Pub. L. 103–43, §301(a)(1), added subpar. (C).

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–43, §301(b)(2), inserted concluding provisions relating to Federal Advisory Committee Act.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 103–43, §301(b)(1), amended par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (3) read as follows: "may, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute and the approval of the Director of NIH, establish and appoint technical and scientific peer review groups in addition to those established and appointed under section 282(b)(6) of this title; and".

1988—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 100–607, §116(1), struck out "the" after "with respect to" in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 100–690 substituted "establish and appoint" and "established and appointed" for "establish" and "established", respectively.

Pub. L. 100–607, §116(2)(A), amended par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (3) read as follows: "may, with the approval of the advisory council for the institute and the Director of NIH, appoint technical and scientific peer review groups in addition to those appointed under section 282(b)(6) of this title."

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 100–607, §116(2)(C), added par. (4).

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–690 effective immediately after enactment of Pub. L. 100–607, which was approved Nov. 4, 1988, see section 2600 of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as a note under section 242m of this title.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 284a, 285a–2, 285b–3, 289a, 300cc–41 of this title.

§284a. Advisory councils

(a) Establishment; acceptance of conditional gifts; functions

(1) Except as provided in subsection (h) of this section, the Secretary shall appoint an advisory council for each national research institute which (A) shall advise, assist, consult with, and make recommendations to the Secretary and the Director of such institute on matters related to the activities carried out by and through the institute and the policies respecting such activities, and (B) shall carry out the special functions prescribed by part C of this subchapter.

(2) Each advisory council for a national research institute may recommend to the Secretary acceptance, in accordance with section 238 of this title, of conditional gifts for study, investigation, or research respecting the diseases, disorders, or other aspect of human health with respect to which the institute was established, for the acquisition of grounds, or for the construction, equipping, or maintenance of facilities for the institute.

(3) Each advisory council for a national research institute—

(A)(i) may on the basis of the materials provided under section 289a(b)(2) of this title respecting research conducted at the institute, make recommendations to the Director of the institute respecting such research,

(ii) may review applications for grants and cooperative agreements for research or training and for which advisory council approval is required under section 284(b)(2) of this title and recommend for approval applications for projects which show promise of making valuable contributions to human knowledge, and

(iii) may review any grant, contract, or cooperative agreement proposed to be made or entered into by the institute;

(B) may collect, by correspondence or by personal investigation, information as to studies which are being carried on in the United States or any other country as to the diseases, disorders, or other aspect of human health with respect to which the institute was established and with the approval of the Director of the institute make available such information through appropriate publications for the benefit of public and private health entities and health professions personnel and scientists and for the information of the general public; and

(C) may appoint subcommittees and convene workshops and conferences.

(b) Membership; compensation

(1) Each advisory council shall consist of ex officio members and not more than eighteen members appointed by the Secretary. The ex officio members shall be nonvoting members.

(2) The ex officio members of an advisory council shall consist of—

(A) the Secretary, the Director of NIH, the Director of the national research institute for which the council is established, the Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs or the Chief Dental Director of the Department of Veterans Affairs, and the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs (or the designees of such officers), and

(B) such additional officers or employees of the United States as the Secretary determines necessary for the advisory council to effectively carry out its functions.


(3) The members of an advisory council who are not ex officio members shall be appointed as follows:

(A) Two-thirds of the members shall be appointed by the Secretary from among the leading representatives of the health and scientific disciplines (including not less than two individuals who are leaders in the fields of public health and the behavioral or social sciences) relevant to the activities of the national research institute for which the advisory council is established.

(B) One-third of the members shall be appointed by the Secretary from the general public and shall include leaders in fields of public policy, law, health policy, economics, and management.


(4) Members of an advisory council who are officers or employees of the United States shall not receive any compensation for service on the advisory council. The other members of an advisory council shall receive, for each day (including traveltime) they are engaged in the performance of the functions of the advisory council, compensation at rates not to exceed the daily equivalent of the annual rate in effect for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule.

(c) Term of office; reappointment; vacancy

The term of office of an appointed member of an advisory council is four years, except that any member appointed to fill a vacancy for an unexpired term shall be appointed for the remainder of such term and the Secretary shall make appointments to an advisory council in such a manner as to ensure that the terms of the members do not all expire in the same year. A member may serve after the expiration of the member's term for 180 days after the date of such expiration. A member who has been appointed for a term of four years may not be reappointed to an advisory council before two years from the date of expiration of such term of office. If a vacancy occurs in the advisory council among the appointed members, the Secretary shall make an appointment to fill the vacancy within 90 days from the date the vacancy occurs.

(d) Chairman; term of office

The chairman of an advisory council shall be selected by the Secretary from among the appointed members, except that the Secretary may select the Director of the national research institute for which the advisory council is established to be the chairman of the advisory council. The term of office of the chairman shall be two years.

(e) Meetings

The advisory council shall meet at the call of the chairman or upon the request of the Director of the national research institute for which it was established, but at least three times each fiscal year. The location of the meetings of each advisory council is subject to the approval of the Director of the national research institute for which the advisory council was established.

(f) Appointment of executive secretary; training and orientation for new members

The Director of the national research institute for which an advisory council is established shall designate a member of the staff of the institute to serve as the executive secretary of the advisory council. The Director of such institute shall make available to the advisory council such staff, information, and other assistance as it may require to carry out its functions. The Director of such institute shall provide orientation and training for new members of the advisory council to provide them with such information and training as may be appropriate for their effective participation in the functions of the advisory council.

(g) Comments and recommendations for inclusion in biennial report; additional reports

Each advisory council may prepare, for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 284b of this title, (1) comments respecting the activities of the advisory council in the fiscal years respecting which the report is prepared, (2) comments on the progress of the national research institute for which it was established in meeting its objectives, and (3) recommendations respecting the future directions and program and policy emphasis of the institute. Each advisory council may prepare such additional reports as it may determine appropriate.

(h) Advisory councils in existence; application of section to National Cancer Advisory Board and advisory council to National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), this section does not terminate the membership of any advisory council for a national research institute which was in existence on November 20, 1985. After November 20, 1985—

(A) the Secretary shall make appointments to each such advisory council in such a manner as to bring about as soon as practicable the composition for such council prescribed by this section;

(B) each advisory council shall organize itself in accordance with this section and exercise the functions prescribed by this section; and

(C) the Director of each national research institute shall perform for such advisory council the functions prescribed by this section.


(2)(A) The National Cancer Advisory Board shall be the advisory council for the National Cancer Institute. This section applies to the National Cancer Advisory Board, except that—

(i) appointments to such Board shall be made by the President;

(ii) the term of office of an appointed member shall be 6 years;

(iii) of the members appointed to the Board not less than five members shall be individuals knowledgeable in environmental carcinogenesis (including carcinogenesis involving occupational and dietary factors);

(iv) the chairman of the Board shall be selected by the President from the appointed members and shall serve as chairman for a term of two years;

(v) the ex officio members of the Board shall be nonvoting members and shall be the Secretary, the Director of the Office of Science and Technology Policy, the Director of NIH, the Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs, the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, the Director of the National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences, the Secretary of Labor, the Commissioner of the Food and Drug Administration, the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency, the Chairman of the Consumer Product Safety Commission, the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs, and the Director of the Office of Science of the Department of Energy (or the designees of such officers); and

(vi) the Board shall meet at least four times each fiscal year.


(B) This section applies to the advisory council to the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, except that the advisory council shall meet at least four times each fiscal year.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §406, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 828; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §117, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3053; Pub. L. 101–381, title I, §102(1), Aug. 18, 1990, 104 Stat. 585; Pub. L. 102–405, title III, §302(e)(1), Oct. 9, 1992, 106 Stat. 1985; Pub. L. 103–43, title II, §210(a), title XX, §§2008(b)(1), 2010(b)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 149, 210, 214; Pub. L. 105–245, title III, §309(b)(2)(C), Oct. 7, 1998, 112 Stat. 1853.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (h)(2)(A)(v). Pub. L. 105–245 substituted "Science of the Department of Energy" for "Energy Research of the Department of Energy".

1993—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 103–43, §2010(b)(2), substituted "section 238" for "section 300aaa".

Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 103–43, §2008(b)(1)(A), substituted "Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Veterans' Administration" in two places.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–43, §210(a), substituted "for 180 days after the date of such expiration" for "until a successor has taken office".

Subsec. (h)(2)(A)(v). Pub. L. 103–43, §2008(b)(1)(B), substituted "Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Veterans' Administration".

1992—Subsecs. (b)(2)(A), (h)(2)(A)(v). Pub. L. 102–405 substituted "Under Secretary for Health" for "Chief Medical Director".

1990—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 101–381 made technical amendment to reference to section 300aaa of this title to reflect renumbering of corresponding section of original act.

1988—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 100–607, §117(a), inserted at end "The ex officio members shall be nonvoting members."

Subsec. (b)(3)(A). Pub. L. 100–607, §117(b), inserted "not less than two individuals who are leaders in the fields of" after "(including".

Subsec. (h)(2)(A)(v). Pub. L. 100–607, §117(c), inserted "shall be nonvoting members and" after "Board" and substituted "the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs, and the Director of the Office of Energy Research of the Department of Energy" for "and the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs".

Termination of Advisory Councils

Advisory councils established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a council established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such council is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a council established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

References in Other Laws to GS–16, 17, or 18 Pay Rates

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 284, 284b, 285b–7, 285c–6, 287c–21, 289c, 300cc–40a of this title.

§284b. Biennial report

The Director of each national research institute, after consultation with the advisory council for the institute, shall prepare for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 283 of this title a biennial report which shall consist of a description of the activities of the institute and program policies of the Director of the institute in the fiscal years respecting which the report is prepared. The Director of each national research institute may prepare such additional reports as the Director determines appropriate. The Director of each national research institute shall provide the advisory council for the institute an opportunity for the submission of the written comments referred to in section 284a(g) of this title.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §407, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 831.)

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 284a, 285a–2, 285a–5, 285a–6, 285b–6, 285c–7, 285g–4, 285n–1, 285o–1, 285p–1 of this title.

§284c. Certain uses of funds

(a)(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), the sum of the amounts obligated in any fiscal year for administrative expenses of the National Institutes of Health may not exceed an amount which is 5.5 percent of the total amount appropriated for such fiscal year for the National Institutes of Health.

(2) Paragraph (1) does not apply to the National Library of Medicine, the National Center for Nursing Research, the John E. Fogarty International Center for Advanced Study in the Health Sciences, the Warren G. Magnuson Clinical Center, and the Office of Medical Applications of Research.

(3) For purposes of paragraph (1), the term "administrative expenses" means expenses incurred for the support of activities relevant to the award of grants, contracts, and cooperative agreements and expenses incurred for general administration of the scientific programs and activities of the National Institutes of Health.

(b) For fiscal year 1989 and subsequent fiscal years, amounts made available to the National Institutes of Health shall be available for payment of nurses and allied health professionals in accordance with payment authorities, scheduling options, benefits, and other authorities provided under chapter 73 of title 38 for nurses of the Department of Veterans Affairs.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §408, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 831; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §118, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3053; Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(d), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4239; Pub. L. 103–43, title IV, §403(b)(1), title XX, §2008(b)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 158, 211; Pub. L. 104–316, title I, §122(a), Oct. 19, 1996, 110 Stat. 3836; Pub. L. 105–362, title VI, §601(a)(1)(B), Nov. 10, 1998, 112 Stat. 3285.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 105–362 struck out par. (4) which read as follows: "Not later than December 31, 1987, and December 31 of each succeeding year, the Secretary shall report to the Congress the amount obligated in the fiscal year preceding such date for administrative expenses of the National Institutes of Health and the total amount appropriated for the National Institutes of Health for such fiscal year. The Secretary shall consult with the Comptroller General of the United States in preparing each report."

1996—Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 104–316 struck out at end "In identifying expenses incurred for such support and administration the Secretary shall consult with the Comptroller General of the United States."

1993Pub. L. 103–43 amended section catchline generally, redesignated subsec. (b) as (a) and par. (5) of subsec. (a) as (b), struck out former subsec. (a) which authorized appropriations in addition to amounts otherwise appropriated under this subchapter for the National Cancer Institute for programs other than under section 285a–1 of this title and for its program under section 285a–1 of this title and for the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute for programs other than under section 285b–1 of this title and for its program under section 285b–1 of this title, and substituted "Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Veterans' Administration" in subsec. (b).

1988—Subsec. (a)(1), (2). Pub. L. 100–607, §118(a), amended pars. (1) and (2) generally. Prior to amendment, pars. (1) and (2) read as follows:

"(1)(A) For the National Cancer Institute (other than its programs under section 285a–1 of this title), there are authorized to be appropriated $1,194,000,000 for fiscal year 1986, $1,270,000,000 for fiscal year 1987, and $1,344,000,000 for fiscal year 1988.

"(B) For the programs under section 285a–1 of this title, there are authorized to be appropriated $68,000,000 for fiscal year 1986, $74,000,000 for fiscal year 1987, and $80,000,000 for fiscal year 1988.

"(2)(A) For the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (other than its programs under section 285b–1 of this title), there are authorized to be appropriated $809,000,000 for fiscal year 1986, $871,000,000 for fiscal year 1987, and $927,000,000 for fiscal year 1988. Of the amount appropriated under this subsection for such fiscal year, not less than 15 percent of such amount shall be reserved for programs respecting diseases of the lung and not less than 15 percent of such amount shall be reserved for programs respecting blood diseases and blood resources.

"(B) For the programs under section 285b–1 of this title, there are authorized to be appropriated $82,000,000 for fiscal year 1986, $90,000,000 for fiscal year 1987, and $98,000,000 for fiscal year 1988."

Subsec. (a)(2)(B). Pub. L. 100–690 inserted a comma after "section 285b–1 of this title".

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 100–607, §118(b), added par. (5).

Change of Name

National Center for Nursing Research changed to National Institute of Nursing Research by Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1511, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 178.

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–690 effective immediately after enactment of Pub. L. 100–607, which was approved Nov. 4, 1988, see section 2600 of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as a note under section 242m of this title.

Warren G. Magnuson Clinical Center; Availability of Funds for Payment of Nurses; Rate of Pay and Options and Benefits

Pub. L. 99–349, title I, July 2, 1986, 100 Stat. 738, provided that: "Funds made available for fiscal year 1986 and hereafter to the Warren G. Magnuson Clinical Center of the National Institutes of Health shall be available for payment of nurses at the rates of pay and with schedule options and benefits authorized for the Veterans Administration pursuant to 38 U.S.C. 4107."

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285m–6 of this title.

§284d. "Health services research" defined

For purposes of this subchapter, the term "health services research" means research endeavors that study the impact of the organization, financing and management of health services on the quality, cost, access to and outcomes of care. Such term does not include research on the efficacy of services to prevent, diagnose, or treat medical conditions.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §409, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §121(b), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 358; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2016(a), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 218.)

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43 inserted at end "Such term does not include research on the efficacy of services to prevent, diagnose, or treat medical conditions."

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

§284e. Research on osteoporosis, Paget's disease, and related bone disorders

(a) Establishment

The Directors of the National Institute of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases, the National Institute on Aging, the National Institute of Dental Research, and the National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases, shall expand and intensify the programs of such Institutes with respect to research and related activities concerning osteoporosis, Paget's disease, and related bone disorders.

(b) Coordination

The Directors referred to in subsection (a) of this section shall jointly coordinate the programs referred to in such subsection and consult with the Arthritis and Musculoskeletal Diseases Interagency Coordinating Committee and the Interagency Task Force on Aging Research.

(c) Information clearinghouse

(1) In general

In order to assist in carrying out the purpose described in subsection (a) of this section, the Director of NIH shall provide for the establishment of an information clearinghouse on osteoporosis and related bone disorders to facilitate and enhance knowledge and understanding on the part of health professionals, patients, and the public through the effective dissemination of information.

(2) Establishment through grant or contract

For the purpose of carrying out paragraph (1), the Director of NIH shall enter into a grant, cooperative agreement, or contract with a nonprofit private entity involved in activities regarding the prevention and control of osteoporosis and related bone disorders.

(d) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this section, there are authorized to be appropriated $40,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 through 2003.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §409A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title III, §302, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 151; amended Pub. L. 105–340, title I, §102, Oct. 31, 1998, 112 Stat. 3192.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 105–340 substituted "through 2003" for "and 1996".

§284f. Parkinson's disease

(a) In general

The Director of NIH shall establish a program for the conduct and support of research and training with respect to Parkinson's disease (subject to the extent of amounts appropriated under subsection (e) of this section).

(b) Inter-institute coordination

(1) In general

The Director of NIH shall provide for the coordination of the program established under subsection (a) of this section among all of the national research institutes conducting Parkinson's disease research.

(2) Conference

Coordination under paragraph (1) shall include the convening of a research planning conference not less frequently than once every 2 years. Each such conference shall prepare and submit to the Committee on Appropriations and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate and the Committee on Appropriations and the Committee on Commerce of the House of Representatives a report concerning the conference.

(c) Morris K. Udall research centers

(1) In general

The Director of NIH is authorized to award Core Center Grants to encourage the development of innovative multidisciplinary research and provide training concerning Parkinson's disease. The Director is authorized to award not more than 10 Core Center Grants and designate each center funded under such grants as a Morris K. Udall Center for Research on Parkinson's Disease.

(2) Requirements

(A) In general

With respect to Parkinson's disease, each center assisted under this subsection shall—

(i) use the facilities of a single institution or a consortium of cooperating institutions, and meet such qualifications as may be prescribed by the Director of the NIH; and

(ii) conduct basic and clinical research.

(B) Discretionary requirements

With respect to Parkinson's disease, each center assisted under this subsection may—

(i) conduct training programs for scientists and health professionals;

(ii) conduct programs to provide information and continuing education to health professionals;

(iii) conduct programs for the dissemination of information to the public;

(iv) separately or in collaboration with other centers, establish a nationwide data system derived from patient populations with Parkinson's disease, and where possible, comparing relevant data involving general populations;

(v) separately or in collaboration with other centers, establish a Parkinson's Disease Information Clearinghouse to facilitate and enhance knowledge and understanding of Parkinson's disease; and

(vi) separately or in collaboration with other centers, establish a national education program that fosters a national focus on Parkinson's disease and the care of those with Parkinson's disease.

(3) Stipends regarding training programs

A center may use funds provided under paragraph (1) to provide stipends for scientists and health professionals enrolled in training programs under paragraph (2)(B).

(4) Duration of support

Support of a center under this subsection may be for a period not exceeding five years. Such period may be extended by the Director of NIH for one or more additional periods of not more than five years if the operations of such center have been reviewed by an appropriate technical and scientific peer review group established by the Director and if such group has recommended to the Director that such period should be extended.

(d) Morris K. Udall Awards for Excellence in Parkinson's Disease Research

The Director of NIH is authorized to establish a grant program to support investigators with a proven record of excellence and innovation in Parkinson's disease research and who demonstrate potential for significant future breakthroughs in the understanding of the pathogensis,1 diagnosis, and treatment of Parkinson's disease. Grants under this subsection shall be available for a period of not to exceed 5 years.

(e) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this section and section 241 of this title and this subchapter with respect to research focused on Parkinson's disease, there are authorized to be appropriated up to $100,000,000 for fiscal year 1998, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1999 and 2000.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §409B, as added Pub. L. 105–78, title VI, §603(c), Nov. 13, 1997, 111 Stat. 1520.)

Finding and Purpose

Section 603(b) of Pub. L. 105–78 provided that:

"(1) Finding.—Congress finds that to take full advantage of the tremendous potential for finding a cure or effective treatment, the Federal investment in Parkinson's disease must be expanded, as well as the coordination strengthened among the National Institutes of Health research institutes.

"(2) Purpose.—It is the purpose of this section [enacting this section] to provide for the expansion and coordination of research regarding Parkinson's disease, and to improve care and assistance for afflicted individuals and their family caregivers."

1 So in original. Probably should be "pathogenesis,".

Part C—Specific Provisions Respecting National Research Institutes

Part Referred to in Other Sections

This part is referred to in sections 284a, 289c–1 of this title.

subpart 1—national cancer institute

Subpart Referred to in Other Sections

This subpart is referred to in section 280e–4 of this title.

§285. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Cancer Institute (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of research, training, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to the cause, diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of cancer, rehabilitation from cancer, and the continuing care of cancer patients and the families of cancer patients.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §410, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 832; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §121, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3054.)

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–607 inserted ", rehabilitation from cancer," after "treatment of cancer".

§285a. National Cancer Program

The National Cancer Program shall consist of (1) an expanded, intensified, and coordinated cancer research program encompassing the research programs conducted and supported by the Institute and the related research programs of the other national research institutes, including an expanded and intensified research program for the prevention of cancer caused by occupational or environmental exposure to carcinogens, and (2) the other programs and activities of the Institute.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §411, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 832.)

§285a–1. Cancer control programs

The Director of the Institute shall establish and support demonstration, education, and other programs for the detection, diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of cancer and for rehabilitation and counseling respecting cancer. Programs established and supported under this section shall include—

(1) locally initiated education and demonstration programs (and regional networks of such programs) to transmit research results and to disseminate information respecting—

(A) the detection, diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of cancer,

(B) the continuing care of cancer patients and the families of cancer patients, and

(C) rehabilitation and counseling respecting cancer,


to physicians and other health professionals who provide care to individuals who have cancer;

(2) the demonstration of and the education of students of the health professions and health professionals in—

(A) effective methods for the prevention and early detection of cancer and the identification of individuals with a high risk of developing cancer, and

(B) improved methods of patient referral to appropriate centers for early diagnosis and treatment of cancer; and


(3) the demonstration of new methods for the dissemination of information to the general public concerning the prevention, early detection, diagnosis, and treatment and control of cancer and information concerning unapproved and ineffective methods, drugs, and devices for the diagnosis, prevention, treatment, and control of cancer.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §412, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 832.)

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 285a–6, 285a–7, 285a–8 of this title.

§285a–2. Special authorities of Director

(a)(1) The Director of the Institute shall establish an information and education program to collect, identify, analyze, and disseminate on a timely basis, through publications and other appropriate means, to cancer patients and their families, physicians and other health professionals, and the general public, information on cancer research, diagnosis, prevention, and treatment (including information respecting nutrition programs for cancer patients and the relationship between nutrition and cancer). The Director of the Institute may take such action as may be necessary to insure that all channels for the dissemination and exchange of scientific knowledge and information are maintained between the Institute and the public and between the Institute and other scientific, medical, and biomedical disciplines and organizations nationally and internationally.

(2) In carrying out paragraph (1), the Director of the Institute shall—

(A) provide public and patient information and education programs, providing information that will help individuals take personal steps to reduce their risk of cancer, to make them aware of early detection techniques and to motivate appropriate utilization of those techniques, to help individuals deal with cancer if it strikes, and to provide information to improve long-term survival;

(B) continue and expand programs to provide physicians and the public with state-of-the-art information on the treatment of particular forms of cancers, and to identify those clinical trials that might benefit patients while advancing knowledge of cancer treatment;

(C) assess the incorporation of state-of-the-art cancer treatments into clinical practice and the extent to which cancer patients receive such treatments and include the results of such assessments in the biennial reports required under section 284b of this title;

(D) maintain and operate the International Cancer Research Data Bank, which shall collect, catalog, store, and disseminate insofar as feasible the results of cancer research and treatment undertaken in any country for the use of any person involved in cancer research and treatment in any country; and

(E) to the extent practicable, in disseminating the results of such cancer research and treatment, utilize information systems available to the public.


(b) The Director of the Institute in carrying out the National Cancer Program—

(1) shall establish or support the large-scale production or distribution of specialized biological materials and other therapeutic substances for cancer research and set standards of safety and care for persons using such materials;

(2) shall, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, support (A) research in the cancer field outside the United States by highly qualified foreign nationals which can be expected to benefit the American people, (B) collaborative research involving American and foreign participants, and (C) the training of American scientists abroad and foreign scientists in the United States;

(3) shall, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, support appropriate programs of education and training (including continuing education and laboratory and clinical research training);

(4) shall encourage and coordinate cancer research by industrial concerns where such concerns evidence a particular capability for such research;

(5) may obtain (after consultation with the advisory council for the Institute and in accordance with section 3109 of title 5, but without regard to the limitation in such section on the period of service) the services of not more than one hundred and fifty-one experts or consultants who have scientific or professional qualifications;

(6)(A) may, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, acquire, construct, improve, repair, operate, and maintain laboratories, other research facilities, equipment, and such other real or personal property as the Director determines necessary;

(B) may, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, make grants for construction or renovation of facilities; and

(C) may, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, acquire, without regard to section 34 of title 40, by lease or otherwise through the Administrator of General Services, buildings or parts of buildings in the District of Columbia or communities located adjacent to the District of Columbia for the use of the Institute for a period not to exceed ten years;

(7) may, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, appoint one or more advisory committees composed of such private citizens and officials of Federal, State, and local governments to advise the Director with respect to the Director's functions;

(8) may, subject to section 284(b)(2) of this title and without regard to section 3324 of title 31 and section 5 of title 41, enter into such contracts, leases, cooperative agreements, as may be necessary in the conduct of functions of the Director, with any public agency, or with any person, firm, association, corporation, or educational institution; and

(9) shall, notwithstanding section 284(a) of this title, prepare and submit, directly to the President for review and transmittal to Congress, an annual budget estimate (including an estimate of the number and type of personnel needs for the Institute) for the National Cancer Program, after reasonable opportunity for comment (but without change) by the Secretary, the Director of NIH, and the Institute's advisory council.


Except as otherwise provided, experts and consultants whose services are obtained under paragraph (5) shall be paid or reimbursed, in accordance with title 5 for their travel to and from their place of service and for other expenses associated with their assignment. Such expenses shall not be allowed in connection with the assignment of an expert or consultant whose services are obtained under paragraph (5) unless the expert or consultant has agreed in writing to complete the entire period of the assignment or one year of the assignment, whichever is shorter, unless separated or reassigned for reasons which are beyond the control of the expert or consultant and which are acceptable to the Director of the Institute. If the expert or consultant violates the agreement, the money spent by the United States for such expenses is recoverable from the expert or consultant as a debt due the United States. The Secretary may waive in whole or in part a right of recovery under the preceding sentence.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §413, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 833; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §122, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3054; Pub. L. 101–93, §5(c), Aug. 16, 1989, 103 Stat. 611; Pub. L. 103–43, title III, §301(a)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 150.)

References in Text

The provisions of title 5 relating to reimbursement for travel expenses, referred to in subsec. (b), are classified generally to section 5701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (b)(9). Pub. L. 103–43 struck out subpar. (A) designation and subpar. (B) which permitted Director to receive from President and Office of Management and Budget directly all funds appropriated by Congress for obligation and expenditure by Institute.

1989—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 101–93 substituted "Institute and" for "Institute and and".

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–607, §122(1), designated existing provisions as par. (1), substituted "education program" for "education center", inserted "and the public and between the Institute and" after "between the Institute", and added par. (2).

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 100–607, §122(2)(A), substituted "after consultation with" for "with the approval of".

Subsec. (b)(8) to (10). Pub. L. 100–607, §122(2)(B), inserted "and" after "or educational institution;" in par. (8), redesignated par. (10) as (9), and struck out former par. (9) which related to International Cancer Research Data Bank.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 285a–6, 285a–7, 285a–8 of this title.

§285a–3. National cancer research and demonstration centers

(a) Cooperative agreements and grants for establishing and supporting

(1) The Director of the Institute may enter into cooperative agreements with and make grants to public or private nonprofit entities to pay all or part of the cost of planning, establishing, or strengthening, and providing basic operating support for centers for basic and clinical research into, training in, and demonstration of advanced diagnostic, prevention, control, and treatment methods for cancer.

(2) A cooperative agreement or grant under paragraph (1) shall be entered into in accordance with policies established by the Director of NIH and after consultation with the Institute's advisory council.

(b) Uses for Federal payments under cooperative agreements or grants

Federal payments made under a cooperative agreement or grant under subsection (a) of this section may be used for—

(1) construction (notwithstanding any limitation under section 289e of this title);

(2) staffing and other basic operating costs, including such patient care costs as are required for research;

(3) clinical training, including training for allied health professionals, continuing education for health professionals and allied health professions personnel, and information programs for the public respecting cancer; and

(4) demonstration purposes.


As used in this paragraph, the term "construction" does not include the acquisition of land, and the term "training" does not include research training for which National Research Service Awards may be provided under section 288 of this title.

(c) Period of support; additional periods

Support of a center under subsection (a) of this section may be for a period of not to exceed five years. Such period may be extended by the Director for additional periods of not more than five years each if the operations of such center have been reviewed by an appropriate technical and scientific peer review group established by the Director and if such group has recommended to the Director that such period should be extended.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §414, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 835; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §123, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3055.)

Amendments

1988—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 100–607 inserted "control," after "prevention,".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 285a–6, 285a–7 of this title.

§285a–4. President's Cancer Panel; establishment, membership, etc., functions

(a)(1) The President's Cancer Panel (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Panel") shall be composed of three persons appointed by the President who by virtue of their training, experience, and background are exceptionally qualified to appraise the National Cancer Program. At least two members of the Panel shall be distinguished scientists or physicians.

(2)(A) Members of the Panel shall be appointed for three-year terms, except that (i) any member appointed to fill a vacancy occurring prior to the expiration of the term for which the member's predecessor was appointed shall be appointed only for the remainder of such term, and (ii) a member may serve until the member's successor has taken office. If a vacancy occurs in the Panel, the President shall make an appointment to fill the vacancy not later than 90 days after the date the vacancy occurred.

(B) The President shall designate one of the members to serve as the chairman of the Panel for a term of one year.

(C) Members of the Panel shall each be entitled to receive the daily equivalent of the annual rate of basic pay in effect for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule for each day (including traveltime) during which they are engaged in the actual performance of duties as members of the Panel and shall be paid or reimbursed, in accordance with title 5, for their travel to and from their place of service and for other expenses associated with their assignment.

(3) The Panel shall meet at the call of the chairman, but not less often than four times a year. A transcript shall be kept of the proceedings of each meeting of the Panel, and the chairman shall make such transcript available to the public.

(b) The Panel shall monitor the development and execution of the activities of the National Cancer Program, and shall report directly to the President. Any delays or blockages in rapid execution of the Program shall immediately be brought to the attention of the President. The Panel shall submit to the President periodic progress reports on the National Cancer Program and shall submit to the President, the Secretary, and the Congress an annual evaluation of the efficacy of the Program and suggestions for improvements, and shall submit such other reports as the President shall direct.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §415, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 835.)

References in Text

The provisions of title 5 relating to reimbursement for travel expenses, referred to in subsec. (a)(2)(C), are classified generally to section 5701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Termination of Advisory Panels

Advisory panels established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a panel established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such panel is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a panel established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

References in Other Laws to GS–16, 17, or 18 Pay Rates

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

§285a–5. Associate Director for Prevention; appointment; function

(a) There shall be in the Institute an Associate Director for Prevention to coordinate and promote the programs in the Institute concerning the prevention of cancer. The Associate Director shall be appointed by the Director of the Institute from individuals who because of their professional training or experience are experts in public health or preventive medicine.

(b) The Associate Director for Prevention shall prepare for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 284b of this title a description of the prevention activities of the Institute, including a description of the staff and resources allocated to those activities.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §416, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 836.)

§285a–6. Breast and gynecological cancers

(a) Expansion and coordination of activities

The Director of the Institute, in consultation with the National Cancer Advisory Board, shall expand, intensify, and coordinate the activities of the Institute with respect to research on breast cancer, ovarian cancer, and other cancers of the reproductive system of women.

(b) Coordination with other institutes

The Director of the Institute shall coordinate the activities of the Director under subsection (a) of this section with similar activities conducted by other national research institutes and agencies of the National Institutes of Health to the extent that such Institutes 1 and agencies have responsibilities that are related to breast cancer and other cancers of the reproductive system of women.

(c) Programs for breast cancer

(1) In general

In carrying out subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall conduct or support research to expand the understanding of the cause of, and to find a cure for, breast cancer. Activities under such subsection shall provide for an expansion and intensification of the conduct and support of—

(A) basic research concerning the etiology and causes of breast cancer;

(B) clinical research and related activities concerning the causes, prevention, detection and treatment of breast cancer;

(C) control programs with respect to breast cancer in accordance with section 285a–1 of this title, including community-based programs designed to assist women who are members of medically underserved populations, low-income populations, or minority groups;

(D) information and education programs with respect to breast cancer in accordance with section 285a–2 of this title; and

(E) research and demonstration centers with respect to breast cancer in accordance with section 285a–3 of this title, including the development and operation of centers for breast cancer research to bring together basic and clinical, biomedical and behavioral scientists to conduct basic, clinical, epidemiological, psychosocial, prevention and treatment research and related activities on breast cancer.


Not less than six centers shall be operated under subparagraph (E). Activities of such centers should include supporting new and innovative research and training programs for new researchers. Such centers shall give priority to expediting the transfer of research advances to clinical applications.

(2) Implementation of plan for programs

(A) The Director of the Institute shall ensure that the research programs described in paragraph (1) are implemented in accordance with a plan for the programs. Such plan shall include comments and recommendations that the Director of the Institute considers appropriate, with due consideration provided to the professional judgment needs of the Institute as expressed in the annual budget estimate prepared in accordance with section 285a–2(9) 2 of this title. The Director of the Institute, in consultation with the National Cancer Advisory Board, shall periodically review and revise such plan.

(B) Not later than October 1, 1993, the Director of the Institute shall submit a copy of the plan to the President's Cancer Panel, the Secretary and the Director of NIH.

(C) The Director of the Institute shall submit any revisions of the plan to the President's Cancer Panel, the Secretary, and the Director of NIH.

(D) The Secretary shall provide a copy of the plan submitted under subparagraph (A), and any revisions submitted under subparagraph (C), to the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate.

(d) Other cancers

In carrying out subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall conduct or support research on ovarian cancer and other cancers of the reproductive system of women. Activities under such subsection shall provide for the conduct and support of—

(1) basic research concerning the etiology and causes of ovarian cancer and other cancers of the reproductive system of women;

(2) clinical research and related activities into the causes, prevention, detection and treatment of ovarian cancer and other cancers of the reproductive system of women;

(3) control programs with respect to ovarian cancer and other cancers of the reproductive system of women in accordance with section 285a–1 of this title;

(4) information and education programs with respect to ovarian cancer and other cancers of the reproductive system of women in accordance with section 285a–2 of this title; and

(5) research and demonstration centers with respect to ovarian cancer and cancers of the reproductive system in accordance with section 285a–3 of this title.

(e) Report

The Director of the Institute shall prepare, for inclusion in the biennial report submitted under section 284b of this title, a report that describes the activities of the National Cancer Institute under the research programs referred to in subsection (a) of this section, that shall include—

(1) a description of the research plan with respect to breast cancer prepared under subsection (c) of this section;

(2) an assessment of the development, revision, and implementation of such plan;

(3) a description and evaluation of the progress made, during the period for which such report is prepared, in the research programs on breast cancer and cancers of the reproductive system of women;

(4) a summary and analysis of expenditures made, during the period for which such report is made, for activities with respect to breast cancer and cancers of the reproductive system of women conducted and supported by the National Institutes of Health; and

(5) such comments and recommendations as the Director considers appropriate.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §417, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title IV, §401, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 153.)

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285a–8 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should not be capitalized.

2 So in original. Probably should be section "285a–2(b)(9)".

§285a–7. Prostate cancer

(a) Expansion and coordination of activities

The Director of the Institute, in consultation with the National Cancer Advisory Board, shall expand, intensify, and coordinate the activities of the Institute with respect to research on prostate cancer.

(b) Coordination with other institutes

The Director of the Institute shall coordinate the activities of the Director under subsection (a) of this section with similar activities conducted by other national research institutes and agencies of the National Institutes of Health to the extent that such Institutes 1 and agencies have responsibilities that are related to prostate cancer.

(c) Programs

(1) In general

In carrying out subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall conduct or support research to expand the understanding of the cause of, and to find a cure for, prostate cancer. Activities under such subsection shall provide for an expansion and intensification of the conduct and support of—

(A) basic research concerning the etiology and causes of prostate cancer;

(B) clinical research and related activities concerning the causes, prevention, detection and treatment of prostate cancer;

(C) prevention and control and early detection programs with respect to prostate cancer in accordance with section 285a–1 of this title, particularly as it relates to intensifying research on the role of prostate specific antigen for the screening and early detection of prostate cancer;

(D) an Inter-Institute Task Force, under the direction of the Director of the Institute, to provide coordination between relevant National Institutes of Health components of research efforts on prostate cancer;

(E) control programs with respect to prostate cancer in accordance with section 285a–1 of this title;

(F) information and education programs with respect to prostate cancer in accordance with section 285a–2 of this title; and

(G) research and demonstration centers with respect to prostate cancer in accordance with section 285a–3 of this title, including the development and operation of centers for prostate cancer research to bring together basic and clinical, biomedical and behavioral scientists to conduct basic, clinical, epidemiological, psychosocial, prevention and control, treatment, research, and related activities on prostate cancer.


Not less than six centers shall be operated under subparagraph (G). Activities of such centers should include supporting new and innovative research and training programs for new researchers. Such centers shall give priority to expediting the transfer of research advances to clinical applications.

(2) Implementation of plan for programs

(A) The Director of the Institute shall ensure that the research programs described in paragraph (1) are implemented in accordance with a plan for the programs. Such plan shall include comments and recommendations that the Director of the Institute considers appropriate, with due consideration provided to the professional judgment needs of the Institute as expressed in the annual budget estimate prepared in accordance with section 285a–2(9) 2 of this title. The Director of the Institute, in consultation with the National Cancer Advisory Board, shall periodically review and revise such plan.

(B) Not later than October 1, 1993, the Director of the Institute shall submit a copy of the plan to the President's Cancer Panel, the Secretary, and the Director of NIH.

(C) The Director of the Institute shall submit any revisions of the plan to the President's Cancer Panel, the Secretary, and the Director of NIH.

(D) The Secretary shall provide a copy of the plan submitted under subparagraph (A), and any revisions submitted under subparagraph (C), to the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §417A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title IV, §402, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 155.)

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285a–8 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should not be capitalized

2 So in original. Probably should be section "285a–2(b)(9)".

§285a–8. Authorization of appropriations

(a) Activities generally

For the purpose of carrying out this subpart, there are authorized to be appropriated $2,728,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 and 1996.

(b) Breast cancer and gynecological cancers

(1) Breast cancer

(A) For the purpose of carrying out subparagraph (A) of section 285a–6(c)(1) of this title, there are authorized to be appropriated $225,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 through 2003. Such authorizations of appropriations are in addition to the authorizations of appropriations established in subsection (a) of this section with respect to such purpose.

(B) For the purpose of carrying out subparagraphs (B) through (E) of section 285a–6(c)(1) of this title, there are authorized to be appropriated $100,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 through 2003. Such authorizations of appropriations are in addition to the authorizations of appropriations established in subsection (a) of this section with respect to such purpose.

(2) Other cancers

For the purpose of carrying out subsection (d) of section 285a–6 of this title, there are authorized to be appropriated $75,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as are necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 through 2003. Such authorizations of appropriations are in addition to the authorizations of appropriations established in subsection (a) of this section with respect to such purpose.

(c) Prostate cancer

For the purpose of carrying out section 285a–7 of this title, there are authorized to be appropriated $72,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 and 1996. Such authorizations of appropriations are in addition to the authorizations of appropriations established in subsection (a) of this section with respect to such purpose.

(d) Allocation regarding cancer control

(1) In general

Of the amounts appropriated for the National Cancer Institute for a fiscal year, the Director of the Institute shall make available not less than the applicable percentage specified in paragraph (2) for carrying out the cancer control activities authorized in section 285a–1 of this title and for which budget estimates are made under section 285a–2(b)(9) of this title for the fiscal year.

(2) Applicable percentage

The percentage referred to in paragraph (1) is—

(A) 7 percent, in the case of fiscal year 1994;

(B) 9 percent, in the case of fiscal year 1995; and

(C) 10 percent, in the case of fiscal year 1996 and each subsequent fiscal year.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §417B, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title IV, §403(a), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 157; amended Pub. L. 105–340, title I, §103, Oct. 31, 1998, 112 Stat. 3192.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (b)(1)(A), (B), (2). Pub. L. 105–340 substituted "through 2003" for "and 1996".

subpart 2—national heart, lung, and blood institute

§285b. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of research, training, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases and with respect to the use of blood and blood products and the management of blood resources.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §418, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 836.)

§285b–1. Heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood disease prevention and control programs

(a) The Director of the Institute shall conduct and support programs for the prevention and control of heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases. Such programs shall include community-based and population-based programs carried out in cooperation with other Federal agencies, with public health agencies of State or local governments, with nonprofit private entities that are community-based health agencies, or with other appropriate public or nonprofit private entities.

(b) In carrying out programs under subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall give special consideration to the prevention and control of heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases in children, and in populations that are at increased risk with respect to such diseases.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §419, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 836; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title V, §505, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 160.)

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43 substituted subsecs. (a) and (b) for former section which read as follows: "The Director of the Institute, under policies established by the Director of NIH and after consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, shall establish programs as necessary for cooperation with other Federal health agencies, State, local, and regional public health agencies, and nonprofit private health agencies in the diagnosis, prevention, and treatment (including the provision of emergency medical services) of heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases, appropriately emphasizing the prevention, diagnosis, and treatment of such diseases of children."

§285b–2. Information and education

The Director of the Institute shall collect, identify, analyze, and disseminate on a timely basis, through publications and other appropriate means, to patients, families of patients, physicians and other health professionals, and the general public, information on research, prevention, diagnosis, and treatment of heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases, the maintenance of health to reduce the incidence of such diseases, and on the use of blood and blood products and the management of blood resources. In carrying out this section, the Director of the Institute shall place special emphasis upon the utilization of collaborative efforts with both the public and private sectors to—

(1) increase the awareness and knowledge of health care professionals and the public regarding the prevention of heart and blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases and the utilization of blood resources; and

(2) develop and disseminate to health professionals, patients and patient families, and the public information designed to encourage adults and children to adopt healthful practices concerning the prevention of such diseases.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §420, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 837; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §126, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3055.)

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–607 amended second sentence generally. Prior to amendment, second sentence read as follows: "In carrying out this section the Director of the Institute shall place special emphasis upon—

"(1) the dissemination of information regarding diet and nutrition, environmental pollutants, exercise, stress, hypertension, cigarette smoking, weight control, and other factors affecting the prevention of arteriosclerosis and other cardiovascular diseases and of pulmonary and blood diseases; and

"(2) the dissemination of information designed to encourage children to adopt healthful habits respecting the risk factors related to the prevention of such diseases."

§285b–3. National Heart, Blood Vessel, Lung, and Blood Diseases and Blood Resources Program; administrative provisions

(a)(1) The National Heart, Blood Vessel, Lung, and Blood Diseases and Blood Resources Program (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Program") may provide for—

(A) investigation into the epidemiology, etiology, and prevention of all forms and aspects of heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases, including investigations into the social, environmental, behavioral, nutritional, biological, and genetic determinants and influences involved in the epidemiology, etiology, and prevention of such diseases;

(B) studies and research into the basic biological processes and mechanisms involved in the underlying normal and abnormal heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood phenomena;

(C) research into the development, trial, and evaluation of techniques, drugs, and devices (including computers) used in, and approaches to, the diagnosis, treatment (including the provision of emergency medical services), and prevention of heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases and the rehabilitation of patients suffering from such diseases;

(D) establishment of programs that will focus and apply scientific and technological efforts involving the biological, physical, and engineering sciences to all facets of heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases with emphasis on the refinement, development, and evaluation of technological devices that will assist, replace, or monitor vital organs and improve instrumentation for detection, diagnosis, and treatment of and rehabilitation from such diseases;

(E) establishment of programs for the conduct and direction of field studies, large-scale testing and evaluation, and demonstration of preventive, diagnostic, therapeutic, and rehabilitative approaches to, and emergency medical services for, such diseases;

(F) studies and research into blood diseases and blood, and into the use of blood for clinical purposes and all aspects of the management of blood resources in the United States, including the collection, preservation, fractionation, and distribution of blood and blood products;

(G) the education (including continuing education) and training of scientists, clinical investigators, and educators, in fields and specialties (including computer sciences) requisite to the conduct of clinical programs respecting heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases and blood resources;

(H) public and professional education relating to all aspects of such diseases, including the prevention of such diseases, and the use of blood and blood products and the management of blood resources;

(I) establishment of programs for study and research into heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases of children (including cystic fibrosis, hyaline membrane, hemolytic diseases such as sickle cell anemia and Cooley's anemia, and hemophilic diseases) and for the development and demonstration of diagnostic, treatment, and preventive approaches to such diseases; and

(J) establishment of programs for study, research, development, demonstrations and evaluation of emergency medical services for people who become critically ill in connection with heart, blood vessel, lung, or blood diseases.


(2) The Program shall be coordinated with other national research institutes to the extent that they have responsibilities respecting such diseases and shall give special emphasis to the continued development in the Institute of programs related to the causes of stroke and to effective coordination of such programs with related stroke programs in the National Institute of Neurological and Communicative Disorders and Stroke. The Director of the Institute, with the advice of the advisory council for the Institute, shall revise annually the plan for the Program and shall carry out the Program in accordance with such plan.

(b) In carrying out the Program, the Director of the Institute, under policies established by the Director of NIH—

(1) may, after consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, obtain (in accordance with section 3109 of title 5, but without regard to the limitation in such section on the period of such service) the services of not more than one hundred experts or consultants who have scientific or professional qualifications;

(2)(A) may, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, acquire and construct, improve, repair, operate, alter, renovate, and maintain, heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood disease and blood resource laboratories, research, training, and other facilities, equipment, and such other real or personal property as the Director determines necessary;

(B) may, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, make grants for construction or renovation of facilities; and

(C) may, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, acquire, without regard to section 34 of title 40, by lease or otherwise, through the Administrator of General Services, buildings or parts of buildings in the District of Columbia or communities located adjacent to the District of Columbia for the use of the Institute for a period not to exceed ten years;

(3) subject to section 284(b)(2) of this title and without regard to section 3324 of title 31 and section 5 of title 41, may enter into such contracts, leases, cooperative agreements, or other transactions, as may be necessary in the conduct of the Director's functions, with any public agency, or with any person, firm, association, corporation, or educational institutions;

(4) may make grants to public and nonprofit private entities to assist in meeting the cost of the care of patients in hospitals, clinics, and related facilities who are participating in research projects; and

(5) shall, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, conduct appropriate intramural training and education programs, including continuing education and laboratory and clinical research training programs.


Except as otherwise provided, experts and consultants whose services are obtained under paragraph (1) shall be paid or reimbursed, in accordance with title 5, for their travel to and from their place of service and for other expenses associated with their assignment. Such expenses shall not be allowed in connection with the assignment of an expert or consultant whose services are obtained under paragraph (1) unless the expert or consultant has agreed in writing to complete the entire period of the assignment or one year of the assignment, whichever is shorter, unless separated or reassigned for reasons which are beyond the control of the expert or consultant and which are acceptable to the Director of the Institute. If the expert or consultant violates the agreement, the money spent by the United States for such expenses is recoverable from the expert or consultant as a debt due the United States. The Secretary may waive in whole or in part a right of recovery under the preceding sentence.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §421, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 837; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §127, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3055; Pub. L. 103–43, title V, §501, title XX, §2008(b)(3), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 158, 211.)

References in Text

The provisions of title 5 relating to reimbursement for travel expenses, referred to in subsec. (b), are classified generally to section 5701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 103–43, §2008(b)(3), inserted comma after "may".

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 103–43, §501, added par. (5).

1988—Subsec. (a)(1)(D). Pub. L. 100–607, §127(1), inserted "and rehabilitation from" after "and treatment of".

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 100–607, §127(2), substituted "after consultation with" for ", after approval of".

§285b–4. National research and demonstration centers

(a) Heart, blood vessel, lung, blood diseases, and blood resources; utilization of centers for prevention programs

(1) The Director of the Institute may provide, in accordance with subsection (c) of this section, for the development of—

(A) ten centers for basic and clinical research into, training in, and demonstration of, advanced diagnostic, prevention, and treatment and rehabilitation methods (including methods of providing emergency medical services) for heart and blood vessel diseases;

(B) ten centers for basic and clinical research into, training in, and demonstration of, advanced diagnostic, prevention, and treatment and rehabilitation methods (including methods of providing emergency medical services) for lung diseases (including bronchitis, emphysema, asthma, cystic fibrosis, and other lung diseases of children);

(C) ten centers for basic and clinical research into, training in, and demonstration of, advanced diagnostic, prevention, and treatment methods (including methods of providing emergency medical services) for blood diseases and research into blood, in the use of blood products and in the management of blood resources; and

(D) three centers for basic and clinical research into, training in, and demonstration of, advanced diagnostic, prevention, and treatment (including genetic studies, intrauterine environment studies, postnatal studies, heart arrhythmias, and acquired heart disease and preventive cardiology) for cardiovascular diseases in children.


(2) The centers developed under paragraph (1) shall, in addition to being utilized for research, training, and demonstrations, be utilized for the following prevention programs for cardiovascular, pulmonary, and blood diseases:

(A) Programs to develop improved methods of detecting individuals with a high risk of developing cardiovascular, pulmonary, and blood diseases.

(B) Programs to develop improved methods of intervention against those factors which cause individuals to have a high risk of developing such diseases.

(C) Programs to develop health professions and allied health professions personnel highly skilled in the prevention of such diseases.

(D) Programs to develop improved methods of providing emergency medical services for persons with such diseases.

(E) Programs of continuing education for health and allied health professionals in the diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of such diseases and the maintenance of health to reduce the incidence of such diseases and information programs for the public respecting the prevention and early diagnosis and treatment of such diseases and the maintenance of health.


(3) The research, training, and demonstration activities carried out through any such center may relate to any one or more of the diseases referred to in paragraph (1) of this subsection.

(b) Sickle cell anemia

The Director of the Institute shall provide, in accordance with subsection (c) of this section, for the development of ten centers for basic and clinical research into the diagnosis, treatment, and control of sickle cell anemia.

(c) Cooperative agreements and grants for establishing and supporting; uses for Federal payments; period of support, additional periods

(1) The Director of the Institute may enter into cooperative agreements with and make grants to public or private nonprofit entities to pay all or part of the cost of planning, establishing, or strengthening, and providing basic operating support for centers for basic and clinical research into, training in, and demonstration of the management of blood resources and advanced diagnostic, prevention, and treatment methods for heart, blood vessel, lung, or blood diseases.

(2) A cooperative agreement or grant under paragraph (1) shall be entered into in accordance with policies established by the Director of NIH and after consultation with the Institute's advisory council.

(3) Federal payments made under a cooperative agreement or grant under paragraph (1) may be used for—

(A) construction (notwithstanding any limitation under section 289e of this title);

(B) staffing and other basic operating costs, including such patient care costs as are required for research;

(C) training, including training for allied health professionals; and

(D) demonstration purposes.


As used in this subsection, the term "construction" does not include the acquisition of land, and the term "training" does not include research training for which National Research Service Awards may be provided under section 288 of this title.

(4) Support of a center under paragraph (1) may be for a period of not to exceed five years. Such period may be extended by the Director for additional periods of not more than five years each if the operations of such center have been reviewed by an appropriate technical and scientific peer review group established by the Director and if such group has recommended to the Director that such period should be extended.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §422, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 839; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §128, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3055; Pub. L. 103–43, title V, §502, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 158.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (a)(1)(D). Pub. L. 103–43 added subpar. (D).

1988—Subsec. (a)(1)(A), (B). Pub. L. 100–607 inserted "and rehabilitation" after "prevention, and treatment".

§285b–5. Repealed. Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §129, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3055

Section, act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §423, as added Nov. 20, 1985, Pub. L. 99–158, §2, 99 Stat. 841, directed Secretary to establish an Interagency Technical Committee on Heart, Blood Vessel, Lung, and Blood Diseases and Blood Resources.

§285b–6. Associate Director for Prevention; appointment; function

(a) There shall be in the Institute an Associate Director for Prevention to coordinate and promote the programs in the Institute concerning the prevention of heart, blood vessel, lung, and blood diseases. The Associate Director shall be appointed by the Director of the Institute from individuals who because of their professional training or experience are experts in public health or preventive medicine.

(b) The Associate Director for Prevention shall prepare for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 284b of this title a description of the prevention activities of the Institute, including a description of the staff and resources allocated to those activities.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §423, formerly §424, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 841; renumbered §423, Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §129, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3055.)

Prior Provisions

A prior section 423 of act July 1, 1944, was classified to section 285b–5 of this title prior to repeal by Pub. L. 100–607.

§285b–7. National Center on Sleep Disorders Research

(a) Establishment

Not later than 1 year after June 10, 1993, the Director of the Institute shall establish the National Center on Sleep Disorders Research (in this section referred to as the "Center"). The Center shall be headed by a director, who shall be appointed by the Director of the Institute.

(b) Purpose

The general purpose of the Center is—

(1) the conduct and support of research, training, health information dissemination, and other activities with respect to sleep disorders, including biological and circadian rhythm research, basic understanding of sleep, chronobiological and other sleep related research; and

(2) to coordinate the activities of the Center with similar activities of other Federal agencies, including the other agencies of the National Institutes of Health, and similar activities of other public entities and nonprofit entities.

(c) Sleep Disorders Research Advisory Board

(1) The Director of the National Institutes of Health shall establish a board to be known as the Sleep Disorders Research Advisory Board (in this section referred to as the "Advisory Board").

(2) The Advisory Board shall advise, assist, consult with, and make recommendations to the Director of the National Institutes of Health, through the Director of the Institute, and the Director of the Center concerning matters relating to the scientific activities carried out by and through the Center and the policies respecting such activities, including recommendations with respect to the plan required in subsection (c) 1 of this section.

(3)(A) The Director of the National Institutes of Health shall appoint to the Advisory Board 12 appropriately qualified representatives of the public who are not officers or employees of the Federal Government. Of such members, eight shall be representatives of health and scientific disciplines with respect to sleep disorders and four shall be individuals representing the interests of individuals with or undergoing treatment for sleep disorders.

(B) The following officials shall serve as ex officio members of the Advisory Board:

(i) The Director of the National Institutes of Health.

(ii) The Director of the Center.

(iii) The Director of the National Heart, Lung and Blood Institute.

(iv) The Director of the National Institute of Mental Health.

(v) The Director of the National Institute on Aging.

(vi) The Director of the National Institute of Child Health and Human Development.

(vii) The Director of the National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke.

(viii) The Assistant Secretary for Health.

(ix) The Assistant Secretary of Defense (Health Affairs).

(x) The Chief Medical Director of the Veterans' Administration.


(4) The members of the Advisory Board shall, from among the members of the Advisory Board, designate an individual to serve as the chair of the Advisory Board.

(5) Except as inconsistent with, or inapplicable to, this section, the provisions of section 284a of this title shall apply to the advisory board 2 established under this section in the same manner as such provisions apply to any advisory council established under such section.

(d) Development of comprehensive research plan; revision

(1) After consultation with the Director of the Center and the advisory board 2 established under subsection (c) of this section, the Director of the National Institutes of Health shall develop a comprehensive plan for the conduct and support of sleep disorders research.

(2) The plan developed under paragraph (1) shall identify priorities with respect to such research and shall provide for the coordination of such research conducted or supported by the agencies of the National Institutes of Health.

(3) The Director of the National Institutes of Health (after consultation with the Director of the Center and the advisory board 2 established under subsection (c) of this section) shall revise the plan developed under paragraph (1) as appropriate.

(e) Collection and dissemination of information

The Director of the Center, in cooperation with the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, is authorized to coordinate activities with the Department of Transportation, the Department of Defense, the Department of Education, the Department of Labor, and the Department of Commerce to collect data, conduct studies, and disseminate public information concerning the impact of sleep disorders and sleep deprivation.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §424, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title V, §503, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 159.)

Change of Name

Reference to Chief Medical Director of Department of Veterans Affairs deemed to refer to Under Secretary for Health of Department of Veterans Affairs pursuant to section 302(e) of Pub. L. 102–405, set out as a note under section 305 of Title 38, Veterans' Benefits.

Reference to Chief Medical Director of Veterans' Administration deemed to refer to Chief Medical Director of Department of Veterans Affairs pursuant to section 10 of Pub. L. 100–527, set out as a Department of Veterans Affairs Act note under section 201 of Title 38.

Termination of Advisory Boards

Advisory boards established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a board established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such board is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a board established by Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

1 So in original. Probably should be subsection "(d)".

2 So in original. Probably should be capitalized.

§285b–7a. Heart attack, stroke, and other cardiovascular diseases in women

(a) In general

The Director of the Institute shall expand, intensify, and coordinate research and related activities of the Institute with respect to heart attack, stroke, and other cardiovascular diseases in women.

(b) Coordination with other institutes

The Director of the Institute shall coordinate activities under subsection (a) of this section with similar activities conducted by the other national research institutes and agencies of the National Institutes of Health to the extent that such Institutes and agencies have responsibilities that are related to heart attack, stroke, and other cardiovascular diseases in women.

(c) Certain programs

In carrying out subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall conduct or support research to expand the understanding of the causes of, and to develop methods for preventing, cardiovascular diseases in women. Activities under such subsection shall include conducting and supporting the following:

(1) Research to determine the reasons underlying the prevalence of heart attack, stroke, and other cardiovascular diseases in women, including African-American women and other women who are members of racial or ethnic minority groups.

(2) Basic research concerning the etiology and causes of cardiovascular diseases in women.

(3) Epidemiological studies to address the frequency and natural history of such diseases and the differences among men and women, and among racial and ethnic groups, with respect to such diseases.

(4) The development of safe, efficient, and cost-effective diagnostic approaches to evaluating women with suspected ischemic heart disease.

(5) Clinical research for the development and evaluation of new treatments for women, including rehabilitation.

(6) Studies to gain a better understanding of methods of preventing cardiovascular diseases in women, including applications of effective methods for the control of blood pressure, lipids, and obesity.

(7) Information and education programs for patients and health care providers on risk factors associated with heart attack, stroke, and other cardiovascular diseases in women, and on the importance of the prevention or control of such risk factors and timely referral with appropriate diagnosis and treatment. Such programs shall include information and education on health-related behaviors that can improve such important risk factors as smoking, obesity, high blood cholesterol, and lack of exercise.

(d) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this section, there are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1999 through 2003. The authorization of appropriations established in the preceding sentence is in addition to any other authorization of appropriation that is available for such purpose.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §424A, as added Pub. L. 105–340, title I, §104, Oct. 31, 1998, 112 Stat. 3192.)

§285b–8. Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this subpart, there are authorized to be appropriated $1,500,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 and 1996.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §425, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title V, §504, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 160.)

subpart 3—national institute of diabetes and digestive and kidney diseases

§285c. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of research, training, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to diabetes mellitus and endocrine and metabolic diseases, digestive diseases and nutritional disorders, and kidney, urologic, and hematologic diseases.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §426, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 841.)

Review of Disease Research Programs of the National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases

Section 10 of Pub. L. 99–158 provided that: "The Secretary of Health and Human Services shall conduct an administrative review of the disease research programs of the National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases to determine if any of such programs could be more effectively and efficiently managed by other national research institutes. The Secretary shall complete such review within the one-year period beginning on the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 20, 1985]."

§285c–1. Data systems and information clearinghouses

(a) National Diabetes Data System and National Diabetes Clearinghouse

The Director of the Institute shall (1) establish the National Diabetes Data System for the collection, storage, analysis, retrieval, and dissemination of data derived from patient populations with diabetes, including, where possible, data involving general populations for the purpose of detection of individuals with a risk of developing diabetes, and (2) establish the National Diabetes Information Clearinghouse to facilitate and enhance knowledge and understanding of diabetes on the part of health professionals, patients, and the public through the effective dissemination of information.

(b) National Digestive Diseases Data System and National Digestive Diseases Information Clearinghouse

The Director of the Institute shall (1) establish the National Digestive Diseases Data System for the collection, storage, analysis, retrieval, and dissemination of data derived from patient populations with digestive diseases, including, where possible, data involving general populations for the purpose of detection of individuals with a risk of developing digestive diseases, and (2) establish the National Digestive Diseases Information Clearinghouse to facilitate and enhance knowledge and understanding of digestive diseases on the part of health professionals, patients, and the public through the effective dissemination of information.

(c) National Kidney and Urologic Diseases Data System and National Kidney and Urologic Diseases Information Clearinghouse

The Director of the Institute shall (1) establish the National Kidney and Urologic Diseases Data System for the collection, storage, analysis, retrieval, and dissemination of data derived from patient populations with kidney and urologic diseases, including, where possible, data involving general populations for the purpose of detection of individuals with a risk of developing kidney and urologic diseases, and (2) establish the National Kidney and Urologic Diseases Information Clearinghouse to facilitate and enhance knowledge and understanding of kidney and urologic diseases on the part of health professionals, patients, and the public through the effective dissemination of information.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §427, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 841.)

§285c–2. Division Directors for Diabetes, Endocrinology, and Metabolic Diseases, Digestive Diseases and Nutrition, and Kidney, Urologic, and Hematologic Diseases; functions

(a)(1) In the Institute there shall be a Division Director for Diabetes, Endocrinology, and Metabolic Diseases, a Division Director for Digestive Diseases and Nutrition, and a Division Director for Kidney, Urologic, and Hematologic Diseases. Such Division Directors, under the supervision of the Director of the Institute, shall be responsible for—

(A) developing a coordinated plan (including recommendations for expenditures) for each of the national research institutes within the National Institutes of Health with respect to research and training concerning diabetes, endocrine and metabolic diseases, digestive diseases and nutrition, and kidney, urologic, and hematologic diseases;

(B) assessing the adequacy of management approaches for the activities within such institutes concerning such diseases and nutrition and developing improved approaches if needed;

(C) monitoring and reviewing expenditures by such institutes concerning such diseases and nutrition; and

(D) identifying research opportunities concerning such diseases and nutrition and recommending ways to utilize such opportunities.


(2) The Director of the Institute shall transmit to the Director of NIH the plans, recommendations, and reviews of the Division Directors under subparagraphs (A) through (D) of paragraph (1) together with such comments and recommendations as the Director of the Institute determines appropriate.

(b) The Director of the Institute, acting through the Division Director for Diabetes, Endocrinology, and Metabolic Diseases, the Division Director for Digestive Diseases and Nutrition, and the Division Director for Kidney, Urologic, and Hematologic Diseases, shall—

(1) carry out programs of support for research and training (other than training for which National Research Service Awards may be made under section 288 of this title) in the diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of diabetes mellitus and endocrine and metabolic diseases, digestive diseases and nutritional disorders, and kidney, urologic, and hematologic diseases, including support for training in medical schools, graduate clinical training, graduate training in epidemiology, epidemiology studies, clinical trials, and interdisciplinary research programs; and

(2) establish programs of evaluation, planning, and dissemination of knowledge related to such research and training.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §428, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 842; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2008(b)(4), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 211.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "the" for "the the" before "Division Director for Diabetes" in introductory provisions.

§285c–3. Interagency coordinating committees

(a) Establishment and purpose

For the purpose of—

(1) better coordination of the research activities of all the national research institutes relating to diabetes mellitus, digestive diseases, and kidney, urologic, and hematologic diseases; and

(2) coordinating those aspects of all Federal health programs and activities relating to such diseases to assure the adequacy and technical soundness of such programs and activities and to provide for the full communication and exchange of information necessary to maintain adequate coordination of such programs and activities;


the Secretary shall establish a Diabetes Mellitus Interagency Coordinating Committee, a Digestive Diseases Interagency Coordinating Committee, and a Kidney, Urologic, and Hematologic Diseases Coordinating Committee (hereafter in this section individually referred to as a "Committee").

(b) Membership; chairman; meetings

Each Committee shall be composed of the Directors of each of the national research institutes and divisions involved in research with respect to the diseases for which the Committee is established, the Division Director of the Institute for the diseases for which the Committee is established, the Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs, and the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs (or the designees of such officers) and shall include representation from all other Federal departments and agencies whose programs involve health functions or responsibilities relevant to such diseases, as determined by the Secretary. Each Committee shall be chaired by the Director of NIH (or the designee of the Director). Each Committee shall meet at the call of the chairman, but not less often than four times a year.

(c) Annual report

Each Committee shall prepare an annual report for—

(1) the Secretary;

(2) the Director of NIH; and

(3) the Advisory Board established under section 285c–4 of this title for the diseases for which the Committee was established,


detailing the work of the Committee in carrying out paragraphs (1) and (2) of subsection (a) of this section in the fiscal year for which the report was prepared. Such report shall be submitted not later than 120 days after the end of each fiscal year.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §429, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 843; amended Pub. L. 100–527, §10(4), Oct. 25, 1988, 102 Stat. 2641; Pub. L. 102–405, title III, §302(e)(1), Oct. 9, 1992, 106 Stat. 1985.)

Amendments

1992—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–405 substituted "Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Chief Medical Director of the Department of Veterans Affairs".

1988—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–527 substituted "Chief Medical Director of the Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Chief Medical Director of the Veterans' Administration".

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–527 effective Mar. 15, 1989, see section 18(a) of Pub. L. 100–527, set out as a Department of Veterans Affairs Act note under section 301 of Title 38, Veterans' Benefits.

§285c–4. Advisory boards

(a) Establishment

The Secretary shall establish in the Institute the National Diabetes Advisory Board, the National Digestive Diseases Advisory Board, and the National Kidney and Urologic Diseases Advisory Board (hereafter in this section individually referred to as an "Advisory Board").

(b) Membership; ex officio members

Each Advisory Board shall be composed of eighteen appointed members and nonvoting ex officio members as follows:

(1) The Secretary shall appoint—

(A) twelve members from individuals who are scientists, physicians, and other health professionals, who are not officers or employees of the United States, and who represent the specialties and disciplines relevant to the diseases with respect to which the Advisory Board is established; and

(B) six members from the general public who are knowledgeable with respect to such diseases, including at least one member who is a person who has such a disease and one member who is a parent of a person who has such a disease.


Of the appointed members at least five shall by virtue of training or experience be knowledgeable in the fields of health education, nursing, data systems, public information, and community program development.

(2)(A) The following shall be ex officio members of each Advisory Board:

(i) The Assistant Secretary for Health, the Director of NIH, the Director of the National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases, the Director of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs, the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs, and the Division Director of the National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases for the diseases for which the Board is established (or the designees of such officers).

(ii) Such other officers and employees of the United States as the Secretary determines necessary for the Advisory Board to carry out its functions.


(B) In the case of the National Diabetes Advisory Board, the following shall also be ex officio members: The Director of the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, the Director of the National Eye Institute, the Director of the National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, and the Administrator of the Health Resources and Services Administration (or the designees of such officers).

(c) Compensation

Members of an Advisory Board who are officers or employees of the Federal Government shall serve as members of the Advisory Board without compensation in addition to that received in their regular public employment. Other members of the Board shall receive compensation at rates not to exceed the daily equivalent of the annual rate in effect for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule for each day (including traveltime) they are engaged in the performance of their duties as members of the Board.

(d) Term of office; vacancy

The term of office of an appointed member of an Advisory Board is four years, except that no term of office may extend beyond the expiration of the Advisory Board. Any member appointed to fill a vacancy for an unexpired term shall be appointed for the remainder of such term. A member may serve after the expiration of the member's term until a successor has taken office. If a vacancy occurs in an Advisory Board, the Secretary shall make an appointment to fill the vacancy not later than 90 days from the date the vacancy occurred.

(e) Chairman

The members of each Advisory Board shall select a chairman from among the appointed members.

(f) Executive director; professional and clerical staff; administrative support services and facilities

The Secretary shall, after consultation with and consideration of the recommendations of an Advisory Board, provide the Advisory Board with an executive director and one other professional staff member. In addition, the Secretary shall, after consultation with and consideration of the recommendations of the Advisory Board, provide the Advisory Board with such additional professional staff members, such clerical staff members, such services of consultants, such information, and (through contracts or other arrangements) such administrative support services and facilities, as the Secretary determines are necessary for the Advisory Board to carry out its functions.

(g) Meetings

Each Advisory Board shall meet at the call of the chairman or upon request of the Director of the Institute, but not less often than four times a year.

(h) Functions of National Diabetes Advisory Board and National Digestive Diseases Advisory Board

The National Diabetes Advisory Board and the National Digestive Diseases Advisory Board shall—

(1) review and evaluate the implementation of the plan (referred to in section 285c–7 of this title) respecting the diseases with respect to which the Advisory Board was established and periodically update the plan to ensure its continuing relevance;

(2) for the purpose of assuring the most effective use and organization of resources respecting such diseases, advise and make recommendations to the Congress, the Secretary, the Director of NIH, the Director of the Institute, and the heads of other appropriate Federal agencies for the implementation and revision of such plan; and

(3) maintain liaison with other advisory bodies related to Federal agencies involved in the implementation of such plan, the coordinating committee for such diseases, and with key non-Federal entities involved in activities affecting the control of such diseases.

(i) Subcommittees; establishment and membership

In carrying out its functions, each Advisory Board may establish subcommittees, convene workshops and conferences, and collect data. Such subcommittees may be composed of Advisory Board members and nonmember consultants with expertise in the particular area addressed by such subcommittees. The subcommittees may hold such meetings as are necessary to enable them to carry out their activities.

(j) Termination of predecessor boards; time within which to appoint members

The National Diabetes Advisory Board and the National Digestive Diseases Advisory Board in existence on November 20, 1985, shall terminate upon the appointment of a successor Board under subsection (a) of this section. The Secretary shall make appointments to the Advisory Boards established under subsection (a) of this section before the expiration of 90 days after November 20, 1985. The members of the Boards in existence on November 20, 1985, may be appointed, in accordance with subsections (b) and (d) of this section, to the Boards established under subsection (a) of this section for diabetes and digestive diseases, except that at least one-half of the members of the National Diabetes Advisory Board in existence on November 20, 1985, shall be appointed to the National Diabetes Advisory Board first established under subsection (a) of this section.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §430, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 844; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §131, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3056; Pub. L. 102–405, title III, §302(e)(1), Oct. 9, 1992, 106 Stat. 1985; Pub. L. 102–531, title III, §312(d)(6), Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3504; Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2008(b)(5), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 211; Pub. L. 105–362, title VI, §601(a)(1)(C), Nov. 10, 1998, 112 Stat. 3285.)

Amendments

1998—Subsecs. (j), (k). Pub. L. 105–362 redesignated subsec. (k) as (j) and struck out former subsec. (j) which read as follows: "Each Advisory Board shall prepare an annual report for the Secretary which—

"(1) describes the Advisory Board's activities in the fiscal year for which the report is made;

"(2) describes and evaluates the progress made in such fiscal year in research, treatment, education, and training with respect to the diseases with respect to which the Advisory Board was established;

"(3) summarizes and analyzes expenditures made by the Federal Government for activities respecting such diseases in such fiscal year; and

"(4) contains the Advisory Board's recommendations (if any) for changes in the plan referred to in section 285c–7 of this title."

1993—Subsec. (b)(2)(A)(i). Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Veterans' Administration".

1992—Subsec. (b)(2)(A)(i). Pub. L. 102–531 substituted "Centers for Disease Control and Prevention" for "Centers for Disease Control".

Pub. L. 102–405 substituted "Under Secretary for Health" for "Chief Medical Director".

1988—Subsecs. (k), (l). Pub. L. 100–607 redesignated subsec. (l) as (k) and struck out former subsec. (k) which read as follows: "Each Advisory Board shall expire on September 30, 1988."

Termination of Advisory Boards

Advisory boards established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a board established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such board is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a board established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

References in Other Laws to GS–16, 17, or 18 Pay Rates

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285c–3 of this title.

§285c–5. Research and training centers; development or expansion

(a) Diabetes mellitus and related endocrine and metabolic diseases

(1) Consistent with applicable recommendations of the National Commission on Diabetes, the Director of the Institute shall provide for the development or substantial expansion of centers for research and training in diabetes mellitus and related endocrine and metabolic diseases. Each center developed or expanded under this subsection shall—

(A) utilize the facilities of a single institution, or be formed from a consortium of cooperating institutions, meeting such research and training qualifications as may be prescribed by the Secretary; and

(B) conduct—

(i) research in the diagnosis and treatment of diabetes mellitus and related endocrine and metabolic diseases and the complications resulting from such diseases;

(ii) training programs for physicians and allied health personnel in current methods of diagnosis and treatment of such diseases and complications, and in research in diabetes; and

(iii) information programs for physicians and allied health personnel who provide primary care for patients with such diseases or complications.


(2) A center may use funds provided under paragraph (1) to provide stipends for nurses and allied health professionals enrolled in research training programs described in paragraph (1)(B)(ii).

(b) Digestive diseases and related functional, congenital, metabolic disorders, and normal development of digestive tract

Consistent with applicable recommendations of the National Digestive Diseases Advisory Board, the Director shall provide for the development or substantial expansion of centers for research in digestive diseases and related functional, congenital, metabolic disorders, and normal development of the digestive tract. Each center developed or expanded under this subsection—

(1) shall utilize the facilities of a single institution, or be formed from a consortium of cooperating institutions, meeting such research qualifications as may be prescribed by the Secretary;

(2) shall develop and conduct basic and clinical research into the cause, diagnosis, early detection, prevention, control, and treatment of digestive diseases and nutritional disorders and related functional, congenital, or metabolic complications resulting from such diseases or disorders;

(3) shall encourage research into and programs for—

(A) providing information for patients with such diseases and the families of such patients, physicians and others who care for such patients, and the general public;

(B) model programs for cost effective and preventive patient care; and

(C) training physicians and scientists in research on such diseases, disorders, and complications; and


(4) may perform research and participate in epidemiological studies and data collection relevant to digestive diseases and disorders and disseminate such research, studies, and data to the health care profession and to the public.

(c) Kidney and urologic diseases

The Director shall provide for the development or substantial expansion of centers for research in kidney and urologic diseases. Each center developed or expanded under this subsection—

(1) shall utilize the facilities of a single institution, or be formed from a consortium of cooperating institutions, meeting such research qualifications as may be prescribed by the Secretary;

(2) shall develop and conduct basic and clinical research into the cause, diagnosis, early detection, prevention, control, and treatment of kidney and urologic diseases;

(3) shall encourage research into and programs for—

(A) providing information for patients with such diseases, disorders, and complications and the families of such patients, physicians and others who care for such patients, and the general public;

(B) model programs for cost effective and preventive patient care; and

(C) training physicians and scientists in research on such diseases; and


(4) may perform research and participate in epidemiological studies and data collection relevant to kidney and urologic diseases in order to disseminate such research, studies, and data to the health care profession and to the public.

(d) Nutritional disorders

(1) The Director of the Institute shall, subject to the extent of amounts made available in appropriations Acts, provide for the development or substantial expansion of centers for research and training regarding nutritional disorders, including obesity.

(2) The Director of the Institute shall carry out paragraph (1) in collaboration with the Director of the National Cancer Institute and with the Directors of such other agencies of the National Institutes of Health as the Director of NIH determines to be appropriate.

(3) Each center developed or expanded under paragraph (1) shall—

(A) utilize the facilities of a single institution, or be formed from a consortium of cooperating institutions, meeting such research and training qualifications as may be prescribed by the Director;

(B) conduct basic and clinical research into the cause, diagnosis, early detection, prevention, control and treatment of nutritional disorders, including obesity and the impact of nutrition and diet on child development;

(C) conduct training programs for physicians and allied health professionals in current methods of diagnosis and treatment of such diseases and complications, and in research in such disorders; and

(D) conduct information programs for physicians and allied health professionals who provide primary care for patients with such disorders or complications.

(e) Geographic distribution; period of support, additional periods

Insofar as practicable, centers developed or expanded under this section should be geographically dispersed throughout the United States and in environments with proven research capabilities. Support of a center under this section may be for a period of not to exceed five years and such period may be extended by the Director of the Institute for additional periods of not more than five years each if the operations of such center have been reviewed by an appropriate technical and scientific peer review group established by the Director and if such group has recommended to the Director that such period should be extended.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §431, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 846; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title VI, §601(b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 161.)

Amendments

1993—Subsecs. (d), (e). Pub. L. 103–43 added subsec. (d) and redesignated former subsec. (d) as (e).

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285c–7 of this title.

§285c–6. Advisory council subcommittees

There are established within the advisory council for the Institute appointed under section 284a of this title a subcommittee on diabetes and endocrine and metabolic diseases, a subcommittee on digestive diseases and nutrition, and a subcommittee on kidney, urologic, and hematologic diseases. The subcommittees shall be composed of members of the advisory council who are outstanding in the diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of the diseases for which the subcommittees are established and members of the advisory council who are leaders in the fields of education and public affairs. The subcommittees are authorized to review applications made to the Director of the Institute for grants for research and training projects relating to the diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of the diseases for which the subcommittees are established and shall recommend to the advisory council those applications and contracts that the subcommittees determine will best carry out the purposes of the Institute. The subcommittees shall also review and evaluate the diabetes and endocrine and metabolic diseases, digestive diseases and nutrition, and kidney, urologic, and hematologic diseases programs of the Institute and recommend to the advisory council such changes in the administration of such programs as the subcommittees determine are necessary.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §432, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 847.)

§285c–7. Biennial report

The Director of the Institute shall prepare for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 284b of this title a description of the Institute's activities—

(1) under the current diabetes plan under the National Diabetes Mellitus Research and Education Act; and

(2) under the current digestive diseases plan formulated under the Arthritis, Diabetes, and Digestive Diseases Amendments of 1976.


The description submitted by the Director shall include an evaluation of the activities of the centers supported under section 285c–5 of this title.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §433, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 848.)

References in Text

The National Diabetes Mellitus Research and Education Act, referred to in par. (1), is Pub. L. 93–354, July 23, 1974, 88 Stat. 373, as amended, which enacted former sections 289c–1a, 289c–2, and 289c–3 of this title, amended section 247b and former section 289c–1 of this title, and enacted provisions formerly set out as notes under section 289c–2 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1974 Amendments note set out under section 201 of this title and Tables.

The Arthritis, Diabetes, and Digestive Diseases Amendments of 1976, referred to in par. (2), is Pub. L. 94–562, Oct. 19, 1976, 90 Stat. 2645, as amended, which enacted former sections 289c–3a, 289c–7, and 289c–8 of this title, amended former sections 289c–2, 289c–5, and 289c–6 of this title, and enacted provisions formerly set out as notes under sections 289a, 289c–3a, and 289c–7 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1976 Amendments note set out under section 201 of this title and Tables.

§285c–8. Nutritional disorders program

(a) Establishment

The Director of the Institute, in consultation with the Director of NIH, shall establish a program of conducting and supporting research, training, health information dissemination, and other activities with respect to nutritional disorders, including obesity.

(b) Support of activities

In carrying out the program established under subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall conduct and support each of the activities described in such subsection.

(c) Dissemination of information

In carrying out the program established under subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall carry out activities to facilitate and enhance knowledge and understanding of nutritional disorders, including obesity, on the part of health professionals, patients, and the public through the effective dissemination of information.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §434, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title VI, §601[(a)], June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 161.)

subpart 4—national institute of arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases

§285d. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of research and training, the dissemination of health information, and other programs with respect to arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases (including sports-related disorders), with particular attention to the effect of these diseases on children.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §435, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 848; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title VII, §701(a), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 162.)

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "(including sports-related disorders), with particular attention to the effect of these diseases on children" for ", including sports-related disorders".

§285d–1. National arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases program

(a) Plan to expand, intensify, and coordinate activities; submission; periodic review and revision

The Director of the Institute, with the advice of the Institute's advisory council, shall prepare and transmit to the Director of NIH a plan for a national arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases program to expand, intensify, and coordinate the activities of the Institute respecting arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases. The plan shall include such comments and recommendations as the Director of the Institute determines appropriate. The plan shall place particular emphasis upon expanding research into better understanding the causes and the development of effective treatments for arthritis affecting children. The Director of the Institute shall periodically review and revise such plan and shall transmit any revisions of such plan to the Director of NIH.

(b) Coordination of activities with other national research institutes; minimum activities under program

Activities under the national arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases program shall be coordinated with the other national research institutes to the extent that such institutes have responsibilities respecting arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases, and shall, at least, provide for—

(1) investigation into the epidemiology, etiology, and prevention of all forms of arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases, including sports-related disorders, primarily through the support of basic research in such areas as immunology, genetics, biochemistry, microbiology, physiology, bioengineering, and any other scientific discipline which can contribute important knowledge to the treatment and understanding of arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases;

(2) research into the development, trial, and evaluation of techniques, drugs, and devices used in the diagnosis, treatment, including medical rehabilitation, and prevention of arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases;

(3) research on the refinement, development, and evaluation of technological devices that will replace or be a substitute for damaged bone, muscle, and joints and other supporting structures;

(4) the establishment of mechanisms to monitor the causes of athletic injuries and identify ways of preventing such injuries on scholastic athletic fields; and

(5) research into the causes of arthritis affecting children and the development, trial, and evaluation of techniques, drugs and devices used in the diagnosis, treatment (including medical rehabilitation), and prevention of arthritis in children.

(c) Program to be carried out in accordance with plan

The Director of the Institute shall carry out the national arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases program in accordance with the plan prepared under subsection (a) of this section and any revisions of such plan made under such subsection.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §436, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 848; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §136, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3056; Pub. L. 103–43, title VII, §701(b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 162.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–43, §701(b)(1), inserted after second sentence "The plan shall place particular emphasis upon expanding research into better understanding the causes and the development of effective treatments for arthritis affecting children."

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 103–43, §701(b)(2), added par. (5).

1988Pub. L. 100–607 inserted "and skin" after "musculoskeletal" in section catchline and wherever appearing in text.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285d–7 of this title.

§285d–2. Research and training

The Director of the Institute shall—

(1) carry out programs of support for research and training (other than training for which National Research Service Awards may be made under section 288 of this title) in the diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases, including support for training in medical schools, graduate clinical training, graduate training in epidemiology, epidemiology studies, clinical trials, and interdisciplinary research programs; and

(2) establish programs of evaluation, planning, and dissemination of knowledge related to such research and training.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §437, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 849.)

§285d–3. Data system and information clearinghouse

(a) The Director of the Institute shall establish the National Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases Data System for the collection, storage, analysis, retrieval, and dissemination of data derived from patient populations with arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases, including where possible, data involving general populations for the purpose of detection of individuals with a risk of developing arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases.

(b) The Director of the Institute shall establish the National Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases Information Clearinghouse to facilitate and enhance, through the effective dissemination of information, knowledge and understanding of arthritis and musculoskeletal and skin diseases by health professionals, patients, and the public.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §438, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 849.)

§285d–4. Interagency coordinating committees

(a) Establishment and purpose

For the purpose of—

(1) better coordination of the research activities of all the national research institutes relating to arthritis, musculoskeletal diseases, and skin diseases, including sports-related disorders; and

(2) coordinating the aspects of all Federal health programs and activities relating to arthritis, musculoskeletal diseases, and skin diseases in order to assure the adequacy and technical soundness of such programs and activities and in order to provide for the full communication and exchange of information necessary to maintain adequate coordination of such programs and activities,


the Secretary shall establish an Arthritis and Musculoskeletal Diseases Interagency Coordinating Committee and a Skin Diseases Interagency Coordinating Committee (hereafter in this section individually referred to as a "Committee").

(b) Membership; chairman; meetings

Each Committee shall be composed of the Directors of each of the national research institutes and divisions involved in research regarding the diseases with respect to which the Committee is established, the Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs, and the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs (or the designees of such officers), and representatives of all other Federal departments and agencies (as determined by the Secretary) whose programs involve health functions or responsibilities relevant to arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases or skin diseases, as the case may be. Each Committee shall be chaired by the Director of NIH (or the designee of the Director). Each Committee shall meet at the call of the chairman, but not less often than four times a year.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §439, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 849; amended Pub. L. 102–405, title III, §302(e)(1), Oct. 9, 1992, 106 Stat. 1985; Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2008(b)(6), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 211; Pub. L. 105–362, title VI, §601(a)(1)(D), Nov. 10, 1998, 112 Stat. 3285.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 105–362 struck out subsec. (c) which read as follows: "Not later than 120 days after the end of each fiscal year, each Committee shall prepare and transmit to the Secretary, the Director of NIH, the Director of the Institute, and the advisory council for the Institute a report detailing the activities of the Committee in such fiscal year in carrying out paragraphs (1) and (2) of subsection (a) of this section."

1993—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Veterans' Administration".

1992—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–405 substituted "Under Secretary for Health" for "Chief Medical Director".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285d–7 of this title.

§285d–5. Arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases demonstration projects

(a) Grants for establishment and support

The Director of the Institute may make grants to public and private nonprofit entities to establish and support projects for the development and demonstration of methods for screening, detection, and referral for treatment of arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases and for the dissemination of information on such methods to the health and allied health professions. Activities under such projects shall be coordinated with Federal, State, local, and regional health agencies, centers assisted under section 285d–6 of this title, and the data system established under subsection (c) of this section.

(b) Programs included

Projects supported under this section shall include—

(1) programs which emphasize the development and demonstration of new and improved methods of screening and early detection, referral for treatment, and diagnosis of individuals with a risk of developing arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases;

(2) programs which emphasize the development and demonstration of new and improved methods for patient referral from local hospitals and physicians to appropriate centers for early diagnosis and treatment;

(3) programs which emphasize the development and demonstration of new and improved means of standardizing patient data and recordkeeping;

(4) programs which emphasize the development and demonstration of new and improved methods of dissemination of knowledge about the programs, methods, and means referred to in paragraphs (1), (2), and (3) of this subsection to health and allied health professionals;

(5) programs which emphasize the development and demonstration of new and improved methods for the dissemination to the general public of information—

(A) on the importance of early detection of arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases, of seeking prompt treatment, and of following an appropriate regimen; and

(B) to discourage the promotion and use of unapproved and ineffective diagnostic, preventive treatment, and control methods for arthritis and unapproved and ineffective drugs and devices for arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases; and


(6) projects for investigation into the epidemiology of all forms and aspects of arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases, including investigations into the social, environmental, behavioral, nutritional, and genetic determinants and influences involved in the epidemiology of arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases.

(c) Standardization of patient data and recordkeeping

The Director shall provide for the standardization of patient data and recordkeeping for the collection, storage, analysis, retrieval, and dissemination of such data in cooperation with projects assisted under this section, centers assisted under section 285d–6 of this title, and other persons engaged in arthritis and musculoskeletal disease programs.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §440, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 850.)

§285d–6. Multipurpose arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases centers

(a) Development, modernization, and operation

The Director of the Institute shall, after consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, provide for the development, modernization, and operation (including staffing and other operating costs such as the costs of patient care required for research) of new and existing centers for arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases. For purposes of this section, the term "modernization" means the alteration, remodeling, improvement, expansion, and repair of existing buildings and the provision of equipment for such buildings to the extent necessary to make them suitable for use as centers described in the preceding sentence.

(b) Duties and functions

Each center assisted under this section shall—

(1)(A) use the facilities of a single institution or a consortium of cooperating institutions, and (B) meet such qualifications as may be prescribed by the Secretary; and

(2) conduct—

(A) basic and clinical research into the cause, diagnosis, early detection, prevention, control, and treatment of and rehabilitation from arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases and complications resulting from arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases, including research into implantable biomaterials and biomechanical and other orthopedic procedures;

(B) training programs for physicians, scientists, and other health and allied health professionals;

(C) information and continuing education programs for physicians and other health and allied health professionals who provide care for patients with arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases; and

(D) programs for the dissemination to the general public of information—

(i) on the importance of early detection of arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases, of seeking prompt treatment, and of following an appropriate regimen; and

(ii) to discourage the promotion and use of unapproved and ineffective diagnostic, preventive, treatment, and control methods and unapproved and ineffective drugs and devices.


A center may use funds provided under subsection (a) of this section to provide stipends for health professionals enrolled in training programs described in paragraph (2)(B).

(c) Optional programs

Each center assisted under this section may conduct programs to—

(1) establish the effectiveness of new and improved methods of detection, referral, and diagnosis of individuals with a risk of developing arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases;

(2) disseminate the results of research, screening, and other activities, and develop means of standardizing patient data and recordkeeping; and

(3) develop community consultative services to facilitate the referral of patients to centers for treatment.

(d) Geographical distribution

The Director of the Institute shall, insofar as practicable, provide for an equitable geographical distribution of centers assisted under this section. The Director shall give appropriate consideration to the need for centers especially suited to meeting the needs of children affected by arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases.

(e) Period of support; additional periods

Support of a center under this section may be for a period of not to exceed five years. Such period may be extended by the Director of the Institute for one or more additional periods of not more than five years if the operations of such center have been reviewed by an appropriate technical and scientific peer review group established by the Director and if such group has recommended to the Director that such period should be extended.

(f) Treatment and rehabilitation of children

Not later than October 1, 1993, the Director shall establish a multipurpose arthritis and musculoskeletal disease center for the purpose of expanding the level of research into the cause, diagnosis, early detection, prevention, control, and treatment of, and rehabilitation of children with arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §441, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 851; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §137, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3056; Pub. L. 103–43, title VII, §701(c), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 162.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 103–43 added subsec. (f).

1988—Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 100–607 inserted "and rehabilitation from" after "and treatment of".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285d–5 of this title.

§285d–7. Advisory Board

(a) Establishment

The Secretary shall establish in the Institute the National Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases Advisory Board (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Advisory Board").

(b) Membership; ex officio members

The Advisory Board shall be composed of twenty appointed members and nonvoting, ex officio members, as follows:

(1) The Secretary shall appoint—

(A) twelve members from individuals who are scientists, physicians, and other health professionals, who are not officers or employees of the United States, and who represent the specialties and disciplines relevant to arthritis, musculoskeletal diseases, and skin diseases; and

(B) eight members from the general public who are knowledgeable with respect to such diseases, including one member who is a person who has such a disease, one person who is the parent of an adult with such a disease, and two members who are parents of children with arthritis.


Of the appointed members at least five shall by virtue of training or experience be knowledgeable in health education, nursing, data systems, public information, or community program development.

(2) The following shall be ex officio members of the Advisory Board:

(A) the Assistant Secretary for Health, the Director of NIH, the Director of the National Institute of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases, the Director of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs, and the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs (or the designees of such officers), and

(B) such other officers and employees of the United States as the Secretary determines necessary for the Advisory Board to carry out its functions.

(c) Compensation

Members of the Advisory Board who are officers or employees of the Federal Government shall serve as members of the Advisory Board without compensation in addition to that received in their regular public employment. Other members of the Advisory Board shall receive compensation at rates not to exceed the daily equivalent of the annual rate in effect for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule for each day (including traveltime) they are engaged in the performance of their duties as members of the Advisory Board.

(d) Term of office; vacancy

The term of office of an appointed member of the Advisory Board is four years. Any member appointed to fill a vacancy for an unexpired term shall be appointed for the remainder of such term. A member may serve after the expiration of the member's term until a successor has taken office. If a vacancy occurs in the Advisory Board, the Secretary shall make an appointment to fill the vacancy not later than 90 days after the date the vacancy occurred.

(e) Chairman

The members of the Advisory Board shall select a chairman from among the appointed members.

(f) Executive director, professional and clerical staff; administrative support services and facilities

The Secretary shall, after consultation with and consideration of the recommendations of the Advisory Board, provide the Advisory Board with an executive director and one other professional staff member. In addition, the Secretary shall, after consultation with and consideration of the recommendations of the Advisory Board, provide the Advisory Board with such additional professional staff members, such clerical staff members, and (through contracts or other arrangements) with such administrative support services and facilities, such information, and such services of consultants, as the Secretary determines are necessary for the Advisory Board to carry out its functions.

(g) Meetings

The Advisory Board shall meet at the call of the chairman or upon request of the Director of the Institute, but not less often than four times a year.

(h) Duties and functions

The Advisory Board shall—

(1) review and evaluate the implementation of the plan prepared under section 285d–1(a) of this title and periodically update the plan to ensure its continuing relevance;

(2) for the purpose of assuring the most effective use and organization of resources respecting arthritis, musculoskeletal diseases and skin diseases, advise and make recommendations to the Congress, the Secretary, the Director of NIH, the Director of the Institute, and the heads of other appropriate Federal agencies for the implementation and revision of such plan; and

(3) maintain liaison with other advisory bodies for Federal agencies involved in the implementation of such plan, the interagency coordinating committees for such diseases established under section 285d–4 of this title, and with key non-Federal entities involved in activities affecting the control of such diseases.

(i) Subcommittees; establishment and membership

In carrying out its functions, the Advisory Board may establish subcommittees, convene workshops and conferences, and collect data. Such subcommittees may be composed of Advisory Board members and nonmember consultants with expertise in the particular area addressed by such subcommittees. The subcommittees may hold such meetings as are necessary to enable them to carry out their activities.

(j) Annual report

The Advisory Board shall prepare an annual report for the Secretary which—

(1) describes the Advisory Board's activities in the fiscal year for which the report is made;

(2) describes and evaluates the progress made in such fiscal year in research, treatment, education, and training with respect to arthritis, musculoskeletal diseases, and skin diseases;

(3) summarizes and analyzes expenditures made by the Federal Government for activities respecting such diseases in such fiscal year for which the report is made;

(4) contains the Advisory Board's recommendations (if any) for changes in the plan prepared under section 285d–1 of this title; and

(5) contains recommendations for expanding the Institute's funding of research directly applicable to the cause, diagnosis, early detection, prevention, control, and treatment of, and rehabilitation of children with arthritis and musculoskeletal diseases.

(k) Termination of predecessor board; time within which to appoint members

The National Arthritis Advisory Board in existence on November 20, 1985, shall terminate upon the appointment of a successor Board under subsection (a) of this section. The Secretary shall make appointments to the Advisory Board established under subsection (a) of this section before the expiration of 90 days after November 20, 1985. The member of the Board in existence on November 20, 1985, may be appointed, in accordance with subsections (b) and (d) of this section, to the Advisory Board established under subsection (a) of this section.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §442, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 852; amended Pub. L. 102–405, title III, §302(e)(1), Oct. 9, 1992, 106 Stat. 1985; Pub. L. 102–531, title III, §312(d)(7), Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3504; Pub. L. 103–43, title VII, §701(d), title XX, §2008(b)(7), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 162, 211.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–43, §701(d)(1), inserted "and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases" after "Arthritis".

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–43, §§701(d)(2), 2008(b)(7), substituted "twenty" for "eighteen" in introductory provisions, "eight" for "six" and "including one member who is a person who has such a disease, one person who is the parent of an adult with such a disease, and two members who are parents of children with arthritis" for "including at least one member who is a person who has such a disease and one member who is a parent of a person who has such a disease" in par. (1)(B), and "Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Veterans' Administration" in par. (2)(A).

Subsec. (j)(5). Pub. L. 103–43, §701(d)(3), added par. (5).

1992—Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 102–531 substituted "Centers for Disease Control and Prevention" for "Centers for Disease Control".

Pub. L. 102–405 substituted "Under Secretary for Health" for "Chief Medical Director".

Termination of Advisory Boards

Advisory boards established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a board established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such board is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a board established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

References in Other Laws to GS–16, 17, or 18 Pay Rates

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

subpart 5—national institute on aging

§285e. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute on Aging (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of biomedical, social, and behavioral research, training, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to the aging process and the diseases and other special problems and needs of the aged.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §443, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 854.)

Study of Malnutrition in Elderly

Pub. L. 103–43, title XIX, §1902, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 201, directed Secretary of Health and Human Services, acting through National Institute on Aging, to conduct a 3-year study on health benefits and cost-effectiveness of nutrition screening and intervention activities of the elderly, and a 3-year study to determine extent of malnutrition in elderly individuals in hospitals and long-term care facilities and in elderly individuals who are living independently, provided for creation of advisory panel to oversee studies, provided for submission to Congress of reports containing findings of such studies, and provided for termination of advisory panel 3 years after June 10, 1993.

Study of Personnel for Health Needs of Elderly

Section 8 of Pub. L. 99–158 directed Secretary to conduct a study on the adequacy and availability of personnel to meet the current and projected health needs (including needs for home and community-based care) of elderly Americans through the year 2020, and report the results of the study, with recommendations, to Congress by Mar. 1, 1987.

§285e–1. Special functions

(a) Education and training of adequate numbers of personnel

In carrying out the training responsibilities under this chapter or any other Act for health and allied health professions personnel, the Secretary shall take appropriate steps to insure the education and training of adequate numbers of allied health, nursing, and paramedical personnel in the field of health care for the aged.

(b) Scientific studies

The Director of the Institute shall conduct scientific studies to measure the impact on the biological, medical, social, and psychological aspects of aging of programs and activities assisted or conducted by the Department of Health and Human Services.

(c) Public information and education programs

The Director of the Institute shall carry out public information and education programs designed to disseminate as widely as possible the findings of research sponsored by the Institute, other relevant aging research and studies, and other information about the process of aging which may assist elderly and near-elderly persons in dealing with, and all Americans in understanding, the problems and processes associated with growing older.

(d) Grants for research relating to Alzheimer's Disease

The Director of the Institute shall make grants to public and private nonprofit institutions to conduct research relating to Alzheimer's Disease.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §444, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 854.)

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285e–10 of this title.

§285e–2. Alzheimer's Disease centers

(a) Cooperative agreements and grants for establishing and supporting

(1) The Director of the Institute may enter into cooperative agreements with and make grants to public or private nonprofit entities (including university medical centers) to pay all or part of the cost of planning, establishing, or strengthening, and providing basic operating support (including staffing) for centers for basic and clinical research (including multidisciplinary research) into, training in, and demonstration of advanced diagnostic, prevention, and treatment methods for Alzheimer's disease.

(2) A cooperative agreement or grant under paragraph (1) shall be entered into in accordance with policies established by the Director of NIH and after consultation with the Institute's advisory council.

(b) Use of Federal payments under cooperative agreement or grant

(1) Federal payments made under a cooperative agreement or grant under subsection (a) of this section may, with respect to Alzheimer's disease, be used for—

(A) diagnostic examinations, patient assessments, patient care costs, and other costs necessary for conducting research;

(B) training, including training for allied health professionals;

(C) diagnostic and treatment clinics designed to meet the special needs of minority and rural populations and other underserved populations;

(D) activities to educate the public; and

(E) the dissemination of information.


(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), the term "training" does not include research training for which National Research Service Awards may be provided under section 288 of this title.

(c) Support period; additional periods

Support of a center under subsection (a) of this section may be for a period of not to exceed five years. Such period may be extended by the Director for additional periods of not more than five years each if the operations of such center have been reviewed by an appropriate technical and scientific peer review group established by the Director and if such group has recommended to the Director that such period should be extended.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §445, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 855; amended Pub. L. 101–557, title II, §201, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2767.)

Amendments

1990—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 101–557, §201(1), inserted "(including university medical centers)" after "nonprofit entities", "(including staffing)" after "operating support", and "(including multidisciplinary research)" after "clinical research" and substituted "Alzheimer's disease" for "Alzheimer's Disease".

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 101–557, §201(2), amended subsec. (b) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (b) read as follows: "Federal payments made under a cooperative agreement or grant under subsection (a) of this section may be used for—

"(1) construction (notwithstanding any limitation under section 289e of this title);

"(2) staffing and other basic operating costs, including such patient care costs as are required for research;

"(3) training, including training for allied health professionals; and

"(4) demonstration purposes.

As used in this subsection, the term 'construction' does not include the acquisition of land, and the term 'training' does not include research training for which National Research Service Awards may be provided under section 288 of this title."

Alzheimer's Disease Research

Pub. L. 100–175, title III, Nov. 29, 1987, 101 Stat. 972, provided that:

"SEC. 301. REQUIREMENT FOR CLINICAL TRIALS.

"(a) In General.—The Director of the National Institute on Aging shall provide for the conduct of clinical trials on the efficacy of the use of such promising therapeutic agents as have been or may be discovered and recommended for further scientific analysis by the National Institute on Aging and the Food and Drug Administration to treat individuals with Alzheimer's disease, to retard the progression of symptoms of Alzheimer's disease, or to improve the functioning of individuals with such disease.

"(b) Rule of Construction.—Nothing in this title shall be construed to affect adversely any research being conducted as of the date of the enactment of this Act [Nov. 29, 1987].

"SEC. 302. AUTHORIZATION OF APPROPRIATIONS.

"For the purpose of carrying out section 301, there is authorized to be appropriated $2,000,000 for fiscal year 1988."

Alzheimer's Disease Registry

Section 12 of Pub. L. 99–158, which was formerly set out as a note under this section, was renumbered section 445G of the Public Health Service Act by Pub. L. 103–43, title VIII, §801(a), 107 Stat. 163, and is classified to section 285e–9 of this title.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 285e–4, 285e–5, 11212, 11221, 11251, 11292, 11293 of this title.

§285e–3. Claude D. Pepper Older Americans Independence Centers

(a) Development and expansion of centers

The Director of the Institute shall enter into cooperative agreements with, and make grants to, public and private nonprofit entities for the development or expansion of not less than 10 centers of excellence in geriatric research and training of researchers. Each such center shall be known as a Claude D. Pepper Older Americans Independence Center.

(b) Functions of centers

Each center developed or expanded under this section shall—

(1) utilize the facilities of a single institution, or be formed from a consortium of cooperating institutions, meeting such research and training qualifications as may be prescribed by the Director; and

(2) conduct—

(A) research into the aging processes and into the diagnosis and treatment of diseases, disorders, and complications related to aging, including menopause, which research includes research on such treatments, and on medical devices and other medical interventions regarding such diseases, disorders, and complications, that can assist individuals in avoiding institutionalization and prolonged hospitalization and in otherwise increasing the independence of the individuals; and

(B) programs to develop individuals capable of conducting research described in subparagraph (A).

(c) Geographic distribution of centers

In making cooperative agreements and grants under this section for the development or expansion of centers, the Director of the Institute shall ensure that, to the extent practicable, any such centers are distributed equitably among the principal geographic regions of the United States.

(d) "Independence" defined

For purposes of this section, the term "independence", with respect to diseases, disorders, and complications of aging, means the functional ability of individuals to perform activities of daily living or instrumental activities of daily living without assistance or supervision.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §445A, as added Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §141, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3056; amended Pub. L. 101–557, title II, §202, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2767.)

Amendments

1990Pub. L. 101–557, §202(a)(1), substituted "Claude D. Pepper Older Americans Independence Centers" for "Centers of geriatric research and training" in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–557, §202(a)(2), (b)(1)(A), inserted "not less than 10" before "centers of excellence" and inserted provision designating centers as Claude D. Pepper Older Americans Independence Centers.

Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 101–557, §202(b)(1)(B), inserted before semicolon at end ", including menopause, which research includes research on such treatments, and on medical devices and other medical interventions regarding such diseases, disorders, and complications, that can assist individuals in avoiding institutionalization and prolonged hospitalization and in otherwise increasing the independence of the individuals".

Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 101–557, §202(b)(2), substituted "research described in subparagraph (A)" for "research concerning aging and concerning such diseases, disorders, and complications."

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 101–557, §202(c), added subsec. (d).

§285e–4. Awards for leadership and excellence in Alzheimer's disease and related dementias

(a) Senior researchers in biomedical research

The Director of the Institute shall make awards to senior researchers who have made distinguished achievements in biomedical research in areas relating to Alzheimer's disease and related dementias. Awards under this section shall be used by the recipients to support research in areas relating to such disease and dementias, and may be used by the recipients to train junior researchers who demonstrate exceptional promise to conduct research in such areas.

(b) Eligible centers

The Director of the Institute may make awards under this section to researchers at centers supported under section 285e–2 of this title and to researchers at other public and nonprofit private entities.

(c) Required recommendation

The Director of the Institute shall make awards under this section only to researchers who have been recommended for such awards by the National Advisory Council on Aging.

(d) Selection procedures

The Director of the Institute shall establish procedures for the selection of the recipients of awards under this section.

(e) Term of award; renewal

Awards under this section shall be made for a one-year period, and may be renewed for not more than six additional consecutive one-year periods.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §445B, formerly Pub. L. 99–660, title IX, §931, Nov. 14, 1986, 100 Stat. 3807; renumbered §445B of act July 1, 1944; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §142(a), (d)(1), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3057.)

Codification

Section was formerly classified to section 11231 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 100–607.

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–607, §142(a), renumbered section 11231 of this title as this section.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(1)(A), substituted "the Institute" for "the National Institute on Aging".

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(1)(B), substituted "the Institute" for "the National Institute on Aging" and made technical amendment to reference to section 285e–2 of this title to correct reference to corresponding provision of original act.

Subsecs. (c), (d). Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(1)(C), substituted "the Institute" for "the National Institute on Aging".

Availability of Appropriations

Section 142(b) of Pub. L. 100–607 provided that: "With respect to amounts made available in appropriation Acts for the purpose of carrying out the programs transferred by subsection (a) to the Public Health Service Act [sections 285e–4 to 285e–8 of this title], such subsection may not be construed to affect the availability of such funds for such purpose."

§285e–5. Research relevant to appropriate services for individuals with Alzheimer's disease and related dementias and their families

(a) Grants for research

The Director of the Institute shall conduct, or make grants for the conduct of, research relevant to appropriate services for individuals with Alzheimer's disease and related dementias and their families.

(b) Preparation of plan; contents; revision

(1) Within 6 months after November 14, 1986, the Director of the Institute shall prepare and transmit to the Chairman of the Council on Alzheimer's Disease (in this section referred to as the "Council") a plan for the research to be conducted under subsection (a) of this section. The plan shall—

(A) provide for research concerning—

(i) the epidemiology of, and the identification of risk factors for, Alzheimer's disease and related dementias; and

(ii) the development and evaluation of reliable and valid multidimensional diagnostic and assessment procedures and instruments; and


(B) ensure that research carried out under the plan is coordinated with, and uses, to the maximum extent feasible, resources of, other Federal programs relating to Alzheimer's disease and related dementias, including centers supported under section 285e–2 of this title, centers supported by the National Institute of Mental Health on the psychopathology of the elderly, relevant activities of the Administration on Aging, other programs and centers involved in research on Alzheimer's disease and related dementias supported by the Department, and other programs relating to Alzheimer's disease and related dementias which are planned or conducted by Federal agencies other than the Department, State or local agencies, community organizations, or private foundations.


(2) Within one year after transmitting the plan required under paragraph (1), and annually thereafter, the Director of the Institute shall prepare and transmit to the Chairman of the Council such revisions of such plan as the Director considers appropriate.

(c) Consultation for preparation and revision of plan

In preparing and revising the plan required by subsection (b) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall consult with the Chairman of the Council and the heads of agencies within the Department.

(d) Grants for promoting independence and preventing secondary disabilities

the 1 Director of the Institute may develop, or make grants to develop—

(1) model techniques to—

(A) promote greater independence, including enhanced independence in performing activities of daily living and instrumental activities of daily living, for persons with Alzheimer's disease and related disorders; and

(B) prevent or reduce the severity of secondary disabilities, including confusional episodes, falls, bladder and bowel incontinence, and adverse effects of prescription and over-the-counter medications, in such persons; and


(2) model curricula for health care professionals, health care paraprofessionals, and family caregivers, for training and application in the use of such techniques.

(e) "Council on Alzheimer's Disease" defined

For purposes of this section, the term "Council on Alzheimer's Disease" means the council established in section 11211(a) 2 of this title.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §445C, formerly Pub. L. 99–660, title IX, §941, Nov. 14, 1986, 100 Stat. 3808; renumbered §445C of act July 1, 1944; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §142(a), (d)(2), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3057, 3058; Pub. L. 102–507, §9, Oct. 24, 1992, 106 Stat. 3287; Pub. L. 103–43, title VIII, §804, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 164.)

References in Text

Section 11211 of this title, referred to in subsec. (e), was repealed by Pub. L. 105–362, title VI, §601(a)(2)(E), Nov. 10, 1998, 112 Stat. 3286.

Codification

Section was formerly classified to section 11241 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 100–607.

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 103–43, §804(1), inserted "on Alzheimer's Disease (in this section referred to as the 'Council')" after "Council".

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 103–43, §804(2), added subsec. (e).

1992—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–507 added subsec. (d).

1988Pub. L. 100–607, §142(a), renumbered section 11241 of this title as this section.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(2)(A), substituted "the Institute" for "the National Institute on Aging".

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(2)(B)(i)(I), in introductory provisions, substituted "the date of enactment of the Alzheimer's Disease and Related Dementias Services Research Act of 1986" for "the date of enactment of this Act", which for purposes of codification was translated as "November 14, 1986", thus requiring no change in text.

Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(2)(B)(i)(II), in introductory provisions, substituted "the Institute" for "the National Institute on Aging".

Subsec. (b)(1)(B). Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(2)(B)(ii), made technical amendment to reference to section 285e–2 of this title to correct reference to corresponding provision of original act.

Subsecs. (b)(2), (c). Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(2)(B)(iii), (C), substituted "the Institute" for "the National Institute on Aging".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285e–6 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be capitalized.

2 See References in Text note below.

§285e–6. Dissemination of research results

The Director of the Institute shall disseminate the results of research conducted under section 285e–5 of this title and this section to appropriate professional entities and to the public.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §445D, formerly Pub. L. 99–660, title IX, §942, Nov. 14, 1986, 100 Stat. 3809; renumbered §445D of act July 1, 1944; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §142(a), (d)(3), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3057, 3058.)

Codification

Section was formerly classified to section 11242 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 100–607.

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–607, §142(a), renumbered section 11242 of this title as this section.

Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(3), substituted "the Institute" for "the National Institute on Aging" and "section 285e–5 of this title and this section" for "this part".

§285e–7. Clearinghouse on Alzheimer's Disease

(a) Establishment; purpose; duties; publication of summary

The Director of the Institute shall establish the Clearinghouse on Alzheimer's Disease (hereinafter referred to as the "Clearinghouse"). The purpose of the Clearinghouse is the dissemination of information concerning services available for individuals with Alzheimer's disease and related dementias and their families. The Clearinghouse shall—

(1) compile, archive, and disseminate information concerning research, demonstration, evaluation, and training programs and projects concerning Alzheimer's disease and related dementias; and

(2) annually publish a summary of the information compiled under paragraph (1) during the preceding 12-month period, and make such information available upon request to appropriate individuals and entities, including educational institutions, research entities, and Federal and public agencies.

(b) Fee for information

The Clearinghouse may charge an appropriate fee for information provided through the toll-free telephone line established under subsection (a)(3).1

(c) Summaries of research findings from other agencies

The Director of the Institute, the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health, and the Director of the National Center for Health Services Research and Health Care Technology Assessment shall provide to the Clearinghouse summaries of the findings of research conducted under part D.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §445E, formerly Pub. L. 99–660, title IX, §951, Nov. 14, 1986, 100 Stat. 3813; renumbered §445E of act July 1, 1944, and amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §142(a), (d)(4), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3057, 3058.)

References in Text

Part D, referred to in subsec. (c), probably means part D of title IX of Pub. L. 99–660, Nov. 14, 1986, 100 Stat. 3808, as amended, which is classified to subchapter IV (§11251 et seq.) of chapter 118 of this title. Prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 100–607, this section was part of title IX of Pub. L. 99–660.

Codification

Section was formerly classified to section 11281 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 100–607.

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–607, §142(a), renumbered section 11281 of this title as this section.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(4)(A), substituted "the Institute" for "the National Institute on Aging" in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(4)(B), substituted "the Institute" for "the National Institute on Aging" and "part D" for "part E".

1 So in original. No subsec. (a)(3) has been enacted.

§285e–8. Dissemination project

(a) Grant or contract for establishment

The Director of the Institute shall make a grant to, or enter into a contract with, a national organization representing individuals with Alzheimer's disease and related dementias for the conduct of the activities described in subsection (b) of this section.

(b) Project activities

The organization receiving a grant or contract under this section shall—

(1) establish a central computerized information system to—

(A) compile and disseminate information concerning initiatives by State and local governments and private entities to provide programs and services for individuals with Alzheimer's disease and related dementias; and

(B) translate scientific and technical information concerning such initiatives into information readily understandable by the general public, and make such information available upon request; and


(2) establish a national toll-free telephone line to make available the information described in paragraph (1), and information concerning Federal programs, services, and benefits for individuals with Alzheimer's disease and related dementias and their families.

(c) Fees for information; exception

The organization receiving a grant or contract under this section may charge appropriate fees for information provided through the toll-free telephone line established under subsection (b)(2) of this section, and may make exceptions to such fees for individuals and organizations who are not financially able to pay such fees.

(d) Application for grant or contract; contents

In order to receive a grant or contract under this section, an organization shall submit an application to the Director of the Institute. Such application shall contain—

(1) information demonstrating that such organization has a network of contacts which will enable such organization to receive information necessary to the operation of the central computerized information system described in subsection (b)(1) of this section;

(2) information demonstrating that, by the end of fiscal year 1991, such organization will be financially able to, and will, carry out the activities described in subsection (b) of this section without a grant or contract from the Federal Government; and

(3) such other information as the Director may prescribe.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §445F, formerly Pub. L. 99–660, title IX, §952, Nov. 14, 1986, 100 Stat. 3813; renumbered §445F of act July 1, 1944, and amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §142(a), (d)(5), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3057, 3058.)

Codification

Section was formerly classified to section 11282 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 100–607.

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–607, §142(a), renumbered section 11282 of this title as this section.

Subsecs. (a), (d). Pub. L. 100–607, §142(d)(5), substituted "the Institute" for "the National Institute on Aging".

§285e–9. Alzheimer's disease registry

(a) In general

The Director of the Institute may make a grant to develop a registry for the collection of epidemiological data about Alzheimer's disease and its incidence in the United States, to train personnel in the collection of such data, and for other matters respecting such disease.

(b) Qualifications

To qualify for a grant under subsection (a) of this section an applicant shall—

(1) be an accredited school of medicine or public health which has expertise in the collection of epidemiological data about individuals with Alzheimer's disease and in the development of disease registries, and

(2) have access to a large patient population, including a patient population representative of diverse ethnic backgrounds.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §445G, formerly Pub. L. 99–158, §12, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 885, as renumbered §445G and amended Pub. L. 103–43, title VIII, §801, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 163.)

Codification

Section was formerly set out as a note under section 285e–2 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 103–43.

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43, §801(b)(1), reenacted section catchline without change.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–43, §801(b)(1), substituted in heading "In general" for "Grant authority" and in text substituted "Director of the Institute" for "Director of the National Institute on Aging".

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–43, §801(b)(2), struck out subsec. (c) which authorized appropriations of $2,500,000 for grants to remain available until expended or through fiscal year 1989, whichever occurred first.

§285e–10. Aging processes regarding women

(a) The Director of the Institute, in addition to other special functions specified in section 285e–1 of this title and in cooperation with the Directors of the other national research institutes and agencies of the National Institutes of Health, shall conduct research into the aging processes of women, with particular emphasis given to the effects of menopause and the physiological and behavioral changes occurring during the transition from pre- to post-menopause, and into the diagnosis, disorders, and complications related to aging and loss of ovarian hormones in women.

(b) For the purpose of carrying out this section, there are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1999 through 2003. The authorization of appropriations established in the preceding sentence is in addition to any other authorization of appropriation that is available for such purpose.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §445H, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title VIII, §802, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 163; amended Pub. L. 105–340, title I, §105, Oct. 31, 1998, 112 Stat. 3193.)

Amendments

1998Pub. L. 105–340 designated existing provisions as subsec. (a) and added subsec. (b).

§285e–11. Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this subpart, there are authorized to be appropriated $500,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 and 1996.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §445I, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title VIII, §803, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 163.)

subpart 6—national institute of allergy and infectious diseases

§285f. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases is the conduct and support of research, training, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to allergic and immunologic diseases and disorders and infectious diseases, including tropical diseases.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §446, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 855; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title IX, §901, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 164.)

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43 inserted before period at end ", including tropical diseases".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285f–2 of this title.

§285f–1. Research centers regarding chronic fatigue syndrome

(a) The Director of the Institute, after consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, may make grants to, or enter into contracts with, public or nonprofit private entities for the development and operation of centers to conduct basic and clinical research on chronic fatigue syndrome.

(b) Each center assisted under this section shall use the facilities of a single institution, or be formed from a consortium of cooperating institutions, meeting such requirements as may be prescribed by the Director of the Institute.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §447, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title IX, §902(a), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 164.)

Extramural Study Section

Section 902(b) of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "Not later than 6 months after the date of enactment of this Act [June 10, 1993], the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall establish an extramural study section for chronic fatigue syndrome research."

Research Activities on Chronic Fatigue Syndrome

Section 1903 of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "The Secretary of Health and Human Services shall, not later than October 1, 1993, and annually thereafter for the next 3 years, prepare and submit to the Committee on Energy and Commerce [now Committee on Commerce] of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate, a report that summarizes the research activities conducted or supported by the National Institutes of Health concerning chronic fatigue syndrome. Such report should include information concerning grants made, cooperative agreements or contracts entered into, intramural activities, research priorities and needs, and a plan to address such priorities and needs."

Codification

Another section 447 of act July 1, 1944, was renumbered section 447A and is classified to section 285f–2 of this title.

§285f–2. Research and research training regarding tuberculosis

(a) In carrying out section 285f of this title, the Director of the Institute shall conduct or support research and research training regarding the cause, diagnosis, early detection, prevention and treatment of tuberculosis.

(b) For the purpose of carrying out subsection (a) of this section, there are authorized to be appropriated $50,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 through 1998. Such authorization is in addition to any other authorization of appropriations that is available for such purpose.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §447A, formerly §447, as added Pub. L. 103–183, title III, §302(a), Dec. 14, 1993, 107 Stat. 2235; renumbered §447A, Pub. L. 105–392, title IV, §401(b)(3), Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3587.)

Research Through Food and Drug Administration

Section 303 of Pub. L. 103–183 provided that: "The Secretary of Health and Human Services, acting through the Commissioner of Food and Drugs, shall implement a tuberculosis drug and device research program under which the Commissioner may—

"(1) provide assistance to other Federal agencies for the development of tuberculosis protocols;

"(2) review and evaluate medical devices designed for the diagnosis and control of airborne tuberculosis; and

"(3) conduct research concerning drugs or devices to be used in diagnosing, controlling and preventing tuberculosis."

subpart 7—national institute of child health and human development

§285g. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute of Child Health and Human Development (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of research, training, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to maternal health, child health, mental retardation, human growth and development, including prenatal development, population research, and special health problems and requirements of mothers and children.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §448, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 856.)

National Commission to Prevent Infant Mortality; Composition; Voluntary Services; Duration

Pub. L. 100–436, title IV, Sept. 20, 1988, 102 Stat. 1709, provided that the National Commission to Prevent Infant Mortality was to be composed of sixteen members, including seven at large members, and that it had power to accept voluntary and uncompensated services, notwithstanding section 1342 of title 31, and was to continue operating, notwithstanding sections 208 and 209 of Pub. L. 99–660 (formerly set out below).

National Commission to Prevent Infant Mortality

Pub. L. 99–660, title II, Nov. 14, 1986, 100 Stat. 3752, known as the National Commission to Prevent Infant Mortality Act of 1986, established National Commission to Prevent Infant Mortality to examine and make recommendation on government and private resources, policies, and programs which impact on infant mortality, required Commission to submit recommendations to President and Congress no later than one year after Nov. 14, 1986, and terminated Commission 90 days after submission of recommendations.

§285g–1. Sudden infant death syndrome research

The Director of the Institute shall conduct and support research which specifically relates to sudden infant death syndrome.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §449, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 856.)

§285g–2. Mental retardation research

The Director of the Institute shall conduct and support research and related activities into the causes, prevention, and treatment of mental retardation.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §450, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 856.)

§285g–3. Associate Director for Prevention; appointment; function

There shall be in the Institute an Associate Director for Prevention to coordinate and promote the programs in the Institute concerning the prevention of health problems of mothers and children. The Associate Director shall be appointed by the Director of the Institute from individuals who because of their professional training or experience are experts in public health or preventive medicine.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §451, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 856; amended Pub. L. 105–362, title VI, §601(a)(1)(E), Nov. 10, 1998, 112 Stat. 3285.)

Amendments

1998Pub. L. 105–362 struck out subsec. (a) designation and struck out subsec. (b) which read as follows: "The Associate Director for Prevention shall prepare for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 284b of this title a description of the prevention activities of the Institute, including a description of the staff and resources allocated to those activities."

§285g–4. National Center for Medical Rehabilitation Research

(a) Establishment of Center

There shall be in the Institute an agency to be known as the National Center for Medical Rehabilitation Research (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Center"). The Director of the Institute shall appoint a qualified individual to serve as Director of the Center. The Director of the Center shall report directly to the Director of the Institute.

(b) Purpose

The general purpose of the Center is the conduct and support of research and research training (including research on the development of orthotic and prosthetic devices), the dissemination of health information, and other programs with respect to the rehabilitation of individuals with physical disabilities resulting from diseases or disorders of the neurological, musculoskeletal, cardiovascular, pulmonary, or any other physiological system (hereafter in this section referred to as "medical rehabilitation").

(c) Authority of Director

(1) In carrying out the purpose described in subsection (b) of this section, the Director of the Center may—

(A) provide for clinical trials regarding medical rehabilitation;

(B) provide for research regarding model systems of medical rehabilitation;

(C) coordinate the activities of the Center with similar activities of other agencies of the Federal Government, including the other agencies of the National Institutes of Health, and with similar activities of other public entities and of private entities;

(D) support multidisciplinary medical rehabilitation research conducted or supported by more than one such agency;

(E) in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute and with the approval of the Director of NIH—

(i) establish technical and scientific peer review groups in addition to those appointed under section 282(b)(6) of this title; and

(ii) appoint the members of peer review groups established under subparagraph (A); and


(F) support medical rehabilitation research and training centers.


The Federal Advisory Committee Act shall not apply to the duration of a peer review group appointed under subparagraph (E).

(2) In carrying out this section, the Director of the Center may make grants and enter into cooperative agreements and contracts.

(d) Research Plan

(1) In consultation with the Director of the Center, the coordinating committee established under subsection (e) of this section, and the advisory board established under subsection (f) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall develop a comprehensive plan for the conduct and support of medical rehabilitation research (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Research Plan").

(2) The Research Plan shall—

(A) identify current medical rehabilitation research activities conducted or supported by the Federal Government, opportunities and needs for additional research, and priorities for such research; and

(B) make recommendations for the coordination of such research conducted or supported by the National Institutes of Health and other agencies of the Federal Government.


(3)(A) Not later than 18 months after the date of the enactment of the National Institutes of Health Revitalization Amendments of 1990, the Director of the Institute shall transmit the Research Plan to the Director of NIH, who shall submit the Plan to the President and the Congress.

(B) Subparagraph (A) shall be carried out independently of the process of reporting that is required in sections 283 and 284b of this title.

(4) The Director of the Institute shall periodically revise and update the Research Plan as appropriate, after consultation with the Director of the Center, the coordinating committee established under subsection (e) of this section, and the advisory board established under subsection (f) of this section. A description of any revisions in the Research Plan shall be contained in each report prepared under section 284b of this title by the Director of the Institute.

(e) Medical Rehabilitation Coordinating Committee

(1) The Director of NIH shall establish a committee to be known as the Medical Rehabilitation Coordinating Committee (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Coordinating Committee").

(2) The Coordinating Committee shall make recommendations to the Director of the Institute and the Director of the Center with respect to the content of the Research Plan and with respect to the activities of the Center that are carried out in conjunction with other agencies of the National Institutes of Health and with other agencies of the Federal Government.

(3) The Coordinating Committee shall be composed of the Director of the Center, the Director of the Institute, and the Directors of the National Institute on Aging, the National Institute of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases, the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, the National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke, and such other national research institutes and such representatives of other agencies of the Federal Government as the Director of NIH determines to be appropriate.

(4) The Coordinating Committee shall be chaired by the Director of the Center.

(f) National Advisory Board on Medical Rehabilitation Research

(1) Not later than 90 days after the date of the enactment of the National Institutes of Health Revitalization Amendments of 1990, the Director of NIH shall establish a National Advisory Board on Medical Rehabilitation Research (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Advisory Board").

(2) The Advisory Board shall review and assess Federal research priorities, activities, and findings regarding medical rehabilitation research, and shall advise the Director of the Center and the Director of the Institute on the provisions of the Research Plan.

(3)(A) The Director of NIH shall appoint to the Advisory Board 18 qualified representatives of the public who are not officers or employees of the Federal Government. Of such members, 12 shall be representatives of health and scientific disciplines with respect to medical rehabilitation and 6 shall be individuals representing the interests of individuals undergoing, or in need of, medical rehabilitation.

(B) The following officials shall serve as ex officio members of the Advisory Board:

(i) The Director of the Center.

(ii) The Director of the Institute.

(iii) The Director of the National Institute on Aging.

(iv) The Director of the National Institute of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases.

(v) The Director of the National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders.

(vi) The Director of the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute.

(vii) The Director of the National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke.

(viii) The Director of the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research.

(ix) The Commissioner for Rehabilitation Services Administration.

(x) The Assistant Secretary of Defense (Health Affairs).

(xi) The Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs.


(4) The members of the Advisory Board shall, from among the members appointed under paragraph (3)(A), designate an individual to serve as the chair of the Advisory Board.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §452, as added Pub. L. 101–613, §3(a), Nov. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 3227; amended Pub. L. 102–405, title III, §302(e)(1), Oct. 9, 1992, 106 Stat. 1985.)

References in Text

The Federal Advisory Committee Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(1), is Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, as amended, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The date of the enactment of the National Institutes of Health Revitalization Amendments of 1990, referred to in subsecs. (d)(3)(A) and (f)(1), probably means the date of enactment of the National Institutes of Health Amendments of 1990, Pub. L. 101–613, which was approved Nov. 16, 1990.

Amendments

1992—Subsec. (f)(3)(B)(xi). Pub. L. 102–405 substituted "Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Chief Medical Director of the Department of Veterans Affairs".

Preventing Duplicative Programs of Medical Rehabilitation Research

Section 3(b) of Pub. L. 101–613 provided that:

"(1) In general.—The Secretary of Health and Human Services and the heads of other Federal agencies shall—

"(A) jointly review the programs being carried out (or proposed to be carried out) by each such official with respect to medical rehabilitation research; and

"(B) as appropriate, enter into agreements for preventing duplication among such programs.

"(2) Time for completion.—The agreements required in paragraph (1)(B) shall be made not later than one year after the date of the enactment of this Act [Nov. 16, 1990].

"(3) Definition of medical rehabilitation.—For purposes of this subsection, the term 'medical rehabilitation' means the rehabilitation of individuals with physical disabilities resulting from diseases or disorders of the neurological, musculoskeletal, cardiovascular, pulmonary, or any other physiological system."

Termination of Advisory Boards

Advisory boards established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a board established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such board is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a board established by Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

§285g–5. Research centers with respect to contraception and infertility

(a) Grants and contracts

The Director of the Institute, after consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, shall make grants to, or enter into contracts with, public or nonprofit private entities for the development and operation of centers to conduct activities for the purpose of improving methods of contraception and centers to conduct activities for the purpose of improving methods of diagnosis and treatment of infertility.

(b) Number of centers

In carrying out subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall, subject to the extent of amounts made available in appropriations Acts, provide for the establishment of three centers with respect to contraception and for two centers with respect to infertility.

(c) Duties

(1) Each center assisted under this section shall, in carrying out the purpose of the center involved—

(A) conduct clinical and other applied research, including—

(i) for centers with respect to contraception, clinical trials of new or improved drugs and devices for use by males and females (including barrier methods); and

(ii) for centers with respect to infertility, clinical trials of new or improved drugs and devices for the diagnosis and treatment of infertility in males and females;


(B) develop protocols for training physicians, scientists, nurses, and other health and allied health professionals;

(C) conduct training programs for such individuals;

(D) develop model continuing education programs for such professionals; and

(E) disseminate information to such professionals and the public.


(2) A center may use funds provided under subsection (a) of this section to provide stipends for health and allied health professionals enrolled in programs described in subparagraph (C) of paragraph (1), and to provide fees to individuals serving as subjects in clinical trials conducted under such paragraph.

(d) Coordination of information

The Director of the Institute shall, as appropriate, provide for the coordination of information among the centers assisted under this section.

(e) Facilities

Each center assisted under subsection (a) of this section shall use the facilities of a single institution, or be formed from a consortium of cooperating institutions, meeting such requirements as may be prescribed by the Director of the Institute.

(f) Period of support

Support of a center under subsection (a) of this section may be for a period not exceeding 5 years. Such period may be extended for one or more additional periods not exceeding 5 years if the operations of such center have been reviewed by an appropriate technical and scientific peer review group established by the Director and if such group has recommended to the Director that such period should be extended.

(g) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this section, there are authorized to be appropriated $30,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 and 1996.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §452A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title X, §1001, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 165.)

§285g–6. Program regarding obstetrics and gynecology

The Director of the Institute shall establish and maintain within the Institute an intramural laboratory and clinical research program in obstetrics and gynecology.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §452B, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title X, §1011, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 166.)

§285g–7. Child health research centers

The Director of the Institute shall develop and support centers for conducting research with respect to child health. Such centers shall give priority to the expeditious transfer of advances from basic science to clinical applications and improving the care of infants and children.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §452C, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title X, §1021, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 167.)

§285g–8. Prospective longitudinal study on adolescent health

(a) In general

Not later than October 1, 1993, the Director of the Institute shall commence a study for the purpose of providing information on the general health and well-being of adolescents in the United States, including, with respect to such adolescents, information on—

(1) the behaviors that promote health and the behaviors that are detrimental to health; and

(2) the influence on health of factors particular to the communities in which the adolescents reside.

(b) Design of study

(1) In general

The study required in subsection (a) of this section shall be a longitudinal study in which a substantial number of adolescents participate as subjects. With respect to the purpose described in such subsection, the study shall monitor the subjects throughout the period of the study to determine the health status of the subjects and any change in such status over time.

(2) Population-specific analyses

The study required in subsection (a) of this section shall be conducted with respect to the population of adolescents who are female, the population of adolescents who are male, various socioeconomic populations of adolescents, and various racial and ethnic populations of adolescents. The study shall be designed and conducted in a manner sufficient to provide for a valid analysis of whether there are significant differences among such populations in health status and whether and to what extent any such differences are due to factors particular to the populations involved.

(c) Coordination with Women's Health Initiative

With respect to the national study of women being conducted by the Secretary and known as the Women's Health Initiative, the Secretary shall ensure that such study is coordinated with the component of the study required in subsection (a) of this section that concerns adolescent females, including coordination in the design of the 2 studies.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §452D, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title X, §1031, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 167.)

subpart 8—national institute of dental research

§285h. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute of Dental Research is the conduct and support of research, training, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to the cause, prevention, and methods of diagnosis and treatment of dental and oral diseases and conditions.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §453, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 856.)

subpart 9—national eye institute

§285i. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Eye Institute (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of research, training, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to blinding eye diseases, visual disorders, mechanisms of visual function, preservation of sight, and the special health problems and requirements of the blind. Subject to section 285i–1 of this title, the Director of the Institute may carry out a program of grants for public and private nonprofit vision research facilities.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §455, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 856; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XI, §1101(b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 169.)

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "Subject to section 285i–1 of this title, the Director" for "The Director" in second sentence.

§285i–1. Clinical research on eye care and diabetes

(a) Program of grants

The Director of the Institute, in consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, may award research grants to one or more Diabetes Eye Research Institutions for the support of programs in clinical or health services aimed at—

(1) providing comprehensive eye care services for people with diabetes, including a full complement of preventive, diagnostic and treatment procedures;

(2) developing new and improved techniques of patient care through basic and clinical research;

(3) assisting in translation of the latest research advances into clinical practice; and

(4) expanding the knowledge of the eye and diabetes through further research.

(b) Use of funds

Amounts received under a grant awarded under this section shall be used for the following:

(1) Establishing the biochemical, cellular, and genetic mechanisms associated with diabetic eye disease and the earlier detection of pending eye abnormalities. The focus of work under this paragraph shall require that ophthalmologists have training in the most up-to-date molecular and cell biological methods.

(2) Establishing new frontiers in technology, such as video-based diagnostic and research resources, to—

(A) provide improved patient care;

(B) provide for the evaluation of retinal physiology and its affect on diabetes; and

(C) provide for the assessment of risks for the development and progression of diabetic eye disease and a more immediate evaluation of various therapies aimed at preventing diabetic eye disease.


Such technologies shall be designed to permit evaluations to be performed both in humans and in animal models.

(3) The translation of the results of vision research into the improved care of patients with diabetic eye disease. Such translation shall require the application of institutional resources that encompass patient care, clinical research and basic laboratory research.

(4) The conduct of research concerning the outcomes of eye care treatments and eye health education programs as they relate to patients with diabetic eye disease, including the evaluation of regional approaches to such research.

(c) Authorized expenditures

The purposes for which a grant under subsection (a) of this section may be expended include equipment for the research described in such subsection.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §456, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XI, §1101(a), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 168.)

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285i of this title.

subpart 10—national institute of neurological disorders and stroke

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–553, §2(2), Oct. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 2769, and Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §101(2), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3049, made identical amendments to subpart heading, substituting "Neurological Disorders" for "Neurological and Communicative Disorders". Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238, amended subpart heading to read as if the amendment by Pub. L. 100–607 had not been enacted.

§285j. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of research, training, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to neurological disease and disorder and stroke.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §457, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 857; amended Pub. L. 100–553, §2(3), Oct. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 2769; Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §101(3), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3049; Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238; Pub. L. 101–93, §5(a), Aug. 16, 1989, 103 Stat. 611.)

Amendments

1989Pub. L. 101–93 substituted "disease and" for "disease and and".

1988Pub. L. 100–553 and Pub. L. 100–607 made identical amendments, substituting "Neurological Disorders" for "Neurological and Communicative Disorders" and "and disorder and stroke" for "disorder, stroke, and disorders of human communication". Pub. L. 100–690 amended this section to read as if the amendments by Pub. L. 100–607 had not been enacted.

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

For effective date of amendment by Pub. L. 100–690, see section 2613(b)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as an Effect of Enactment of Similar Provisions note under section 285m of this title.

§285j–1. Spinal cord regeneration research

The Director of the Institute shall conduct and support research into spinal cord regeneration.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §458, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 857.)

Interagency Committee on Spinal Cord Injury

Section 7 of Pub. L. 99–158 provided that:

"(a) Establishment.—Within 90 days after the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 20, 1985], the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall establish in the National Institute of Neurological and Communicative Diseases and Stroke an Interagency Committee on Spinal Cord Injury (hereafter in this section referred to as the 'Interagency Committee'). The Interagency Committee shall plan, develop, coordinate, and implement comprehensive Federal initiatives in research on spinal cord injury and regeneration.

"(b) Committee Composition and Meetings.—(1) The Interagency Committee shall consist of representatives from—

"(A) the National Institute on Neurological and Communicative Disorders and Stroke;

"(B) the Department of Defense;

"(C) the Department of Education;

"(D) the Veterans' Administration;

"(E) the Office of Science and Technology Policy; and

"(F) the National Science Foundation;

designated by the heads of such entities.

"(2) The Interagency Committee shall meet at least four times. The Secretary of Health and Human Services shall select the Chairman of the Interagency Committee from the members of the Interagency Committee.

"(c) Report.—Within the 18 months after the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 20, 1985], the Interagency Committee shall prepare and transmit to the Congress a report concerning its activities under this section. The report shall include a description of research projects on spinal cord injury and regeneration conducted or supported by Federal agencies during such 18-month period, the nature and purpose of each such project, the amounts expended for each such project, and an identification of the entity which conducted the research under each such project.

"(d) Termination.—The Interagency Committee shall terminate 90 days after the date on which the Interagency Committee transmits the report required by subsection (c) to the Congress."

§285j–2. Bioengineering research

The Director of the Institute shall make grants or enter into contracts for research on the means to overcome paralysis of the extremities through electrical stimulation and the use of computers.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §459, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 857.)

§285j–3. Research on multiple sclerosis

The Director of the Institute shall conduct and support research on multiple sclerosis, especially research on effects of genetics and hormonal changes on the progress of the disease.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §460, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XII, §1201, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 169.)

subpart 11—national institute of general medical sciences

§285k. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute of General Medical Sciences is the conduct and support of research, training, and, as appropriate, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to general or basic medical sciences and related natural or behavioral sciences which have significance for two or more other national research institutes or are outside the general area of responsibility of any other national research institute.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §461, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 857.)

subpart 12—national institute of environmental health sciences

§285l. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences (in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of research, training, health information dissemination, and other programs with respect to factors in the environment that affect human health, directly or indirectly.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §463, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 857; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XIII, §1301(b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 170.)

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43 inserted "(in this subpart referred to as the 'Institute')" after "Sciences".

§285l–1. Applied Toxicological Research and Testing Program

(a) There is established within the Institute a program for conducting applied research and testing regarding toxicology, which program shall be known as the Applied Toxicological Research and Testing Program.

(b) In carrying out the program established under subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Institute shall, with respect to toxicology, carry out activities—

(1) to expand knowledge of the health effects of environmental agents;

(2) to broaden the spectrum of toxicology information that is obtained on selected chemicals;

(3) to develop and validate assays and protocols, including alternative methods that can reduce or eliminate the use of animals in acute or chronic safety testing;

(4) to establish criteria for the validation and regulatory acceptance of alternative testing and to recommend a process through which scientifically validated alternative methods can be accepted for regulatory use;

(5) to communicate the results of research to government agencies, to medical, scientific, and regulatory communities, and to the public; and

(6) to integrate related activities of the Department of Health and Human Services.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §463A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XIII, §1301(a), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 169.)

subpart 13—national institute on deafness and other communication disorders

§285m. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders (hereafter referred to in this subpart as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of research and training, the dissemination of health information, and other programs with respect to disorders of hearing and other communication processes, including diseases affecting hearing, balance, voice, speech, language, taste, and smell.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464, as added Pub. L. 100–553, §2(4), Oct. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 2769, and Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §101(4), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3049; amended Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238.)

Codification

Pub. L. 100–553 and Pub. L. 100–607 contained identical provisions enacting this section. See 1988 Amendment note below.

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–690 amended this section to read as if the amendments made by Pub. L. 100–607, which enacted this section, had not been enacted. See Codification note above.

Short Title of 1988 Amendment

For short title of Pub. L. 100–553 which enacted this subpart and amended sections 281 and 285j of this title as the "National Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Act of 1988", see section 1 of Pub. L. 100–553, set out as a note under section 301 of this title.

Effect of Enactment of Similar Provisions

Section 2613(b) of Pub. L. 100–690 provided that:

"(1) Paragraphs (2) and (3) shall take effect immediately after the enactment of both the bill, S. 1727, of the One Hundredth Congress [Pub. L. 100–553, approved Oct. 28, 1988], and the Health Omnibus Programs Extension of 1988 [Pub. L. 100–607, approved Nov. 4, 1988].

"(2)(A) The provisions of the Public Health Service Act referred to in subparagraph (B), as similarly amended by the enactment of the bill, S. 1727, of the One Hundredth Congress, by subtitle A of title I of the Health Omnibus Programs Extension of 1988, and by subsection (a)(1) of this section, are amended to read as if the amendments made by such subtitle A and such subsection (a)(1) had not been enacted.

"(B) The provisions of the Public Health Service Act referred to in subparagraph (A) are—

"(A) sections 401(b)(1) and 457 [sections 281(b)(1) and 285j of this title];

"(B) part C of title IV [this part]; and

"(C) the heading for subpart 10 of such part C [42 U.S.C. prec. 285j].

"(3) Subsection (a)(2) of this section [set out below] is repealed."

Transitional and Savings Provisions

Section 3 of Pub. L. 100–553 provided that:

"(a) Transfer of Personnel, Assets, and Liabilities.—Personnel employed by the National Institutes of Health in connection with the functions vested under section 2 [enacting this subpart and amending sections 281 and 285j of this title] in the Director of the National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders, and assets, property, contracts, liabilities, records, unexpended balances of appropriations, authorizations, allocations, and other funds of the National Institutes of Health, arising from or employed, held, used, available to, or to be made available, in connection with such functions shall be transferred to the Director for appropriate allocation. Unexpended funds transferred under this subsection shall be used only for the purposes for which the funds were originally authorized and appropriated.

"(b) Savings Provisions.—With respect to functions vested under section 1 [probably means section 2, enacting this subpart and amending sections 281 and 285j of this title] in the Director of the National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders, all orders, rules, regulations, grants, contracts, certificates, licenses, privileges, and other determinations, actions, or official documents, that have been issued, made, granted, or allowed to become effective, and that are effective on the date of the enactment of this Act [Oct. 28, 1988], shall continue in effect according to their terms unless changed pursuant to law."

Section 2612(a)(2) of Pub. L. 100–690, which enacted provisions that were substantially identical to the transitional and savings provisions above, was repealed by section 2613(b)(3) of Pub. L. 100–690.

§285m–1. National Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Program

(a) The Director of the Institute, with the advice of the Institute's advisory council, shall establish a National Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Program (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Program"). The Director or 1 the Institute shall, with respect to the Program, prepare and transmit to the Director of NIH a plan to initiate, expand, intensify and coordinate activities of the Institute respecting disorders of hearing (including tinnitus) and other communication processes, including diseases affecting hearing, balance, voice, speech, language, taste, and smell. The plan shall include such comments and recommendations as the Director of the Institute determines appropriate. The Director of the Institute shall periodically review and revise the plan and shall transmit any revisions of the plan to the Director of NIH.

(b) Activities under the Program shall include—

(1) investigation into the etiology, pathology, detection, treatment, and prevention of all forms of disorders of hearing and other communication processes, primarily through the support of basic research in such areas as anatomy, audiology, biochemistry, bioengineering, epidemiology, genetics, immunology, microbiology, molecular biology, the neurosciences, otolaryngology, psychology, pharmacology, physiology, speech and language pathology, and any other scientific disciplines that can contribute important knowledge to the understanding and elimination of disorders of hearing and other communication processes;

(2) research into the evaluation of techniques (including surgical, medical, and behavioral approaches) and devices (including hearing aids, implanted auditory and nonauditory prosthetic devices and other communication aids) used in diagnosis, treatment, rehabilitation, and prevention of disorders of hearing and other communication processes;

(3) research into prevention, and early detection and diagnosis, of hearing loss and speech and language disturbances (including stuttering) and research into preventing the effects of such disorders on learning and learning disabilities with extension of programs for appropriate referral and rehabilitation;

(4) research into the detection, treatment, and prevention of disorders of hearing and other communication processes in the growing elderly population with extension of rehabilitative programs to ensure continued effective communication skills in such population;

(5) research to expand knowledge of the effects of environmental agents that influence hearing or other communication processes; and

(6) developing and facilitating intramural programs on clinical and fundamental aspects of disorders of hearing and all other communication processes.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464A, as added Pub. L. 100–553, §2(4), Oct. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 2769, and Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §101(4), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3049; amended Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238.)

Codification

Pub. L. 100–553 and Pub. L. 100–607 contained identical provisions enacting this section. See 1988 Amendment note below.

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–690 amended this section to read as if the amendments made by Pub. L. 100–607, which enacted this section, had not been enacted. See Codification note above.

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

For effective date of amendment by Pub. L. 100–690, see section 2613(b)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as an Effect of Enactment of Similar Provisions note under section 285m of this title.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285m–4 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be "of".

§285m–2. Data System and Information Clearinghouse

(a) The Director of the Institute shall establish a National Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Data System for the collection, storage, analysis, retrieval, and dissemination of data derived from patient populations with disorders of hearing or other communication processes, including where possible, data involving general populations for the purpose of identifying individuals at risk of developing such disorders.

(b) The Director of the Institute shall establish a National Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Information Clearinghouse to facilitate and enhance, through the effective dissemination of information, knowledge and understanding of disorders of hearing and other communication processes by health professionals, patients, industry, and the public.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464B, as added Pub. L. 100–553, §2(4), Oct. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 2770, and Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §101(4), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3050; amended Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238.)

Codification

Pub. L. 100–553 and Pub. L. 100–607 contained identical provisions enacting this section. See 1988 Amendment note below.

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–690 amended this section to read as if the amendments made by Pub. L. 100–607, which enacted this section, had not been enacted. See Codification note above.

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

For effective date of amendment by Pub. L. 100–690, see section 2613(b)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as an Effect of Enactment of Similar Provisions note under section 285m of this title.

§285m–3. Multipurpose deafness and other communication disorders center

(a) Development, modernization and operation; "modernization" defined

The Director of the Institute shall, after consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, provide for the development, modernization, and operation (including care required for research) of new and existing centers for studies of disorders of hearing and other communication processes. For purposes of this section, the term "modernization" means the alteration, remodeling, improvement, expansion, and repair of existing buildings and the provision of equipment for such buildings to the extent necessary to make them suitable for use as centers described in the preceding sentence.

(b) Use of facilities; qualifications

Each center assisted under this section shall—

(1) use the facilities of a single institution or a consortium of cooperating institutions; and

(2) meet such qualifications as may be prescribed by the Secretary.

(c) Requisite programs

Each center assisted under this section shall, at least, conduct—

(1) basic and clinical research into the cause diagnosis, early detection, prevention, control and treatment of disorders of hearing and other communication processes and complications resulting from such disorders, including research into rehabilitative aids, implantable biomaterials, auditory speech processors, speech production devices, and other otolaryngologic procedures;

(2) training programs for physicians, scientists, and other health and allied health professionals;

(3) information and continuing education programs for physicians and other health and allied health professionals who will provide care for patients with disorders of hearing or other communication processes; and

(4) programs for the dissemination to the general public of information—

(A) on the importance of early detection of disorders of hearing and other communication processes, of seeking prompt treatment, rehabilitation, and of following an appropriate regimen; and

(B) on the importance of avoiding exposure to noise and other environmental toxic agents that may affect disorders of hearing or other communication processes.

(d) Stipends

A center may use funds provided under subsection (a) of this section to provide stipends for health professionals enrolled in training programs described in subsection (c)(2) of this section.

(e) Discretionary programs

Each center assisted under this section may conduct programs—

(1) to establish the effectiveness of new and improved methods of detection, referral, and diagnosis of individuals at risk of developing disorders of hearing or other communication processes; and

(2) to disseminate the results of research, screening, and other activities, and develop means of standardizing patient data and recordkeeping.

(f) Equitable geographical distribution; needs of elderly and children

The Director of the Institute shall, to the extent practicable, provide for an equitable geographical distribution of centers assisted under this section. The Director shall give appropriate consideration to the need for centers especially suited to meeting the needs of the elderly, and of children (particularly with respect to their education and training), affected by disorders of hearing or other communication processes.

(g) Period of support; recommended extensions of peer review group

Support of a center under this section may be for a period not to exceed seven years. Such period may be extended by the Director of the Institute for one or more additional periods of not more than five years if the operations of such center have been reviewed by an appropriate technical and scientific peer review group established by the Director, with the advice of the Institute's advisory council, if such group has recommended to the Director that such period should be extended.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464C, as added Pub. L. 100–553, §2(4), Oct. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 2771, and Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §101(4), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3050; amended Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238.)

Codification

Pub. L. 100–553 and Pub. L. 100–607 contained identical provisions enacting this section. See 1988 Amendment note below.

Amendments

1988Pub. L. 100–690 amended this section to read as if the amendments made by Pub. L. 100–607, which enacted this section, had not been enacted. See Codification note above.

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

For effective date of amendment by Pub. L. 100–690, see section 2613(b)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as an Effect of Enactment of Similar Provisions note under section 285m of this title.

§285m–4. National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Advisory Board

(a) Establishment

The Secretary shall establish in the Institute the National Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Advisory Board (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Advisory Board").

(b) Composition; qualifications; appointed and ex officio members

The Advisory Board shall be composed of eighteen appointed members and nonvoting ex officio members as follows:

(1) The Secretary shall appoint—

(A) twelve members from individuals who are scientists, physicians, and other health and rehabilitation professionals, who are not officers or employees of the United States, and who represent the specialties and disciplines relevant to deafness and other communication disorders, including not less than two persons with a communication disorder; and

(B) six members from the general public who are knowledgeable with respect to such disorders, including not less than one person with a communication disorder and not less than one person who is a parent of an individual with such a disorder.


Of the appointed members, not less than five shall by virtue of training or experience be knowledgeable in diagnoses and rehabilitation of communication disorders, education of the hearing, speech, or language impaired, public health, public information, community program development, occupational hazards to communications senses, or the aging process.

(2) The following shall be ex officio members of each Advisory Board:

(A) The Assistant Secretary for Health, the Director of NIH, the Director of the National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders, the Director of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs, and the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs (or the designees of such officers).

(B) Such other officers and employees of the United States as the Secretary determines necessary for the Advisory Board to carry out its functions.

(c) Compensation

Members of an Advisory Board who are officers or employees of the Federal Government shall serve as members of the Advisory Board without compensation in addition to that received in their regular public employment. Other members of the Board shall receive compensation at rates not to exceed the daily equivalent of the annual rate in effect for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule for each day (including traveltime) they are engaged in the performance of their duties as members of the Board.

(d) Term of office; vacancies

The term of office of an appointed member of the Advisory Board is four years, except that no term of office may extend beyond the expiration of the Advisory Board. Any member appointed to fill a vacancy for an unexpired term shall be appointed for the remainder of such term. A member may serve after the expiration of the member's term until a successor has taken office. If a vacancy occurs in the Advisory Board, the Secretary shall make an appointment to fill the vacancy not later than 90 days from the date the vacancy occurred.

(e) Chairman

The members of the Advisory Board shall select a chairman from among the appointed members.

(f) Personnel; executive director; professional and clerical staff members; consultants; information and administrative support services and facilities

The Secretary shall, after consultation with and consideration of the recommendations of the Advisory Board, provide the Advisory Board with an executive director and one other professional staff member. In addition, the Secretary shall, after consultation with and consideration of the recommendations of the Advisory Board, provide the Advisory Board with such additional professional staff members, such clerical staff members, such services of consultants, such information, and (through contracts or other arrangements) such administrative support services and facilities, as the Secretary determines are necessary for the Advisory Board to carry out its functions.

(g) Meetings

The Advisory Board shall meet at the call of the chairman or upon request of the Director of the Institute, but not less often than four times a year.

(h) Functions

The Advisory Board shall—

(1) review and evaluate the implementation of the plan prepared under section 285m–1(a) of this title and periodically update the plan to ensure its continuing relevance;

(2) for the purpose of assuring the most effective use and organization of resources respecting deafness and other communication disorders, advise and make recommendations to the Congress, the Secretary, the Director of NIH, the Director of the Institute, and the heads of other appropriate Federal agencies for the implementation and revision of such plan; and

(3) maintain liaison with other advisory bodies related to Federal agencies involved in the implementation of such plan and with key non-Federal entities involved in activities affecting the control of such disorders.

(i) Subcommittee activities; workshops and conferences; collection of data

In carrying out its functions, the Advisory Board may establish subcommittees, convene workshops and conferences, and collect data. Such subcommittees may be composed of Advisory Board members and nonmember consultants with expertise in the particular area addressed by such subcommittees. The subcommittees may hold such meetings as are necessary to enable them to carry out their activities.

(j) Annual report

The Advisory Board shall prepare an annual report for the Secretary which—

(1) describes the Advisory Board's activities in the fiscal year for which the report is made;

(2) describes and evaluates the progress made in such fiscal year in research, treatment, education, and training with respect to the deafness and other communication disorders;

(3) summarizes and analyzes expenditures made by the Federal Government for activities respecting such disorders in such fiscal year; and

(4) contains the Advisory Board's recommendations (if any) for changes in the plan prepared under section 285m–1(a) of this title.

(k) Commencement of existence

The National Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Advisory Board shall be established not later than April 1, 1989.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464D, as added Pub. L. 100–553, §2(4), Oct. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 2772, and Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(a)(1), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4235; amended Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238; Pub. L. 101–93, §5(b), Aug. 16, 1989, 103 Stat. 611; Pub. L. 102–405, title III, §302(e)(1), Oct. 9 1992, 106 Stat. 1985; Pub. L. 102–531, title III, §312(d)(8), Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3504; Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2008(b)(8), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 211.)

Codification

Pub. L. 100–553 and section 2613(a)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690 contained identical provisions enacting this section. See 1988 Amendment note below.

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Veterans' Administration".

1992—Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 102–531 substituted "Centers for Disease Control and Prevention" for "Centers for Disease Control".

Pub. L. 102–405 substituted "Under Secretary for Health" for "Chief Medical Director".

1989—Subsec. (k). Pub. L. 101–93 substituted "April 1, 1989" for "90 days after the date of the enactment of the National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Act".

1988Pub. L. 100–690, §2613(b)(2), amended this section to read as if the amendments made by Pub. L. 100–690, §2613(a)(1), which enacted this section, had not been enacted. See Codification note above.

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

For effective date of amendment by section 2613(b)(2) of Pub. L. 100–690, see section 2613(b)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as an Effect of Enactment of Similar Provisions note under section 285m of this title.

Termination of Advisory Boards

Advisory boards established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a board established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such board is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a board established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

References in Other Laws to GS–16, 17, or 18 Pay Rates

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

§285m–5. Interagency Coordinating Committee

(a) Establishment

The Secretary may establish a committee to be known as the Deafness and Other Communication Disorders Interagency Coordinating Committee (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Coordinating Committee").

(b) Functions

The Coordinating Committee shall, with respect to deafness and other communication disorders—

(1) provide for the coordination of the activities of the national research institutes; and

(2) coordinate the aspects of all Federal health programs and activities relating to deafness and other communication disorders in order to assure the adequacy and technical soundness of such programs and activities and in order to provide for the full communication and exchange of information necessary to maintain adequate coordination of such programs and activities.

(c) Composition

The Coordinating Committee shall be composed of the directors of each of the national research institutes and divisions involved in research with respect to deafness and other communication disorders and representatives of all other Federal departments and agencies whose programs involve health functions or responsibilities relevant to deafness and other communication disorders.

(d) Chairman; meetings

The Coordinating Committee shall be chaired by the Director of NIH (or the designee of the Director). The Committee shall meet at the call of the chair, but not less often than four times a year.

(e) Annual report; recipients of report

Not later than 120 days after the end of each fiscal year, the Coordinating Committee shall prepare and transmit to the Secretary, the Director of NIH, the Director of the Institute, and the advisory council for the Institute a report detailing the activities of the Committee in such fiscal year in carrying out subsection (b) of this section.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464E, as added Pub. L. 100–553, §2(4), Oct. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 2774, and Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(a)(1), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4237; amended Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238; Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2008(b)(9), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 211.)

Codification

Pub. L. 100–553 and section 2613(a)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690 contained identical provisions enacting this section. See 1988 Amendment note below.

Amendments

1993—Subsecs. (d), (e). Pub. L. 103–43 inserted "Coordinating" before "Committee" in first sentence of subsec. (d) and before first reference to "Committee" in subsec. (e).

1988Pub. L. 100–690, §2613(b)(2), amended this section to read as if the amendments made by Pub. L. 100–690, §2613(a)(1), which enacted this section, had not been enacted. See Codification note above.

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

For effective date of amendment by section 2613(b)(2) of Pub. L. 100–690, see section 2613(b)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as an Effect of Enactment of Similar Provisions note under section 285m of this title.

§285m–6. Limitation on administrative expenses

With respect to amounts appropriated for a fiscal year for the National Institutes of Health, the limitation established in section 284c(a)(1) of this title on the expenditure of such amounts for administrative expenses shall apply to administrative expenses of the National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464F, as added Pub. L. 100–553, §2(4), Oct. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 2774, and Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(a)(1), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238; amended Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2613(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4238; Pub. L. 103–43, title IV, §403(b)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 158.)

Codification

Pub. L. 100–553 and section 2613(a)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690 contained identical provisions enacting this section. See 1988 Amendment note below.

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "section 284c(a)(1)" for "section 284c(b)(1)".

1988Pub. L. 100–690, §2613(b)(2), amended this section to read as if the amendments made by Pub. L. 100–690, §2613(a)(1), which enacted this section, had not been enacted. See Codification note above.

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

For effective date of amendment by section 2613(b)(2) of Pub. L. 100–690, see section 2613(b)(1) of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as an Effect of Enactment of Similar Provisions note under section 285m of this title.

subpart 14—national institute on alcohol abuse and alcoholism

Subpart Referred to in Other Sections

This subpart is referred to in section 289c–1 of this title.

§285n. Purpose of Institute

(a) In general

The general purpose of the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of biomedical and behavioral research, health services research, research training, and health information dissemination with respect to the prevention of alcohol abuse and the treatment of alcoholism.

(b) Research program

The research program established under this subpart shall encompass the social, behavioral, and biomedical etiology, mental and physical health consequences, and social and economic consequences of alcohol abuse and alcoholism. In carrying out the program, the Director of the Institute is authorized to—

(1) collect and disseminate through publications and other appropriate means (including the development of curriculum materials), information as to, and the practical application of, the research and other activities under the program;

(2) make available research facilities of the Public Health Service to appropriate public authorities, and to health officials and scientists engaged in special study;

(3) make grants to universities, hospitals, laboratories, and other public or nonprofit institutions, and to individuals for such research projects as are recommended by the National Advisory Council on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism, giving special consideration to projects relating to—

(A) the relationship between alcohol abuse and domestic violence,

(B) the effects of alcohol use during pregnancy,

(C) the impact of alcoholism and alcohol abuse on the family, the workplace, and systems for the delivery of health services,

(D) the relationship between the abuse of alcohol and other drugs,

(E) the effect on the incidence of alcohol abuse and alcoholism of social pressures, legal requirements respecting the use of alcoholic beverages, the cost of such beverages, and the economic status and education of users of such beverages,

(F) the interrelationship between alcohol use and other health problems,

(G) the comparison of the cost and effectiveness of various treatment methods for alcoholism and alcohol abuse and the effectiveness of prevention and intervention programs for alcoholism and alcohol abuse,

(H) alcoholism and alcohol abuse among women;


(4) secure from time to time and for such periods as he deems advisable, the assistance and advice of experts, scholars, and consultants from the United States or abroad;

(5) promote the coordination of research programs conducted by the Institute, and similar programs conducted by the National Institute of Drug Abuse and by other departments, agencies, organizations, and individuals, including all National Institutes of Health research activities which are or may be related to the problems of individuals suffering from alcoholism or alcohol abuse or those of their families or the impact of alcohol abuse on other health problems;

(6) conduct an intramural program of biomedical, behavioral, epidemiological, and social research, including research into the most effective means of treatment and service delivery, and including research involving human subjects, which is—

(A) located in an institution capable of providing all necessary medical care for such human subjects, including complete 24-hour medical diagnostic services by or under the supervision of physicians, acute and intensive medical care, including 24-hour emergency care, psychiatric care, and such other care as is determined to be necessary for individuals suffering from alcoholism and alcohol abuse; and

(B) associated with an accredited medical or research training institution;


(7) for purposes of study, admit and treat at institutions, hospitals, and stations of the Public Health Service, persons not otherwise eligible for such treatment;

(8) provide to health officials, scientists, and appropriate public and other nonprofit institutions and organizations, technical advice and assistance on the application of statistical and other scientific research methods to experiments, studies, and surveys in health and medical fields;

(9) enter into contracts under this subchapter without regard to section 3324(a) and (b) of title 31 and section 5 of title 41; and

(10) adopt, upon recommendation of the National Advisory Council on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism, such additional means as he deems necessary or appropriate to carry out the purposes of this section.

(c) Collaboration

The Director of the Institute shall collaborate with the Administrator of the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration in focusing the services research activities of the Institute and in disseminating the results of such research to health professionals and the general public.

(d) Funding

(1) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this subpart, there are authorized to be appropriated $300,000,000 for fiscal year 1993, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1994.

(2) Allocation for health services research

Of the amounts appropriated under paragraph (1) for a fiscal year, the Director shall obligate not less than 15 percent to carry out health services research relating to alcohol abuse and alcoholism.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464H, as added and amended Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §122(a), (b), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 358, 359; Pub. L. 102–352, §2(a)(1), Aug. 26, 1992, 106 Stat. 938.)

Codification

Section 290bb(b) of this title, which was transferred to subsec. (b) of this section and amended by Pub. L. 102–321, was based on act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title V, §510, formerly Pub. L. 91–616, title V, §501(b), as added Pub. L. 94–371, §7, July 26, 1976, 90 Stat. 1038; amended Pub. L. 95–622, title II, §268(d), Nov. 9, 1978, 92 Stat. 3437; Pub. L. 96–180, §14(b), Jan. 2, 1980, 93 Stat. 1305; renumbered §510(b) of act July 1, 1944, and amended Apr. 26, 1983, Pub. L. 98–24, §2(b)(9), 97 Stat. 179; Oct. 19, 1984, Pub. L. 98–509, title II, §205(a)(1), 98 Stat. 2361.

In subsec. (b)(9), "section 3324(a) and (b) of title 31" substituted for reference to section 3648 of the Revised Statutes (31 U.S.C. 529) on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

Amendments

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–352 substituted "Institute on Alcohol" for "Institute of Alcohol".

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–321, §122(b)(1), (2)(A), transferred subsec. (b) of section 290bb of this title to subsec. (b) of this section, substituted "(b) Research Program.—The research program established under this subpart shall encompass the social, behavioral, and biomedical etiology, mental and physical health consequences, and social and economic consequences of alcohol abuse and alcoholism. In carrying out the program, the Director of the Institute is authorized" for "(b) In carrying out the program described in subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary, acting through the Institute, is authorized" in introductory provisions, and substituted a semicolon for period at end of par. (3)(H).

Subsecs. (c), (d). Pub. L. 102–321, §122(b)(2)(B), added subsecs. (c) and (d).

Effective Date of 1992 Amendment

Section 3 of Pub. L. 102–352 provided that: "The amendments made by—

"(1) subsection (a) of section 2 [amending this section and sections 285n–2, 285o, 285o–2, 285p, 290aa–1, 290aa–3, 300x–7, 300x–27, 300x–33, 300x–53, and 300y of this title], shall take effect immediately upon the effectuation of the amendments made by titles I and II of the ADAMHA Reorganization Act [Pub. L. 102–321, see Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note set out under section 236 of this title]; and

"(2) subsections (b) and (c) of section 2 [amending sections 290cc–21, 290cc–28, and 290cc–30 of this title and provisions set out as notes under sections 290aa and 300x of this title], shall take effect on the date of enactment of this Act [Aug. 26, 1992]."

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

Required Allocations for Health Services Research

Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2016(b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 218, provided that:

"(1) In general.—With respect to the allocation for health services research required in each of the provisions of law specified in paragraph (2), the term '15 percent' appearing in each of such provisions is, in the case of allocations for fiscal year 1993, deemed to be 12 percent.

"(2) Relevant provisions of law.—The provisions of law referred to in paragraph (1) are—

"(A) section 464H(d)(2) of the Public Health Service Act, as added by section 122 of Public Law 102–321 (106 Stat. 358) [subsec. (d)(2) of this section];

"(B) section 464L(d)(2) of the Public Health Service Act, as added by section 123 of Public Law 102–321 (106 Stat. 360) [section 285o(d)(2) of this title]; and

"(C) section 464R(f)(2) of the Public Health Service Act, as added by section 124 of Public Law 102–321 (106 Stat. 364) [section 285p(f)(2) of this title]."

Study on Fetal Alcohol Effect and Fetal Alcohol Syndrome

Section 705 of Pub. L. 102–321 directed Secretary of Health and Human Services to enter into a contract with a public or nonprofit private entity to conduct a study on the prevalence of fetal alcohol effect and fetal alcohol syndrome in the general population of the United States and on the adequacy of Federal efforts to reduce the incidence of such conditions (including efforts regarding appropriate training for health care providers in identifying such effect or syndrome), and to ensure that a report outlining this study be submitted to Congress not later than 18 months after July 10, 1992.

Alcoholism and Alcohol Abuse Treatment Study

Pub. L. 99–570, title IV, §4022, Oct. 27, 1986, 100 Stat. 3207–124, directed Secretary of Health and Human Services, acting through Director of National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism, to conduct a study of alternative approaches for alcoholism and alcohol abuse treatment and rehabilitation and of financing alternatives including policies and experiences of third party insurers and State and municipal governments; to recommend policies and programs for research, planning, administration, and reimbursement for treatment and rehabilitation; to request National Academy of Sciences to conduct such study in consultation with Director of National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism under an arrangement entered into with consent of Academy that actual expenses of Academy will be paid by Secretary and that Academy would submit a final report to Secretary no later than 24 months after the arrangement was entered into; and to transmit a final report to Congress no later than 30 days after receiving Academy's report.

§285n–1. Associate Director for Prevention

(a) In general

There shall be in the Institute an Associate Director for Prevention who shall be responsible for the full-time coordination and promotion of the programs in the Institute concerning the prevention of alcohol abuse and alcoholism. The Associate Director shall be appointed by the Director of the Institute from individuals who because of their professional training or expertise are experts in alcohol abuse and alcoholism or the prevention of such.

(b) Biennial report

The Associate Director for Prevention shall prepare for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 284b of this title a description of the prevention activities of the Institute, including a description of the staff and resources allocated to those activities.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464I, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §122(c), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 359.)

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

§285n–2. National Alcohol Research Centers; mandatory grant for research of effects of alcohol on elderly

(a) Designation; procedures applicable for approval of applications

The Secretary acting through the Institute may designate National Alcohol Research Centers for the purpose of interdisciplinary research relating to alcoholism and other biomedical, behavioral, and social issues related to alcoholism and alcohol abuse. No entity may be designated as a Center unless an application therefor has been submitted to, and approved by, the Secretary. Such an application shall be submitted in such manner and contain such information as the Secretary may reasonably require. The Secretary may not approve such an application unless—

(1) the application contains or is supported by reasonable assurances that—

(A) the applicant has the experience, or capability, to conduct, through biomedical, behavioral, social, and related disciplines, long-term research on alcoholism and other alcohol problems and to provide coordination of such research among such disciplines;

(B) the applicant has available to it sufficient facilities (including laboratory, reference, and data analysis facilities) to carry out the research plan contained in the application;

(C) the applicant has facilities and personnel to provide training in the prevention and treatment of alcoholism and other alcohol problems;

(D) the applicant has the capacity to train predoctoral and postdoctoral students for careers in research on alcoholism and other alcohol problems;

(E) the applicant has the capacity to conduct courses on alcohol problems and research on alcohol problems for undergraduate and graduate students, and for medical and osteopathic, nursing, social work, and other specialized graduate students; and

(F) the applicant has the capacity to conduct programs of continuing education in such medical, legal, and social service fields as the Secretary may require.1


(2) the application contains a detailed five-year plan for research relating to alcoholism and other alcohol problems.

(b) Annual grants; amount; limitation on uses

The Secretary shall, under such conditions as the Secretary may reasonably require, make annual grants to Centers which have been designated under this section. No funds provided under a grant under this subsection may be used for the purchase of any land or the purchase, construction, preservation, or repair of any building. For the purposes of the preceding sentence, the term "construction" has the meaning given that term by section 292a(1) 2 of this title. The Secretary shall include in the grants made under this section for fiscal years beginning after September 30, 1981, a grant to a designated Center for research on the effects of alcohol on the elderly.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464J, formerly title V, §511, formerly Pub. L. 91–616, title V, §503, formerly §504, as added Pub. L. 94–371, §7, July 26, 1976, 90 Stat. 1039; amended Pub. L. 95–622, title I, §110(d), Nov. 9, 1978, 92 Stat. 3420; Pub. L. 96–180, §16, Jan. 2, 1980, 93 Stat. 1305; renumbered §503 of Pub. L. 91–616 and amended Pub. L. 97–35, title IX, §965(b), (c), Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 594; renumbered §511 of act July 1, 1944, and amended Pub. L. 98–24, §2(b)(9), Apr. 26, 1983, 97 Stat. 179; Pub. L. 99–570, title IV, §4008, Oct. 27, 1986, 100 Stat. 3207–115; renumbered title IV, §464J and amended Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §122(d), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 360; Pub. L. 102–352, §2(a)(2), Aug. 26, 1992, 106 Stat. 938.)

References in Text

Section 292a of this title, referred to in subsec. (b), was in the original a reference to section 701 of act July 1, 1944. Section 701 of that Act was omitted in the general revision of subchapter V of this chapter by Pub. L. 102–408, title I, §102, Oct. 13, 1992, 106 Stat. 1994. Pub. L. 102–408 enacted a new section 701 of act July 1, 1944, relating to statement of purpose, and a new section 702, relating to scope and duration of loan insurance program, which are classified to sections 292 and 292a, respectively, of this title. For provisions relating to definitions, see sections 292o and 295p of this title.

Codification

Section was formerly classified to section 290bb–1 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 102–321.

Section was formerly classified to section 4587 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 98–24.

Section was formerly classified to section 4588 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 97–35.

Amendments

1992—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–352 substituted "292a(1)" for "292a(2)".

Pub. L. 102–321, §122(d)(2), struck "or rental" before "of any land".

1986—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–570, §4008(1), which directed that subsec. (b) be amended by striking out "or rental" before "any land", could not be executed because "or rental" appeared before "of any land".

Pub. L. 99–570, §4008(2), struck out "rental," before "purchase".

1983—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–24, §2(b)(9)(B)(i), struck out direction that, insofar as practicable, the Secretary approve applications under this subsection in a manner resulting in an equitable geographic distribution of Centers.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–24, §2(b)(9)(B)(ii), (iii), struck out provision that no annual grant to any Center might exceed $1,500,000, and made a technical amendment to reference to section 292a of this title to reflect the transfer of this section to the Public Health Service Act.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 98–24, §2(b)(9)(B)(iv), struck out subsec. (c) which authorized $6,000,000 for each of fiscal years ending Sept. 30, 1977, 1978, and 1979, $8,000,000 for fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1980, and $9,000,000 for fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1981.

1981—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 97–35, §965(b), inserted provisions relating to grants made for fiscal years beginning after Sept. 30, 1981.

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–180, §16(a), substituted: in first sentence "biomedical, behavioral, and social issues related to alcoholism and alcohol abuse" for "alcohol problems"; in par. (1)(B) "facilities (including laboratory, reference, and data analysis facilities) to carry out the research plan contained in the application" for "laboratory facilities and reference services (including reference services that will afford access to scientific alcohol literature)"; and in par. (1)(E) "medical and osteopathic, nursing, social work, and other specialized graduate students; and" for "medical and osteopathic students and physicians;", and added par. (1)(F).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 96–180, §16(b), increased annual grant limitation to $1,500,000 from $1,000,000.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 96–180, §16(c), authorized appropriation of $8,000,000 and $9,000,000 for fiscal years ending Sept. 30, 1980, and 1981.

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–622 inserted provision following par. (2) relating to approval of applications under this subsection by the Secretary in a manner which results in equitable geographic distribution of Centers.

Effective Date of 1992 Amendments

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–352 effective immediately upon effectuation of amendment made by Pub. L. 102–321, see section 3(1) of Pub. L. 102–352, set out as a note under section 285n of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–321 effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as a note under section 236 of this title.

1 So in original. The period probably should be "; and".

2 See References in Text note below.

subpart 15—national institute on drug abuse

Subpart Referred to in Other Sections

This subpart is referred to in section 289c–1 of this title.

§285o. Purpose of Institute

(a) In general

The general purpose of the National Institute on Drug Abuse (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of biomedical and behavioral research, health services research, research training, and health information dissemination with respect to the prevention of drug abuse and the treatment of drug abusers.

(b) Research program

The research program established under this subpart shall encompass the social, behavioral, and biomedical etiology, mental and physical health consequences, and social and economic consequences of drug abuse. In carrying out the program, the Director of the Institute shall give special consideration to projects relating to drug abuse among women (particularly with respect to pregnant women).

(c) Collaboration

The Director of the Institute shall collaborate with the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration in focusing the services research activities of the Institute and in disseminating the results of such research to health professionals and the general public.

(d) Funding

(1) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this subpart, other than section 285o–4 of this title, there are authorized to be appropriated $440,000,000 for fiscal year 1993, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1994.

(2) Allocation for health services research

Of the amounts appropriated under paragraph (1) for a fiscal year, the Director shall obligate not less than 15 percent to carry out health services research relating to drug abuse.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464L, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §123(a), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 360; amended Pub. L. 102–352, §2(a)(3), Aug. 26, 1992, 106 Stat. 938.)

Amendments

1992—Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 102–352 inserted "other than section 285o–4 of this title," after "this subpart,".

Effective Date of 1992 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–352 effective immediately upon effectuation of amendment made by Pub. L. 102–321, see section 3(1) of Pub. L. 102–352, set out as a note under section 285n of this title.

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

Required Allocations for Health Services Research

With respect to fiscal year 1993 allocations for health services research required in subsec. (d)(2) of this section, the term "15 percent" deemed to be 12 percent, see section 2016(b) of Pub. L. 103–43, set out as a note under section 285n of this title.

§285o–1. Associate Director for Prevention

(a) In general

There shall be in the Institute an Associate Director for Prevention who shall be responsible for the full-time coordination and promotion of the programs in the Institute concerning the prevention of drug abuse. The Associate Director shall be appointed by the Director of the Institute from individuals who because of their professional training or expertise are experts in drug abuse and the prevention of such abuse.

(b) Report

The Associate Director for Prevention shall prepare for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 284b of this title a description of the prevention activities of the Institute, including a description of the staff and resources allocated to those activities.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464M, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §123(b), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 361.)

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

§285o–2. Drug Abuse Research Centers

(a) Authority

The Director of the Institute may designate National Drug Abuse Research Centers for the purpose of interdisciplinary research relating to drug abuse and other biomedical, behavioral, and social issues related to drug abuse. No entity may be designated as a Center unless an application therefore has been submitted to, and approved by, the Secretary. Such an application shall be submitted in such manner and contain such information as the Secretary may reasonably require. The Secretary may not approve such an application unless—

(1) the application contains or is supported by reasonable assurances that—

(A) the applicant has the experience, or capability, to conduct, through biomedical, behavioral, social, and related disciplines, long-term research on drug abuse and to provide coordination of such research among such disciplines;

(B) the applicant has available to it sufficient facilities (including laboratory, reference, and data analysis facilities) to carry out the research plan contained in the application;

(C) the applicant has facilities and personnel to provide training in the prevention and treatment of drug abuse;

(D) the applicant has the capacity to train predoctoral and postdoctoral students for careers in research on drug abuse;

(E) the applicant has the capacity to conduct courses on drug abuse problems and research on drug abuse for undergraduate and graduate students, and medical and osteopathic, nursing, social work, and other specialized graduate students; and

(F) the applicant has the capacity to conduct programs of continuing education in such medical, legal, and social service fields as the Secretary may require.1


(2) the application contains a detailed five-year plan for research relating to drug abuse.

(b) Grants

The Director of the Institute shall, under such conditions as the Secretary may reasonably require, make annual grants to Centers which have been designated under this section. No funds provided under a grant under this subsection may be used for the purchase of any land or the purchase, construction, preservation, or repair of any building. For the purposes of the preceding sentence, the term "construction" has the meaning given that term by section 292a(1) 2 of this title.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464N, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §123(b), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 361; amended Pub. L. 102–352, §2(a)(4), Aug. 26, 1992, 106 Stat. 938.)

References in Text

Section 292a of this title, referred to in subsec. (b), was in the original a reference to section 701 of act July 1, 1944. Section 701 of that Act was omitted in the general revision of subchapter V of this chapter by Pub. L. 102–408, title I, §102, Oct. 13, 1992, 106 Stat. 1994. Pub. L. 102–408 enacted a new section 701 of act July 1, 1944, relating to statement of purpose, and a new section 702, relating to scope and duration of loan insurance program, which are classified to sections 292 and 292a, respectively, of this title. For provisions relating to definitions, see sections 292o and 295p of this title.

Amendments

1992—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–352 substituted "292a(1)" for "292a(2)".

Effective Date of 1992 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–352 effective immediately upon effectuation of amendment made by Pub. L. 102–321, see section 3(1) of Pub. L. 102–352, set out as a note under section 285n of this title.

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

1 So in original. The period probably should be "; and".

2 See References in Text note below.

§285o–3. Office on AIDS

The Director of the Institute shall establish within the Institute an Office on AIDS. The Office shall be responsible for the coordination of research and determining the direction of the Institute with respect to AIDS research related to—

(1) primary prevention of the spread of HIV, including transmission via drug abuse;

(2) drug abuse services research; and

(3) other matters determined appropriate by the Director.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464O, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §123(b), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 362.)

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

Study by National Academy of Sciences

Section 706 of Pub. L. 102–321 directed Secretary of Health and Human Services to contract for a study or studies relating to programs that provide both sterile hypodermic needles and bleach to individuals in order to reduce the risk of contracting acquired immune deficiency syndrome or related conditions, in order to determine extent to which such programs promote the abuse of drugs or otherwise altered any behaviors constituting a substantial risk of contracting AIDS or hepatitus, or of transmitting such conditions, and further directed Secretary to ensure that a report is submitted to Congress on the results of this study not later than 18 months after July 10, 1992.

§285o–4. Medication Development Program

(a) Establishment

There is established in the Institute a Medication Development Program through which the Director of such Institute shall—

(1) conduct periodic meetings with the Commissioner of Food and Drugs to discuss measures that may facilitate the approval process of drug abuse treatments;

(2) encourage and promote (through grants, contracts, international collaboration, or otherwise) expanded research programs, investigations, experiments, community trials, and studies, into the development and use of medications to treat drug addiction;

(3) establish or provide for the establishment of research facilities;

(4) report on the activities of other relevant agencies relating to the development and use of pharmacotherapeutic treatments for drug addiction;

(5) collect, analyze, and disseminate data useful in the development and use of pharmacotherapeutic treatments for drug addiction and collect, catalog, analyze, and disseminate through international channels, the results of such research;

(6) directly or through grants, contracts, or cooperative agreements, support training in the fundamental sciences and clinical disciplines related to the pharmacotherapeutic treatment of drug abuse, including the use of training stipends, fellowships, and awards where appropriate; and

(7) coordinate the activities conducted under this section with related activities conducted within the National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism, the National Institute of Mental Health, and other appropriate institutes and shall consult with the Directors of such Institutes.

(b) Duties

In carrying out the activities described in subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Institute—

(1) shall collect and disseminate through publications and other appropriate means, information pertaining to the research and other activities under this section;

(2) shall make grants to or enter into contracts and cooperative agreements with individuals and public and private entities to further the goals of the program;

(3) may, in accordance with section 289e of this title, and in consultation with the National Advisory Council on Drug Abuse, acquire, construct, improve, repair, operate, and maintain pharmacotherapeutic research centers, laboratories, and other necessary facilities and equipment, and such other real or personal property as the Director determines necessary, and may, in consultation with such Advisory Council, make grants for the construction or renovation of facilities to carry out the purposes of this section;

(4) may accept voluntary and uncompensated services;

(5) may accept gifts, or donations of services, money, or property, real, personal, or mixed, tangible or intangible; and

(6) shall take necessary action to ensure that all channels for the dissemination and exchange of scientific knowledge and information are maintained between the Institute and the other scientific, medical, and biomedical disciplines and organizations nationally and internationally.

(c) Report

(1) In general

Not later than December 31, 1992, and each December 31 thereafter, the Director of the Institute shall submit to the Office of National Drug Control Policy established under section 1501 1 of title 21 a report, in accordance with paragraph (3), that describes the objectives and activities of the program assisted under this section.

(2) National Drug Control Strategy

The Director of National Drug Control Policy shall incorporate, by reference or otherwise, each report submitted under this subsection in the National Drug Control Strategy submitted the following February 1 under section 1504 1 of title 21.

(d) "Pharmacotherapeutics" defined

For purposes of this section, the term "pharmacotherapeutics" means medications used to treat the symptoms and disease of drug abuse, including medications to—

(1) block the effects of abused drugs;

(2) reduce the craving for abused drugs;

(3) moderate or eliminate withdrawal symptoms;

(4) block or reverse the toxic effect of abused drugs; or

(5) prevent relapse in persons who have been detoxified from drugs of abuse.

(e) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this section, there are authorized to be appropriated $85,000,000 for fiscal year 1993, and $95,000,000 for fiscal year 1994.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464P, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §123(b), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 362; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2008(b)(10), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 211.)

References in Text

Sections 1501 and 1504 of title 21, referred to in subsec. (c), were repealed by Pub. L. 100–690, title I, §1009, Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4188, as amended.

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (b)(6). Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "Institute" for "Administration".

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

Report by Institute on Medicine

Section 701 of Pub. L. 102–321 directed Secretary of Health and Human Services to enter into a contract with a public or nonprofit private entity to conduct a study concerning (1) role of the private sector in development of anti-addiction medications, including legislative proposals designed to encourage private sector development of such medications, (2) process by which anti-addiction medications receive marketing approval from Food and Drug Administration, including an assessment of feasibility of expediting marketing approval process in a manner consistent with maintaining safety and effectiveness of such medications, (3) with respect to pharmacotherapeutic treatments for drug addiction (A) recommendations with respect to a national strategy for developing such treatments and improvements in such strategy, (B) state of the scientific knowledge concerning such treatments, and (C) assessment of progress toward development of safe, effective pharmacological treatments for drug addiction, and (4) other related information determined appropriate by the authors of the study, and to submit to Congress a report of the results of such study not later than 18 months after July 10, 1992.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285o of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

subpart 16—national institute of mental health

Subpart Referred to in Other Sections

This subpart is referred to in section 289c–1 of this title.

§285p. Purpose of Institute

(a) In general

The general purpose of the National Institute of Mental Health (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of biomedical and behavioral research, health services research, research training, and health information dissemination with respect to the cause, diagnosis, treatment, control and prevention of mental illness.

(b) Research program

The research program established under this subpart shall include support for biomedical and behavioral neuroscience and shall be designed to further the treatment and prevention of mental illness, the promotion of mental health, and the study of the psychological, social and legal factors that influence behavior.

(c) Collaboration

The Director of the Institute shall collaborate with the Administrator of the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration in focusing the services research activities of the Institute and in disseminating the results of such research to health professionals and the general public.

(d) Information with respect to suicide

(1) In general

The Director of the Institute shall—

(A) develop and publish information with respect to the causes of suicide and the means of preventing suicide; and

(B) make such information generally available to the public and to health professionals.

(2) Youth suicide

Information described in paragraph (1) shall especially relate to suicide among individuals under 24 years of age.

(e) Associate Director for Special Populations

(1) In general

The Director of the Institute shall designate an Associate Director for Special Populations.

(2) Duties

The Associate Director for Special Populations shall—

(A) develop and coordinate research policies and programs to assure increased emphasis on the mental health needs of women and minority populations;

(B) support programs of basic and applied social and behavioral research on the mental health problems of women and minority populations;

(C) study the effects of discrimination on institutions and individuals, including majority institutions and individuals;

(D) support and develop research designed to eliminate institutional discrimination; and

(E) provide increased emphasis on the concerns of women and minority populations in training programs, service delivery programs, and research endeavors of the Institute.

(f) Funding

(1) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this subpart, there are authorized to be appropriated $675,000,000 for fiscal year 1993, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1994.

(2) Allocation for health services research

Of the amounts appropriated under paragraph (1) for a fiscal year, the Director shall obligate not less than 15 percent to carry out health services research relating to mental health.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464R, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §124(a), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 364; amended Pub. L. 102–352, §2(a)(5), Aug. 26, 1992, 106 Stat. 938.)

Amendments

1992—Subsec. (f)(1). Pub. L. 102–352 struck out "other than section 285o–4 of this title" after "this subpart".

Effective Date of 1992 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–352 effective immediately upon effectuation of amendment made by Pub. L. 102–321, see section 3(1) of Pub. L. 102–352, set out as a note under section 285n of this title.

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

Required Allocations for Health Services Research

With respect to fiscal year 1993 allocations for health services research required in subsec. (f)(2) of this section, the term "15 percent" deemed to be 12 percent, see section 2016(b) of Pub. L. 103–43, set out as a note under section 285n of this title.

Study of Barriers to Insurance Coverage of Treatment for Mental Illness and Substance Abuse

Section 704 of Pub. L. 102–321 directed Secretary of Health and Human Services, acting through Director of the National Institute of Mental Health and in consultation with Administrator of Health Care Financing Administration, to conduct a study of the barriers to insurance coverage for the treatment of mental illness and substance abuse and to submit a report to Congress on the results of such study not later than Oct. 1, 1993.

§285p–1. Associate Director for Prevention

(a) In general

There shall be in the Institute an Associate Director for Prevention who shall be responsible for the full-time coordination and promotion of the programs in the Institute concerning the prevention of mental disorder. The Associate Director shall be appointed by the Director of the Institute from individuals who because of their professional training or expertise are experts in mental disorder and the prevention of such.

(b) Report

The Associate Director for Prevention shall prepare for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 284b of this title a description of the prevention activities of the Institute, including a description of the staff and resources allocated to those activities.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464S, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §124(b), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 365.)

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

§285p–2. Office of Rural Mental Health Research

(a) In general

There is established within the Institute an office to be known as the Office of Rural Mental Health Research (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Office"). The Office shall be headed by a director, who shall be appointed by the Director of such Institute from among individuals experienced or knowledgeable in the provision of mental health services in rural areas. The Secretary shall carry out the authorities established in this section acting through the Director of the Office.

(b) Coordination of activities

The Director of the Office, in consultation with the Director of the Institute and with the Director of the Office of Rural Health Policy, shall—

(1) coordinate the research activities of the Department of Health and Human Services as such activities relate to the mental health of residents of rural areas; and

(2) coordinate the activities of the Office with similar activities of public and nonprofit private entities.

(c) Research, demonstrations, evaluations, and dissemination

The Director of the Office may, with respect to the mental health of adults and children residing in rural areas—

(1) conduct research on conditions that are unique to the residents of rural areas, or more serious or prevalent in such residents;

(2) conduct research on improving the delivery of services in such areas; and

(3) disseminate information to appropriate public and nonprofit private entities.

(d) Authority regarding grants and contracts

The Director of the Office may carry out the authorities established in subsection (c) of this section directly and through grants, cooperative agreements, or contracts with public or nonprofit private entities.

(e) Report to Congress

Not later than February 1, 1993, and each fiscal year thereafter, the Director shall submit to the Subcommittee on Health and the Environment of the Committee on Energy and Commerce (of the House of Representatives), and to the Committee on Labor and Human Resources (of the Senate), a report describing the activities of the Office during the preceding fiscal year, including a summary of the activities of demonstration projects and a summary of evaluations of the projects.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464T, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §124(b), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 365.)

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

§285p–3. Office on AIDS

The Director of the Institute shall establish within the Institute an Office on AIDS. The Office shall be responsible for the coordination of research and determining the direction of the Institute with respect to AIDS research related to—

(1) primary prevention of the spread of HIV, including transmission via sexual behavior;

(2) mental health services research; and

(3) other matters determined appropriate by the Director.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464U, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §124(b), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 366.)

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

subpart 17—national institute of nursing research

§285q. Purpose of Institute

The general purpose of the National Institute of Nursing Research (in this subpart referred to as the "Institute") is the conduct and support of, and dissemination of information respecting, basic and clinical nursing research, training, and other programs in patient care research.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464V, formerly §483, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 867; renumbered §464V and amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1511(a)(1), (b)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 178, 179.)

Codification

Section was formerly classified to section 287c of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 103–43.

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43, §1511(a)(1) substituted "Institute" for "Center" in section catchline and "National Institute of Nursing Research (in this subpart referred to as the 'Institute')" for "National Center for Nursing Research (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the 'Center')" in text.

Study on Adequacy of Number of Nurses

Section 1512 of Pub. L. 103–43 directed Secretary of Health and Human Services, acting through Director of National Institute of Nursing Research, to enter into a contract with a public or nonprofit private entity to conduct a study for purpose of determining whether and to what extent there is a need for an increase in the number of nurses in hospitals and nursing homes in order to promote the quality of patient care and reduce the incidence among nurses of work-related injuries and stress and to complete such study and submit a report to Congress not later than 18 months after June 10, 1993.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285q–1 of this title.

§285q–1. Specific authorities

To carry out section 285q of this title, the Director of the Institute may provide research training and instruction and establish, in the Institute and other nonprofit institutions, research traineeships and fellowships in the study and investigation of the prevention of disease, health promotion, and the nursing care of individuals with and the families of individuals with acute and chronic illnesses. The Director of the Institute may provide individuals receiving such training and instruction or such traineeships or fellowships with such stipends and allowances (including amounts for travel and subsistence and dependency allowances) as the Director determines necessary. The Director may make grants to nonprofit institutions to provide such training and instruction and traineeships and fellowships.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464W, formerly §484, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 867; renumbered §464W and amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1511(a)(2), (b)(2), (4)(A), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 178, 179.)

Codification

Section was formerly classified to section 287c–1 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 103–43.

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43, §1511(a)(2), (b)(4)(A), substituted "section 285q" for "section 287c" and "Institute" for "Center" wherever appearing.

§285q–2. Advisory council

(a) Appointment; functions and duties; acceptance of conditional gifts; subcommittees

(1) The Secretary shall appoint an advisory council for the Institute which shall advise, assist, consult with, and make recommendations to the Secretary and the Director of the Institute on matters related to the activities carried out by and through the Institute and the policies respecting such activities.

(2) The advisory council for the Institute may recommend to the Secretary acceptance, in accordance with section 238 of this title, of conditional gifts for study, investigations, and research and for the acquisition of grounds or construction, equipping, or maintenance of facilities for the Institute.

(3) The advisory council for the Institute—

(A)(i) may make recommendations to the Director of the Institute respecting research conducted at the Institute,

(ii) may review applications for grants and cooperative agreements for research or training and recommend for approval applications for projects which show promise of making valuable contributions to human knowledge, and

(iii) may review any grant, contract, or cooperative agreement proposed to be made or entered into by the Institute;

(B) may collect, by correspondence or by personal investigation, information as to studies which are being carried on in the United States or any other country as to the diseases, disorders, or other aspects of human health with respect to which the Institute is concerned and with the approval of the Director of the Institute make available such information through appropriate publications for the benefit of public and private health entities and health professions personnel and scientists and for the information of the general public; and

(C) may appoint subcommittees and convene workshops and conferences.

(b) Membership; ex officio members; compensation

(1) The advisory council shall consist of ex officio members and not more than eighteen members appointed by the Secretary.

(2) The ex officio members of the advisory council shall consist of—

(A) the Secretary, the Director of NIH, the Director of the Institute, the chief nursing officer of the Department of Veterans Affairs, the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs, the Director of the Division of Nursing of the Health Resources and Services Administration (or the designees of such officers), and

(B) such additional officers or employees of the United States as the Secretary determines necessary for the advisory council to effectively carry out its functions.


(3) The members of the advisory council who are not ex officio members shall be appointed as follows:

(A) Two-thirds of the members shall be appointed by the Secretary from among the leading representatives of the health and scientific disciplines (including public health and the behavioral or social sciences) relevant to the activities of the Institute. Of the members appointed pursuant to this subparagraph, at least seven shall be professional nurses who are recognized experts in the area of clinical practice, education, or research.

(B) One-third of the members shall be appointed by the Secretary from the general public and shall include leaders in fields of public policy, law, health policy, economics, and management.


(4) Members of the advisory council who are officers or employees of the United States shall not receive any compensation for service on the advisory council. The other members of the advisory council shall receive, for each day (including traveltime) they are engaged in the performance of the functions of the advisory council, compensation at rates not to exceed the daily equivalent of the annual rate in effect for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule.

(c) Term of office; vacancy; reappointment

The term of office of an appointed member of the advisory council is four years, except that any member appointed to fill a vacancy for an unexpired term shall be appointed for the remainder of such term and the Secretary shall make appointments to an advisory council in such a manner as to ensure that the terms of the members do not all expire in the same year. A member may serve after the expiration of the member's term until a successor has taken office. A member who has been appointed for a term of four years may not be reappointed to an advisory council before two years from the date of expiration of such term of office. If a vacancy occurs in the advisory council among the appointed members, the Secretary shall make an appointment to fill the vacancy within 90 days from the date the vacancy occurs.

(d) Chairman; selection; term of office

The chairman of the advisory council shall be selected by the Secretary from among the appointed members, except that the Secretary may select the Director of the Institute to be the chairman of the advisory council. The term of office of the chairman shall be two years.

(e) Meetings

The advisory council shall meet at the call of the chairman or upon the request of the Director of the Institute, but at least three times each fiscal year. The location of the meetings of the advisory council is subject to the approval of the Director of the Institute.

(f) Executive secretary; staff; orientation and training for new members

The Director of the Institute shall designate a member of the staff of the Institute to serve as the executive secretary of the advisory council. The Director of the Institute shall make available to the advisory council such staff, information, and other assistance as it may require to carry out its functions. The Director of the Institute shall provide orientation and training for new members of the advisory council to provide them with such information and training as may be appropriate for their effective participation in the functions of the advisory council.

(g) Material for inclusion in biennial report; additional reports

The advisory council may prepare, for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 285q–3 of this title, (1) comments respecting the activities of the advisory council in the fiscal years respecting which the report is prepared, (2) comments on the progress of the Institute in meeting its objectives, and (3) recommendations respecting the future directions and program and policy emphasis of the Institute. The advisory council may prepare such additional reports as it may determine appropriate.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464X, formerly §485, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 867; amended Pub. L. 101–381, title I, §102(4), Aug. 18, 1990, 104 Stat. 586; Pub. L. 102–54, §13(q)(1)(E), June 13, 1991, 105 Stat. 279; renumbered §464X and amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1511(a)(3), (b)(2), (4)(B), title XX, §§2008(b)(13), 2010(b)(5), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 178, 179, 211, 214.)

Codification

Section was formerly classified to section 285c–2 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 103–43.

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–43, §1511(a)(3)(A), substituted "Institute" for "Center" wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 103–43, §2010(b)(5), which directed the substitution of "section 238" for "section 300aaa" in section 287c–2(a)(2) of this title, was executed to subsec. (a)(2) of this section to reflect the probable intent of Congress and the renumbering of this section. See Codification note above.

Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 103–43, §2008(b)(13), which directed the substitution of "Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Veterans' Administration" in section 287c–2(b)(2)(A) of this title could not be executed because the words "Veterans' Administration" do not appear in subsec. (b)(2)(A) of this section subsequent to amendment by Pub. L. 102–54 and because of the renumbering of this section. See Codification note above and 1991 Amendment note below.

Pub. L. 103–43, §§1511(a)(3)(B)(i), substituted "Institute" for "Center".

Subsec. (b)(3)(A). Pub. L. 103–43, §1511(a)(3)(B)(ii), substituted "Institute" for "Center".

Subsecs. (d) to (f). Pub. L. 103–43, §1511(a)(3)(C), substituted "Institute" for "Center" wherever appearing.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 103–43, §1511(a)(3)(C), (b)(4)(B), substituted "section 285q–3" for "section 287c–3" and "Institute" for "Center" in two places.

1991—Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 102–54 substituted "chief nursing officer of the Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Chief Nursing Officer of the Veterans' Administration".

1990—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 101–381 made technical amendment to reference to section 300aaa of this title to reflect renumbering of corresponding section of original act.

Termination of Advisory Councils

Advisory councils established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a council established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such council is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a council established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

References in Other Laws to GS–16, 17, or 18 Pay Rates

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285q–3 of this title.

§285q–3. Biennial report

The Director of the Institute after consultation with the advisory council for the Institute, shall prepare for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 283 of this title a biennial report which shall consist of a description of the activities of the Institute and program policies of the Director of the Institute in the fiscal years respecting which the report is prepared. The Director of the Institute may prepare such additional reports as the Director determines appropriate. The Director of the Institute shall provide the advisory council of the Institute an opportunity for the submission of the written comments referred to in section 285q–2(g) of this title.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §464Y, formerly §486, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 869; renumbered §485A, renumbered §464Y, and amended Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §141(a)(1), title XV, §1511(a)(4), (b)(2), (4)(C), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 136, 179.)

Codification

Section was formerly classified to section 287c–3 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 103–43.

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43, §1511(a)(4), (b)(4)(C), substituted "Institute" for "Center" wherever appearing and "section 285q–2(g)" for "section 287c–2(g)".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 285q–2 of this title.

Part D—National Library of Medicine

subpart 1—general provisions

§286. National Library of Medicine

(a) Purpose and establishment

In order to assist the advancement of medical and related sciences and to aid the dissemination and exchange of scientific and other information important to the progress of medicine and to the public health, there is established the National Library of Medicine (hereafter in this part referred to as the "Library").

(b) Functions

The Secretary, through the Library and subject to subsection (d) of this section, shall—

(1) acquire and preserve books, periodicals, prints, films, recordings, and other library materials pertinent to medicine;

(2) organize the materials specified in paragraph (1) by appropriate cataloging, indexing, and bibliographical listings;

(3) publish and disseminate the catalogs, indexes, and bibliographies referred to in paragraph (2);

(4) make available, through loans, photographic or other copying procedures, or otherwise, such materials in the Library as the Secretary determines appropriate;

(5) provide reference and research assistance;

(6) publicize the availability from the Library of the products and services described in any of paragraphs (1) through (5);

(7) promote the use of computers and telecommunications by health professionals (including health professionals in rural areas) for the purpose of improving access to biomedical information for health care delivery and medical research; and

(8) engage in such other activities as the Secretary determines appropriate and as the Library's resources permit.

(c) Exchange, destruction, or disposal of materials not needed

The Secretary may exchange, destroy, or otherwise dispose of any books, periodicals, films, and other library materials not needed for the permanent use of the Library.

(d) Availability of publications, materials, facilities, or services; prescription of rules

(1) The Secretary may, after obtaining the advice and recommendations of the Board of Regents, prescribe rules under which the Library will—

(A) provide copies of its publications or materials,

(B) will make available its facilities for research, or

(C) will make available its bibliographic, reference, or other services,


to public and private entities and individuals.

(2) Rules prescribed under paragraph (1) may provide for making available such publications, materials, facilities, or services—

(A) without charge as a public service,

(B) upon a loan, exchange, or charge basis, or

(C) in appropriate circumstances, under contract arrangements made with a public or other nonprofit entity.

(e) Regional medical libraries; establishment

Whenever the Secretary, with the advice of the Board of Regents, determines that—

(1) in any geographic area of the United States there is no regional medical library adequate to serve such area;

(2) under criteria prescribed for the administration of section 286b–6 of this title, there is a need for a regional medical library to serve such area; and

(3) because there is no medical library located in such area which, with financial assistance under section 286b–6 of this title, can feasibly be developed into a regional medical library adequate to serve such area,


the Secretary may establish, as a branch of the Library, a regional medical library to serve the needs of such area.

(f) Acceptance and administration of gifts; memorials

Section 238 of this title shall be applicable to the acceptance and administration of gifts made for the benefit of the Library or for carrying out any of its functions, and the Board of Regents shall make recommendations to the Secretary relating to establishment within the Library of suitable memorials to the donors.

(g) "Medicine" and "medical" defined

For purposes of this part, the terms "medicine" and "medical", except when used in section 286a of this title, include preventive and therapeutic medicine, dentistry, pharmacy, hospitalization, nursing, public health, and the fundamental sciences related thereto, and other related fields of study, research, or activity.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §465, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 857; amended Pub. L. 99–660, title III, §311(b)(1), Nov. 14, 1986, 100 Stat. 3779; Pub. L. 100–202, §101(h) [title II, §215], Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1329–256, 1329-275; Pub. L. 100–607, title II, §204(2), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3079; Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2620(b)(1), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4244; Pub. L. 101–381, title I, §102(2), Aug. 18, 1990, 104 Stat. 585; Pub. L. 103–43, title XIV, §1401(a), (c)(1), title XX, §2010(b)(3), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 170, 214.)

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43, §1401(c)(1), repealed amendment by Pub. L. 100–202. See 1987 Amendment note below.

Subsec. (b)(6) to (8). Pub. L. 103–43, §1401(a), added pars. (6) and (7) and redesignated former par. (6) as (8).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 103–43, §2010(b)(3), substituted "Section 238" for "Section 300aaa".

1990—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 101–381 made technical amendment to reference to section 300aaa of this title to reflect renumbering of corresponding section of original act.

1988—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 100–690 made technical amendment to reference to section 300aaa of this title to reflect renumbering of corresponding section of original act.

Pub. L. 100–607 substituted "300aaa" for "300cc".

1987Pub. L. 100–202, which directed the amendment of "Section 465(B) of 42 U.S.C. 286" by inserting "between (5) and (6) an additional charge to the Secretary to 'publicize the availability of the above products and services of the National Library of Medicine' ", was repealed by Pub. L. 103–43, §1401(c)(1).

1986—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 99–660 substituted "section 300cc of this title" for "section 300aa of this title".

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–690 effective immediately after enactment of Pub. L. 100–607, which was approved Nov. 4, 1988, see section 2600 of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as a note under section 242m of this title.

Effective Date of 1986 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–660 effective Dec. 22, 1987, see section 323 of Pub. L. 99–660, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 300aa–1 of this title.

Applicability of Certain New Authority

Section 1401(c)(2) of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "With respect to the authority established for the National Library of Medicine in section 465(b)(6) of the Public Health Service Act, as added by subsection (a) of this section [subsec. (b)(6) of this section], such authority shall be effective as if the authority had been established on December 22, 1987."

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 286c of this title.

§286a. Board of Regents

(a) Membership; ex officio members

(1)(A) The Board of Regents of the National Library of Medicine consists of ex officio members and ten members appointed by the Secretary.

(B) The ex officio members are the Surgeons General of the Public Health Service, the Army, the Navy, and the Air Force, the Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs, the Dean of the Uniformed Services University of the Health Sciences, the Assistant Director for Biological, Behavioral, and Social Sciences of the National Science Foundation, the Director of the National Agricultural Library, and the Librarian of Congress (or their designees).

(C) The appointed members shall be selected from among leaders in the various fields of the fundamental sciences, medicine, dentistry, public health, hospital administration, pharmacology, health communications technology, or scientific or medical library work, or in public affairs. At least six of the appointed members shall be selected from among leaders in the fields of medical, dental, or public health research or education.

(2) The Board shall annually elect one of the appointed members to serve as chairman until the next election. The Secretary shall designate a member of the Library staff to act as executive secretary of the Board.

(b) Recommendations on matters of policy; recommendations included in annual report; use of services of members by Secretary

The Board shall advise, consult with, and make recommendations to the Secretary on matters of policy in regard to the Library, including such matters as the acquisition of materials for the Library, the scope, content, and organization of the Library's services, and the rules under which its materials, publications, facilities, and services shall be made available to various kinds of users. The Secretary shall include in the annual report of the Secretary to the Congress a statement covering the recommendations made by the Board and the disposition thereof. The Secretary may use the services of any member of the Board in connection with matters related to the work of the Library, for such periods, in addition to conference periods, as the Secretary may determine.

(c) Term of office; vacancy; reappointment

Each appointed member of the Board shall hold office for a term of four years, except that any member appointed to fill a vacancy occurring prior to the expiration of the term for which the predecessor of such member was appointed shall be appointed for the remainder of such term. None of the appointed members shall be eligible for reappointment within one year after the end of the preceding term of such member.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §466, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 859; amended Pub. L. 102–405, title III, §302(e)(1), Oct. 9, 1992, 106 Stat. 1985; Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2008(b)(11), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 211.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (a)(1)(B). Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Veterans' Administration".

1992—Subsec. (a)(1)(B). Pub. L. 102–405 substituted "Under Secretary for Health" for "Chief Medical Director".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 286 of this title.

§286a–1. Library facilities

There are authorized to be appropriated amounts sufficient for the erection and equipment of suitable and adequate buildings and facilities for use of the Library. The Administrator of General Services may acquire, by purchase, condemnation, donation, or otherwise, a suitable site or sites, selected by the Secretary in accordance with the direction of the Board, for such buildings and facilities and to erect thereon, furnish, and equip such buildings and facilities. The amounts authorized to be appropriated by this section include the cost of preparation of drawings and specifications, supervision of construction, and other administrative expenses incident to the work. The Administrator of General Services shall prepare the plans and specifications, make all necessary contracts, and supervise construction.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §467, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 859.)

§286a–2. Authorization of appropriations

(a) For the purpose of carrying out this part, there are authorized to be appropriated $150,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 and 1996.

(b) Amounts appropriated under subsection (a) of this section and made available for grants or contracts under any of sections 286b–3 through 286b–7 of this title shall remain available until the end of the fiscal year following the fiscal year for which the amounts were appropriated.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §468, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XIV, §1402(a), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 170.)

subpart 2—financial assistance

§286b. Repealed. Pub. L. 103–43, title XIV, §1402(b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 171

Section, act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §469, as added Nov. 20, 1985, Pub. L. 99–158, §2, 99 Stat. 860; amended Nov. 4, 1988, Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §146(a), 102 Stat. 3058, authorized appropriations for grants and contracts under sections 286b–3 through 286b–7 of this title.

§286b–1. Definitions

As used in this subpart—

(1) the term "medical library" means a library related to the sciences related to health; and

(2) the term "sciences related to health" includes medicine, osteopathy, dentistry, and public health, and fundamental and applied sciences when related thereto.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §470, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 860.)

§286b–2. National Medical Libraries Assistance Advisory Board

(a) Board of Regents of National Library of Medicine to serve as

The Board of Regents of the National Library of Medicine shall also serve as the National Medical Libraries Assistance Advisory Board (hereafter in this subpart referred to as the "Board").

(b) Functions

The Board shall advise and assist the Secretary in the preparation of general regulations and with respect to policy matters arising in the administration of this subpart.

(c) Use of services of members by Secretary

The Secretary may use the services of any member of the Board, in connection with matters related to the administration of this part for such periods, in addition to conference periods, as the Secretary may determine.

(d) Compensation

Appointed members of the Board who are not otherwise in the employ of the United States, while attending conferences of the Board or otherwise serving at the request of the Secretary in connection with the administration of this subpart, shall be entitled to receive compensation, per diem in lieu of subsistence, and travel expenses in the same manner and under the same conditions as that prescribed under section 210(c) of this title when attending conferences, traveling, or serving at the request of the Secretary in connection with the Board's function under this section.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §471, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 860.)

Termination of Advisory Boards

Advisory boards established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a board established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such board is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a board established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

§286b–3. Grants for training in medical library sciences

The Secretary shall make grants—

(1) to individuals to enable them to accept traineeships and fellowships leading to postbaccalaureate academic degrees in the field of medical library science, in related fields pertaining to sciences related to health, or in the field of the communication of information;

(2) to individuals who are librarians or specialists in information on sciences relating to health, to enable them to undergo intensive training or retraining so as to attain greater competence in their occupations (including competence in the fields of automatic data processing and retrieval);

(3) to assist appropriate public and private nonprofit institutions in developing, expanding, and improving training programs in library science and the field of communications of information pertaining to sciences relating to health; and

(4) to assist in the establishment of internship programs in established medical libraries meeting standards which the Secretary shall prescribe.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §472, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 860.)

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 286a–2, 286b–8 of this title.

§286b–4. Assistance for projects in sciences related to health, for research and development in medical library science, and for development of education technologies

(a) Compilation of existing and original writings on health

The Secretary shall make grants to physicians and other practitioners in the sciences related to health, to scientists, and to public or nonprofit private institutions on behalf of such physicians, other practitioners, and scientists for the compilation of existing, or the writing of original, contributions relating to scientific, social, or cultural advancements in sciences related to health. In making such grants, the Secretary shall make appropriate arrangements under which the facilities of the Library and the facilities of libraries of public and private nonprofit institutions of higher learning may be made available in connection with the projects for which such grants are made.

(b) Medical library science and related activities

The Secretary shall make grants to appropriate public or private nonprofit institutions and enter into contracts with appropriate persons, for purposes of carrying out projects of research, investigations, and demonstrations in the field of medical library science and related activities and for the development of new techniques, systems, and equipment, for processing, storing, retrieving, and distributing information pertaining to sciences related to health.

(c) Development of education technologies

(1) The Secretary shall make grants to public or nonprofit private institutions for the purpose of carrying out projects of research on, and development and demonstration of, new education technologies.

(2) The purposes for which a grant under paragraph (1) may be made include projects concerning—

(A) computer-assisted teaching and testing of clinical competence at health professions and research institutions;

(B) the effective transfer of new information from research laboratories to appropriate clinical applications;

(C) the expansion of the laboratory and clinical uses of computer-stored research databases; and

(D) the testing of new technologies for training health care professionals.


(3) The Secretary may not make a grant under paragraph (1) unless the applicant for the grant agrees to make the projects available with respect to—

(A) assisting in the training of health professions students; and

(B) enhancing and improving the capabilities of health professionals regarding research and teaching.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §473, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 861; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XIV, §1411, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 171.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–43 added subsec. (c).

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 286a–2, 286b–8 of this title.

§286b–5. Grants for establishing, expanding, and improving basic resources of medical libraries and related instrumentalities

(a) The Secretary shall make grants of money, materials, or both, to public or private nonprofit medical libraries and related scientific communication instrumentalities for the purpose of establishing, expanding, and improving their basic medical library or related resources. A grant under this subsection may be used for—

(1) the acquisition of books, journals, photographs, motion picture and other films, and other similar materials;

(2) cataloging, binding, and other services and procedures for processing library resource materials for use by those who are served by the library or related instrumentality;

(3) the acquisition of duplication devices, facsimile equipment, film projectors, recording equipment, and other equipment to facilitate the use of the resources of the library or related instrumentality by those who are served by it; and

(4) the introduction of new technologies in medical librarianship.


(b)(1) The amount of any grant under this section to any medical library or related instrumentality shall be determined by the Secretary on the basis of the scope of library or related services provided by such library or instrumentality in relation to the population and purposes served by it. In making a determination of the scope of services served by any medical library or related instrumentality, the Secretary shall take into account—

(A) the number of graduate and undergraduate students making use of the resources of such library or instrumentality;

(B) the number of physicians and other practitioners in the sciences related to health utilizing the resources of such library or instrumentality;

(C) the type of supportive staffs, if any, available to such library or instrumentality;

(D) the type, size, and qualifications of the faculty of any school with which such library or instrumentality is affiliated;

(E) the staff of any hospital or hospitals or of any clinic or clinics with which such library or instrumentality is affiliated; and

(F) the geographic area served by such library or instrumentality and the availability within such area of medical library or related services provided by other libraries or related instrumentalities.


(2) Grants to such medical libraries or related instrumentalities under this section shall be in such amounts as the Secretary may by regulation prescribe with a view to assuring adequate continuing financial support for such libraries or instrumentalities from other sources during and after the period for which grants are provided, except that in no case shall any grant under this section to a medical library or related instrumentality for any fiscal year exceed $1,000,000.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §474, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 861; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §146(b), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3058; Pub. L. 103–43, title XIV, §1401(b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 170.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "$1,000,000" for "$750,000".

1988—Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 100–607 substituted "$750,000" for "$500,000".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 286a–2, 286b–8 of this title.

§286b–6. Grants and contracts for establishment of regional medical libraries

(a) Existing public or private nonprofit medical libraries

The Secretary, with the advice of the Board, shall make grants to and enter into contracts with existing public or private nonprofit medical libraries so as to enable each of them to serve as the regional medical library for the geographical area in which it is located.

(b) Uses for grants and contracts

The uses for which grants and contracts under this section may be employed include the—

(1) acquisition of books, journals, and other similar materials;

(2) cataloging, binding, and other procedures for processing library resource materials for use by those who are served by the library;

(3) acquisition of duplicating devices and other equipment to facilitate the use of the resources of the library by those who are served by it;

(4) acquisition of mechanisms and employment of personnel for the speedy transmission of materials from the regional library to local libraries in the geographic area served by the regional library; and

(5) planning for services and activities under this section.

(c) Conditions

(1) Grants and contracts under this section shall only be made to or entered into with medical libraries which agree—

(A) to modify and increase their library resources, and to supplement the resources of cooperating libraries in the region, so as to be able to provide adequate supportive services to all libraries in the region as well as to individual users of library services; and

(B) to provide free loan services to qualified users and make available photoduplicated or facsimile copies of biomedical materials which qualified requesters may retain.


(2) The Secretary, in awarding grants and contracts under this section, shall give priority to medical libraries having the greatest potential of fulfilling the needs for regional medical libraries. In determining the priority to be assigned to any medical library, the Secretary shall consider—

(A) the adequacy of the library (in terms of collections, personnel, equipment, and other facilities) as a basis for a regional medical library; and

(B) the size and nature of the population to be served in the region in which the library is located.

(d) Basic resources materials; limitation on grant or contract

Grants and contracts under this section for basic resource materials to a library may not exceed—

(1) 50 percent of the library's annual operating expense (exclusive of Federal financial assistance under this part) for the preceding year; or

(2) in case of the first year in which the library receives a grant under this section for basic resource materials, 50 percent of its average annual operating expenses over the past three years (or if it had been in operation for less than three years, its annual operating expenses determined by the Secretary in accordance with regulations).

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §475, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 862.)

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 286, 286a–2, 286b–8 of this title.

§286b–7. Financial support of biomedical scientific publications

(a) The Secretary, with the advice of the Board, shall make grants to, and enter into appropriate contracts with, public or private nonprofit institutions of higher education and individual scientists for the purpose of supporting biomedical scientific publications of a nonprofit nature and to procure the compilation, writing, editing, and publication of reviews, abstracts, indices, handbooks, bibliographies, and related matter pertaining to scientific works and scientific developments.

(b) Grants under subsection (a) of this section in support of any single periodical publication may not be made for more than three years, except in those cases in which the Secretary determines that further support is necessary to carry out the purposes of subsection (a) of this section.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §476, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 863.)

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 286a–2, 286b–8 of this title.

§286b–8. Grant payments, records, and audit

(a) Payments under grants made under sections 286b–3, 286b–4, 286b–5, 286b–6, and 286b–7 of this title may be made in advance or by way of reimbursement and in such installments as the Secretary shall prescribe by regulation after consultation with the Board.

(b)(1) Each recipient of a grant under this subpart shall keep such records as the Secretary shall prescribe, including records which fully disclose the amount and disposition by such recipient of the proceeds of such grant, the total cost of the project or undertaking in connection with which such grant is given or used, and the amount of that portion of the cost of the project or undertaking supplied by other sources, and such other records as will facilitate an effective audit.

(2) The Secretary and the Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives, shall have access for the purpose of audit and examination to any books, documents, papers, and records of such recipients that are pertinent to any grant received under this subpart.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §477, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 863.)

subpart 3—national center for biotechnology information

§286c. Purpose, establishment, functions, and funding of National Center for Biotechnology Information

(a) Establishment

In order to focus and expand the collection, storage, retrieval, and dissemination of the results of biotechnology research by information systems, and to support and enhance the development of new information technologies to aid in the understanding of the molecular processes that control health and disease, there is established the National Center for Biotechnology Information (hereinafter in this section referred to as the "Center") in the National Library of Medicine.

(b) Functions

The Secretary, through the Center and subject to section 286(d) of this title, shall—

(1) design, develop, implement, and manage automated systems for the collection, storage, retrieval, analysis, and dissemination of knowledge concerning human molecular biology, biochemistry, and genetics;

(2) perform research into advanced methods of computer-based information processing capable of representing and analyzing the vast number of biologically important molecules and compounds;

(3) enable persons engaged in biotechnology research and medical care to use systems developed under paragraph (1) and methods described in paragraph (2); and

(4) coordinate, as much as is practicable, efforts to gather biotechnology information on an international basis.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §478, as added Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §105, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3052; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XIV, §1402(b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 171.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–43 struck out subsec. (c) which read as follows: "For the purpose of performing the duties specified in subsection (b) of this section, there are authorized to be appropriated $8,000,000 for fiscal year 1989 and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1990. Funds appropriated under this subsection shall remain available until expended."

subpart 4—national information center on health services research and health care technology

§286d. National Information Center

(a) Establishment

There is established within the Library an entity to be known as the National Information Center on Health Services Research and Health Care Technology (in this section referred to as the "Center").

(b) Purpose

The purpose of the Center is the collection, storage, analysis, retrieval, and dissemination of information on health services research, clinical practice guidelines, and on health care technology, including the assessment of such technology. Such purpose includes developing and maintaining data bases and developing and implementing methods of carrying out such purpose.

(c) Electronic, convenient format; criteria for inclusion

The Director of the Center shall ensure that information under subsection (b) of this section concerning clinical practice guidelines is collected and maintained electronically and in a convenient format. Such Director shall develop and publish criteria for the inclusion of practice guidelines and technology assessments in the information center database.

[See main edition for text of (a) to (c)]

(d) Coordination with Director of the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality

The Secretary, acting through the Center, shall coordinate the activities carried out under this section through the Center with related activities of the Director of the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §478A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XIV, §1421, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 171; amended Pub. L. 106–129, §2(b)(2), Dec. 6, 1999, 113 Stat. 1670.)

Amendments

1999—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 106–129 substituted "Director of the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality" for "Administrator for Health Care Policy and Research".

Construction

Section 1422(b) of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "The amendments made by section 3 of Public Law 102–410 (106 Stat. 2094) [amending section 299a–1 of this title], by section 1421 of this Act [enacting this section], and by subsection (a) of this section [amending section 299a–1 of this title] may not be construed as terminating the information center on health care technologies and health care technology assessment established under section 904 of the Public Health Service Act [section 299a–2 of this title], as in effect on the day before the date of the enactment of Public Law 102–410 [Oct. 13, 1992]. Such center shall be considered to be the center established in section 478A of the Public Health Service Act, as added by section 1421 of this Act [this section], and shall be subject to the provisions of such section 478A."

Part E—Other Agencies of NIH

subpart 1—national center for research resources

§287. General purpose

The general purpose of the National Center for Research Resources (in this subpart referred to as the "Center") is to strengthen and enhance the research environments of entities engaged in health-related research by developing and supporting essential research resources.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §479, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 864; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1501(2)(B), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 172.)

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "the National Center for Research Resources (in this subpart referred to as the 'Center')" for "the Division of Research Resources".

§287a. Advisory council

(a) Appointment; functions and duties; acceptance of conditional gifts; subcommittees

(1) The Secretary shall appoint an advisory council for the Center which shall advise, assist, consult with, and make recommendations to the Secretary and the Director of the Center on matters related to the activities carried out by and through the Center and the policies respecting such activities.

(2) The advisory council for the Center may recommend to the Secretary acceptance, in accordance with section 238 of this title, of conditional gifts for study, investigations, and research and for the acquisition of grounds or construction, equipping, or maintenance of facilities for the Center.

(3) The advisory council for the Center—

(A)(i) may make recommendations to the Director of the Center respecting research conducted at the Center,

(ii) may review applications for grants and cooperative agreements for research or training and recommend for approval applications for projects which show promise of making valuable contributions to human knowledge, and

(iii) may review any grant, contract, or cooperative agreement proposed to be made or entered into by the Center;

(B) may collect, by correspondence or by personal investigation, information as to studies which are being carried on in the United States or any other country as to the diseases, disorders, or other aspects of human health with respect to which the Center is concerned and with the approval of the Director of the Center make available such information through appropriate publications for the benefit of public and private health entities and health professions personnel and scientists and for the information of the general public; and

(C) may appoint subcommittees and convene workshops and conferences.

(b) Membership; ex officio members; compensation

(1) The advisory council shall consist of ex officio members and not more than eighteen members appointed by the Secretary.

(2) The ex officio members of the advisory council shall consist of—

(A) the Secretary, the Director of NIH, the Director of the Center, the Under Secretary for Health of the Department of Veterans Affairs, and the Assistant Secretary of Defense for Health Affairs (or the designees of such officers), and

(B) such additional officers or employees of the United States as the Secretary determines necessary for the advisory council to effectively carry out its functions.


(3) The members of the advisory council who are not ex officio members shall be appointed as follows:

(A) Two-thirds of the members shall be appointed by the Secretary from among the leading representatives of the health and scientific disciplines (including public health and the behavioral or social sciences) relevant to the activities of the Center.

(B) One-third of the members shall be appointed by the Secretary from the general public and shall include leaders in fields of public policy, law, health policy, economics, and management.


(4) Members of the advisory council who are officers or employees of the United States shall not receive any compensation for service on the advisory council. The other members of the advisory council shall receive, for each day (including traveltime) they are engaged in the performance of the functions of the advisory council, compensation at rates not to exceed the daily equivalent of the annual rate in effect for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule.

(c) Term of office; vacancy; reappointment

The term of office of an appointed member of the advisory council is four years, except that any member appointed to fill a vacancy for an unexpired term shall be appointed for the remainder of such term and the Secretary shall make appointments to an advisory council in such a manner as to ensure that the terms of the members do not all expire in the same year. A member may serve after the expiration of the member's term until a successor has taken office. A member who has been appointed for a term of four years may not be reappointed to an advisory council before two years from the date of expiration of such term of office. If a vacancy occurs in the advisory council among the appointed members, the Secretary shall make an appointment to fill the vacancy within 90 days from the date the vacancy occurs.

(d) Chairman; selection; term of office

The chairman of the advisory council shall be selected by the Secretary from among the appointed members, except that the Secretary may select the Director of the Center to be the chairman of the advisory council. The term of office of the chairman shall be two years.

(e) Meetings

The advisory council shall meet at the call of the chairman or upon the request of the Director of the Center, but at least three times each fiscal year. The location of the meetings of the advisory council is subject to the approval of the Director of the Center.

(f) Executive secretary; staff; orientation and training for new members

The Director of the Center shall designate a member of the staff of the Center to serve as the executive secretary of the advisory council. The Director of the Center shall make available to the advisory council such staff, information, and other assistance as it may require to carry out its functions. The Director of the Center shall provide orientation and training for new members of the advisory council to provide them with such information and training as may be appropriate for their effective participation in the functions of the advisory council.

(g) Material for inclusion in biennial report; additional reports

The advisory council may prepare, for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 287a–1 of this title, (1) comments respecting the activities of the advisory council in the fiscal years respecting which the report is prepared, (2) comments on the progress of the Center in meeting its objectives, and (3) recommendations respecting the future directions and program and policy emphasis of the Center. The advisory council may prepare such additional reports as it may determine appropriate.

(h) Advisory council in existence on November 20, 1985

This section does not terminate the membership of the advisory council for the Center which was in existence on November 20, 1985. After November 20, 1985—

(1) the Secretary shall make appointments to such advisory council in such a manner as to bring about as soon as practicable the composition for such council prescribed by this section;

(2) the advisory council shall organize itself in accordance with this section and exercise the functions prescribed by this section; and

(3) the Director of the Center shall perform for such advisory council the functions prescribed by this section.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §480, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 864; amended Pub. L. 101–381, title I, §102(3), Aug. 18, 1990, 104 Stat. 586; Pub. L. 102–405, title III, §302(e)(1), Oct. 9, 1992, 106 Stat. 1985; Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1501(2)(C), (D), title XX, §§2008(b)(12), 2010(b)(4), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 172, 173, 211, 214.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 103–43, §1501(2)(C), (D), substituted "the Center" for "the Division of Research Resources" after "advisory council for" and substituted "the Center" for "the Division" in two places.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 103–43, §§1501(2)(C), (D), 2010(b)(4), substituted "the Center" for "the Division of Research Resources" after "advisory council for", "section 238" for "section 300aaa", and "the Center" for "the Division".

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 103–43, §1501(2)(D), substituted "the Center" for "the Division" wherever appearing.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–43, §§1501(2)(C), (D), 2008(b)(12), in par. (2)(A) substituted "the Center" for "the Division of Research Resources" and "Department of Veterans Affairs" for "Veterans' Administration" and in par. (3)(A) substituted "the Center" for "the Division".

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 103–43, §1501(2)(C), substituted "the Center" for "the Division of Research Resources".

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 103–43, §1501(2)(C), (D), substituted "the Center" for "the Division of Research Resources" and "the Center" for "the Division".

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 103–43, §1501(2)(C), (D), substituted "the Center" for "the Division of Research Resources" and "the Center" for "the Division" in three places.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 103–43, §1501(2)(C), (D), substituted "the Center" for "the Division of Research Resources" and "the Center" for "the Division".

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 103–43, §1501(2)(C), substituted "the Center" for "the Division of Research Resources" in introductory provisions and in par. (3).

1992—Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 102–405 substituted "Under Secretary for Health" for "Chief Medical Director".

1990—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 101–381 made technical amendment to reference to section 300aaa of this title to reflect renumbering of corresponding section of original act.

Termination of Advisory Councils

Advisory councils established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a council established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such council is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a council established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

References in Other Laws to GS–16, 17, or 18 Pay Rates

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 287a–1, 287a–2 of this title.

§287a–1. Biennial report

The Director of the Center, after consultation with the advisory council for the Center, shall prepare for inclusion in the biennial report made under section 283 of this title a biennial report which shall consist of a description of the activities of the Center and program policies of the Director of the Center in the fiscal years respecting which the report is prepared. The Director of the Center may prepare such additional reports as the Director determines appropriate. The Director of the Center shall provide the advisory council of the Center an opportunity for the submission of the written comments referred to in section 287a(g) of this title.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §481, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 866; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1501(2)(C), (D), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 172, 173.)

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "the Center" for "the Division of Research Resources" and "the Center" for "the Division" wherever appearing.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 287a of this title.

§287a–2. Biomedical and behavioral research facilities

(a) Modernization and construction of facilities

(1) In general

The Director of NIH, acting through the Director of the Center, may make grants to public and nonprofit private entities to expand, remodel, renovate, or alter existing research facilities or construct new research facilities, subject to the provisions of this section.

(2) Construction and cost of construction

For purposes of this section, the terms "construction" and "cost of construction" include the construction of new buildings and the expansion, renovation, remodeling, and alteration of existing buildings, including architects' fees, but do not include the cost of acquisition of land or off-site improvements.

(b) Scientific and technical review boards for merit-based review of proposals

(1) In general; approval as precondition to grants

(A) There is established within the Center a Scientific and Technical Review Board on Biomedical and Behavioral Research Facilities (referred to in this section as the "Board").

(B) The Director of the Center may approve an application for a grant under subsection (a) of this section only if the Board has under paragraph (2) recommended the application for approval.

(2) Duties

(A) The Board shall provide advice to the Director of the Center and the advisory council established under section 287a of this title (in this section referred to as the "Advisory Council") on carrying out this section.

(B) In carrying out subparagraph (A), the Board shall make a determination of the merit of each application submitted for a grant under subsection (a) of this section, after consideration of the requirements established in subsection (c) of this section, and shall report the results of the determination to the Director of the Center and the Advisory Council. Such determinations shall be conducted in a manner consistent with procedures established under section 289a of this title.

(C) In carrying out subparagraph (A), the Board shall, in the case of applications recommended for approval, make recommendations to the Director and the Advisory Council on the amount that should be provided in the grant.

(D) In carrying out subparagraph (A), the Board shall prepare an annual report for the Director of the Center and the Advisory Council describing the activities of the Board in the fiscal year for which the report is made. Each such report shall be available to the public, and shall—

(i) summarize and analyze expenditures made under this section;

(ii) provide a summary of the types, numbers, and amounts of applications that were recommended for grants under subsection (a) of this section but that were not approved by the Director of the Center; and

(iii) contain the recommendations of the Board for any changes in the administration of this section.

(3) Membership

(A) Subject to subparagraph (B), the Board shall be composed of 9 appointed members, and such ex officio members as the Director of the Center determines to be appropriate.

(B) Not more than 3 individuals who are officers or employees of the Federal Government may serve as members of the Board.

(4) Certain requirements regarding membership

In selecting individuals for membership on the Board, the Director of the Center shall ensure that the members are individuals who, by virtue of their training or experience, are eminently qualified to perform peer review functions. In selecting such individuals for such membership, the Director of the Center shall ensure that the members of the Board collectively—

(A) are experienced in the planning, construction, financing, and administration of entities that conduct biomedical or behavioral research sciences;

(B) are knowledgeable in making determinations of the need of entities for biomedical or behavioral research facilities, including such facilities for the dentistry, nursing, pharmacy, and allied health professions;

(C) are knowledgeable in evaluating the relative priorities for applications for grants under subsection (a) of this section in view of the overall research needs of the United States; and

(D) are experienced with emerging centers of excellence, as described in subsection (c)(3) of this section.

(5) Certain authorities

(A) In carrying out paragraph (2), the Board may convene workshops and conferences, and collect data as the Board considers appropriate.

(B) In carrying out paragraph (2), the Board may establish subcommittees within the Board. Such subcommittees may hold meetings as determined necessary to enable the subcommittee to carry out its duties.

(6) Terms

(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), each appointed member of the Board shall hold office for a term of 4 years. Any member appointed to fill a vacancy occurring prior to the expiration of the term for which such member's predecessor was appointed shall be appointed for the remainder of the term of the predecessor.

(B) Of the initial members appointed to the Board (as specified by the Director of the Center when making the appointments)—

(i) 3 shall hold office for a term of 3 years;

(ii) 3 shall hold office for a term of 2 years; and

(iii) 3 shall hold office for a term of 1 year.


(C) No member is eligible for reappointment to the Board until 1 year has elapsed after the end of the most recent term of the member.

(7) Compensation

Members of the Board who are not officers or employees of the United States shall receive for each day the members are engaged in the performance of the functions of the Board compensation at the same rate received by members of other national advisory councils established under this subchapter.

(c) Requirements for grants

(1) In general

The Director of the Center may make a grant under subsection (a) of this section only if the applicant for the grant meets the following conditions:

(A) The applicant is determined by such Director to be competent to engage in the type of research for which the proposed facility is to be constructed.

(B) The applicant provides assurances satisfactory to the Director that—

(i) for not less than 20 years after completion of the construction, the facility will be used for the purposes of research for which it is to be constructed;

(ii) sufficient funds will be available to meet the non-Federal share of the cost of constructing the facility;

(iii) sufficient funds will be available, when construction is completed, for the effective use of the facility for the research for which it is being constructed; and

(iv) the proposed construction will expand the applicant's capacity for research, or is necessary to improve or maintain the quality of the applicant's research.


(C) The applicant meets reasonable qualifications established by the Director with respect to—

(i) the relative scientific and technical merit of the applications, and the relative effectiveness of the proposed facilities, in expanding the capacity for biomedical or behavioral research and in improving the quality of such research;

(ii) the quality of the research or training, or both, to be carried out in the facilities involved;

(iii) the need of the applicant for such facilities in order to maintain or expand the applicant's research and training mission;

(iv) the congruence of the research activities to be carried out within the facility with the research and investigator manpower needs of the United States; and

(v) the age and condition of existing research facilities and equipment.


(D) The applicant has demonstrated a commitment to enhancing and expanding the research productivity of the applicant.

(2) Consideration of certain factors

In making grants under subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Center may, in addition to the requirements established in paragraph (1), consider the following factors:

(A) To what extent the applicant has the capacity to broaden the scope of research and research training programs of the applicant by promoting—

(i) interdisciplinary research;

(ii) research on emerging technologies, including those involving novel analytical techniques or computational methods; or

(iii) other novel research mechanisms or programs.


(B) To what extent the applicant has broadened the scope of research and research training programs of qualified institutions by promoting genomic research with an emphasis on interdisciplinary research, including research related to pediatric investigations.

(3) Institutions of emerging excellence

Of the amounts appropriated under subsection (h) of this section for a fiscal year, the Director of the Center shall make available 25 percent for grants under subsection (a) of this section to applicants that, in addition to meeting the requirements established in paragraph (1), have demonstrated emerging excellence in biomedical or behavioral research, as follows:

(A) The applicant has a plan for research or training advancement and possesses the ability to carry out the plan.

(B) The applicant carries out research and research training programs that have a special relevance to a problem, concern, or unmet health need of the United States.

(C) The applicant has been productive in research or research development and training.

(D) The applicant—

(i) has been designated as a center of excellence under part B of subchapter V of this chapter;

(ii) is located in a geographic area whose population includes a significant number of individuals with a health-status deficit, and the applicant provides health services to such individuals; or

(iii) is located in a geographic area in which a deficit in health care technology, services, or research resources may adversely affect health status of the population of the area in the future, and the applicant is carrying out activities with respect to protecting the health status of such population.

(d) Requirement of application

The Director of the Center may make a grant under subsection (a) of this section only if an application for the grant is submitted to the Director and the application is in such form, is made in such manner, and contains such agreements, assurances, and information as the Director determines to be necessary to carry out this section.

(e) Amount of grant; payments

(1) Amount

The amount of any grant awarded under subsection (a) of this section shall be determined by the Director of the Center, except that such amount shall not exceed—

(A) 50 percent of the necessary cost of the construction of a proposed facility as determined by the Director; or

(B) in the case of a multipurpose facility, 40 percent of that part of the necessary cost of construction that the Director determines to be proportionate to the contemplated use of the facility.

(2) Reservation of amounts

On approval of any application for a grant under subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Center shall reserve, from any appropriation available therefore, the amount of such grant, and shall pay such amount, in advance or by way of reimbursement, and in such installments consistent with the construction progress, as the Director may determine appropriate. The reservation of the Director of any amount by the Director under this paragraph may be amended by the Director, either on the approval of an amendment of the application or on the revision of the estimated cost of construction of the facility.

(3) Exclusion of certain costs

In determining the amount of any grant under this subsection (a) of this section, there shall be excluded from the cost of construction an amount equal to the sum of—

(A) the amount of any other Federal grant that the applicant has obtained, or is assured of obtaining, with respect to construction that is to be financed in part by a grant authorized under this section; and

(B) the amount of any non-Federal funds required to be expended as a condition of such other Federal grant.

(4) Waiver of limitations

The limitations imposed by paragraph (1) may be waived at the discretion of the Director for applicants meeting the conditions described in paragraphs (1) and (2) of subsection (c) of this section.

(f) Recapture of payments

If, not later than 20 years after the completion of construction for which a grant has been awarded under subsection (a) of this section—

(1) the applicant or other owner of the facility shall cease to be a public or nonprofit private entity; or

(2) the facility shall cease to be used for the research purposes for which it was constructed (unless the Director determines, in accordance with regulations, that there is good cause for releasing the applicant or other owner from obligation to do so);


the United States shall be entitled to recover from the applicant or other owner of the facility the amount bearing the same ratio to the current value (as determined by an agreement between the parties or by action brought in the United States District Court for the district in which such facility is situated) of the facility as the amount of the Federal participation bore to the cost of the construction of such facility.

(g) Guidelines

Not later than 6 months after June 10, 1993, the Director of the Center, after consultation with the Advisory Council, shall issue guidelines with respect to grants under subsection (a) of this section.

(h) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this section, there are authorized to be appropriated $150,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 and 1996.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §481A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1502, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 173; amended Pub. L. 105–392, title I, §101(c), Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3537.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (c)(3)(D)(i). Pub. L. 105–392 substituted "part B of subchapter V of this chapter" for "section 293c of this title".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 287a–3 of this title.

§287a–3. Construction of regional centers for research on primates

(a) With respect to activities carried out by the National Center for Research Resources to support regional centers for research on primates, the Director of NIH may, for each of the fiscal years 1994 through 1996, reserve from the amounts appropriated under section 287a–2(h) of this title up to $2,500,000 for the purpose of making awards of grants and contracts to public or nonprofit private entities to construct, renovate, or otherwise improve such regional centers. The reservation of such amounts for any fiscal year is subject to the availability of qualified applicants for such awards.

(b) The Director of NIH may not make a grant or enter into a contract under subsection (a) of this section unless the applicant for such assistance agrees, with respect to the costs to be incurred by the applicant in carrying out the purpose described in such subsection, to make available (directly or through donations from public or private entities) non-Federal contributions in cash toward such costs in an amount equal to not less than $1 for each $4 of Federal funds provided in such assistance.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §481B, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1503, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 178; amended Pub. L. 105–392, title IV, §411, Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3590.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 105–392, in first sentence, substituted "may" for "shall" and "up to $2,500,000" for "$5,000,000".

subpart 2—john e. fogarty international center for advanced study in health sciences

§287b. General purpose

The general purpose of the John E. Fogarty International Center for Advanced Study in the Health Sciences is to—

(1) facilitate the assembly of scientists and others in the biomedical, behavioral, and related fields for discussion, study, and research relating to the development of health science internationally;

(2) provide research programs, conferences, and seminars to further international cooperation and collaboration in the life sciences;

(3) provide postdoctorate fellowships for research training in the United States and abroad and promote exchanges of senior scientists between the United States and other countries;

(4) coordinate the activities of the National Institutes of Health concerned with the health sciences internationally; and

(5) receive foreign visitors to the National Institutes of Health.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §482, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 866.)

subpart 3—national center for human genome research

§287c. Purpose of Center

(a) General purpose

The general purpose of the National Center for Human Genome Research (in this subpart referred to as the "Center") is to characterize the structure and function of the human genome, including the mapping and sequencing of individual genes. Such purpose includes—

(1) planning and coordinating the research goal of the genome project;

(2) reviewing and funding research proposals;

(3) developing training programs;

(4) coordinating international genome research;

(5) communicating advances in genome science to the public; and

(6) reviewing and funding proposals to address the ethical and legal issues associated with the genome project (including legal issues regarding patents).

(b) Research training

The Director of the Center may conduct and support research training—

(1) for which fellowship support is not provided under section 288 of this title; and

(2) that is not residency training of physicians or other health professionals.

(c) Amount available for ethical and legal issues

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), of the amounts appropriated to carry out subsection (a) of this section for a fiscal year, the Director of the Center shall make available not less than 5 percent for carrying out paragraph (6) of such subsection.

(2) With respect to providing funds under subsection (a)(6) of this section for proposals to address the ethical issues associated with the genome project, paragraph (1) shall not apply for a fiscal year if the Director of the Center certifies to the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives, and to the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate, that the Director has determined that an insufficient number of such proposals meet the applicable requirements of sections 289 and 289a of this title.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §485B, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1521(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 180.)

Prior Provisions

A prior section 287c, act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §483, as added Nov. 20, 1985, Pub. L. 99–158, §2, 99 Stat. 867, and amended, which related to purpose of National Center for Nursing Research, was renumbered section 464V of act July 1, 1944, by Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1511(b)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 179, and transferred to section 285q of this title.

A prior section 287c–1, act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §484, as added Nov. 20, 1985, Pub. L. 99–158, §2, 99 Stat. 867, and amended, which related to specific authorities of the Director of the Center, was renumbered section 464W of act July 1, 1944, by Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1511(b)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 179, and transferred to section 285q–1 of this title.

A prior section 287c–2, act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §485, as added Nov. 20, 1985, Pub. L. 99–158, §2, 99 Stat. 867, and amended, which related to the advisory council for the Center, was renumbered section 464X of act July 1, 1944, by Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1511(b)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 179, and transferred to section 285q–2 of this title.

A prior section 287c–3, act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §486, as added Nov. 20, 1985, Pub. L. 99–158, §2, 99 Stat. 869, and amended, which related to biennial report of activities of the Center, was renumbered section 464Y of act July 1, 1944, by Pub. L. 103–43, title XV, §1511(b)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 179, and transferred to section 285q–3 of this title.

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

subpart 4—office of dietary supplements

§287c–11. Dietary supplements

(a) Establishment

The Secretary shall establish an Office of Dietary Supplements within the National Institutes of Health.

(b) Purpose

The purposes of the Office are—

(1) to explore more fully the potential role of dietary supplements as a significant part of the efforts of the United States to improve health care; and

(2) to promote scientific study of the benefits of dietary supplements in maintaining health and preventing chronic disease and other health-related conditions.

(c) Duties

The Director of the Office of Dietary Supplements shall—

(1) conduct and coordinate scientific research within the National Institutes of Health relating to dietary supplements and the extent to which the use of dietary supplements can limit or reduce the risk of diseases such as heart disease, cancer, birth defects, osteoporosis, cataracts, or prostatism;

(2) collect and compile the results of scientific research relating to dietary supplements, including scientific data from foreign sources or the Office of Alternative Medicine;

(3) serve as the principal advisor to the Secretary and to the Assistant Secretary for Health and provide advice to the Director of the National Institutes of Health, the Director of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and the Commissioner of Food and Drugs on issues relating to dietary supplements including—

(A) dietary intake regulations;

(B) the safety of dietary supplements;

(C) claims characterizing the relationship between—

(i) dietary supplements; and

(ii)(I) prevention of disease or other health-related conditions; and

(II) maintenance of health; and


(D) scientific issues arising in connection with the labeling and composition of dietary supplements;


(4) compile a database of scientific research on dietary supplements and individual nutrients; and

(5) coordinate funding relating to dietary supplements for the National Institutes of Health.

(d) "Dietary supplement" defined

As used in this section, the term "dietary supplement" has the meaning given the term in section 321(ff) of title 21.

(e) Authorization of appropriations

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section $5,000,000 for fiscal year 1994 and such sums as may be necessary for each subsequent fiscal year.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §485C, as added Pub. L. 103–417, §13(a), Oct. 25, 1994, 108 Stat. 4334.)

subpart 5—national center for complementary and alternative medicine

§287c–21. Purpose of Center

(a) In general

The general purposes of the National Center for Complementary and Alternative Medicine (in this subpart referred to as the "Center") are the conduct and support of basic and applied research (including both intramural and extramural research), research training, the dissemination of health information, and other programs with respect to identifying, investigating, and validating complementary and alternative treatment, diagnostic and prevention modalities, disciplines and systems. The Center shall be headed by a director, who shall be appointed by the Secretary. The Director of the Center shall report directly to the Director of NIH.

(b) Advisory council

The Secretary shall establish an advisory council for the Center in accordance with section 284a of this title, except that at least half of the members of the advisory council who are not ex officio members shall include practitioners licensed in one or more of the major systems with which the Center is concerned, and at least 3 individuals representing the interests of individual consumers of complementary and alternative medicine.

(c) Complement to conventional medicine

In carrying out subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Center shall, as appropriate, study the integration of alternative treatment, diagnostic and prevention systems, modalities, and disciplines with the practice of conventional medicine as a complement to such medicine and into health care delivery systems in the United States.

(d) Appropriate scientific expertise and coordination with institutes and Federal agencies

The Director of the Center, after consultation with the advisory council for the Center and the division of research grants, shall ensure that scientists with appropriate expertise in research on complementary and alternative medicine are incorporated into the review, oversight, and management processes of all research projects and other activities funded by the Center. In carrying out this subsection, the Director of the Center, as necessary, may establish review groups with appropriate scientific expertise. The Director of the Center shall coordinate efforts with other Institutes and Federal agencies to ensure appropriate scientific input and management.

(e) Evaluation of various disciplines and systems

In carrying out subsection (a) of this section, the Director of the Center shall identify and evaluate alternative and complementary medical treatment, diagnostic and prevention modalities in each of the disciplines and systems with which the Center is concerned, including each discipline and system in which accreditation, national certification, or a State license is available.

(f) Ensuring high quality, rigorous scientific review

In order to ensure high quality, rigorous scientific review of complementary and alternative, diagnostic and prevention modalities, disciplines and systems, the Director of the Center shall conduct or support the following activities:

(1) Outcomes research and investigations.

(2) Epidemiological studies.

(3) Health services research.

(4) Basic science research.

(5) Clinical trials.

(6) Other appropriate research and investigational activities.


The Director of NIH, in coordination with the Director of the Center, shall designate specific personnel in each Institute to serve as full-time liaisons with the Center in facilitating appropriate coordination and scientific input.

(g) Data system; information clearinghouse

(1) Data system

The Director of the Center shall establish a bibliographic system for the collection, storage, and retrieval of worldwide research relating to complementary and alternative treatment, diagnostic and prevention modalities, disciplines and systems. Such a system shall be regularly updated and publicly accessible.

(2) Clearinghouse

The Director of the Center shall establish an information clearinghouse to facilitate and enhance, through the effective dissemination of information, knowledge and understanding of alternative medical treatment, diagnostic and prevention practices by health professionals, patients, industry, and the public.

(h) Research centers

The Director of the Center, after consultation with the advisory council for the Center, shall provide support for the development and operation of multipurpose centers to conduct research and other activities described in subsection (a) of this section with respect to complementary and alternative treatment, diagnostic and prevention modalities, disciplines and systems. The provision of support for the development and operation of such centers shall include accredited complementary and alternative medicine research and education facilities.

(i) Availability of resources

After consultation with the Director of the Center, the Director of NIH shall ensure that resources of the National Institutes of Health, including laboratory and clinical facilities, fellowships (including research training fellowship and junior and senior clinical fellowships), and other resources are sufficiently available to enable the Center to appropriately and effectively carry out its duties as described in subsection (a) of this section. The Director of NIH, in coordination with the Director of the Center, shall designate specific personnel in each Institute to serve as full-time liaisons with the Center in facilitating appropriate coordination and scientific input.

(j) Availability of appropriations

Amounts appropriated to carry out this section for fiscal year 1999 are available for obligation through September 30, 2001. Amounts appropriated to carry out this section for fiscal year 2000 are available for obligation through September 30, 2001.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §485D, as added Pub. L. 105–277, div. A, §101(f) [title VI, §601(2)], Oct. 21, 1998, 112 Stat. 2681–337, 2681-387.)

Termination of Advisory Councils

Advisory councils established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a council established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such council is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a council established by Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

Ex. Ord. No. 13147. White House Commission on Complementary and Alternative Medicine Policy

Ex. Ord. No. 13147, Mar. 7, 2000, 65 F.R. 13233, provided:

By the authority vested in me as President by the Constitution and the laws of the United States of America, including the Federal Advisory Committee Act, as amended (5 U.S.C. App.), and in order to establish the White House Commission on Complementary and Alternative Medicine Policy, it is hereby ordered as follows:

Section 1. Establishment. There is established in the Department of Health and Human Services (Department) the White House Commission on Complementary and Alternative Medicine Policy (Commission). The Commission shall be composed of not more than 15 members appointed by the President from knowledgeable representatives in health care practice and complementary and alternative medicine. The President shall designate a Chair from among the members of the Commission. The Secretary of Health and Human Services (Secretary) shall appoint an Executive Director for the Commission.

Sec. 2. Functions. The Commission shall provide a report, through the Secretary, to the President on legislative and administrative recommendations for assuring that public policy maximizes the benefits to Americans of complementary and alternative medicine. The recommendations shall address the following:

(a) the education and training of health care practitioners in complementary and alternative medicine;

(b) coordinated research to increase knowledge about complementary and alternative medicine practices and products;

(c) the provision to health care professionals of reliable and useful information about complementary and alternative medicine that can be made readily accessible and understandable to the general public; and

(d) guidance for appropriate access to and delivery of complementary and alternative medicine.

Sec. 3. Administration. (a) To the extent permitted by law, the heads of executive departments and agencies shall provide the Commission, upon request, with such information and assistance as it may require for the purpose of carrying out its functions.

(b) Each member of the Commission shall receive compensation at a rate equal to the daily equivalent of the annual rate specified for Level IV of the Executive Schedule (5 U.S.C. 5315) for each day during which the member is engaged in the performance of the duties of the Commission. While away from their homes or regular places of business in the performance of the duties of the Commission, members shall be allowed travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, as authorized by law for persons serving intermittently in Government service (5 U.S.C. 5701–5707).

(c) The Department shall provide the Commission with funding and with administrative services, facilities, staff, and other support services necessary for the performance of the Commission's functions.

(d) In accordance with guidelines issued by the Administrator of General Services, the Secretary shall perform the functions of the President under the Federal Advisory Committee Act, as amended (5 U.S.C. App.), with respect to the Commission, except that of reporting to the Congress.

(e) The Commission shall terminate 2 years from the date of this order unless extended by the President prior to such date.

William J. Clinton.      

Part F—Research on Women's Health

§287d. Office of Research on Women's Health

(a) Establishment

There is established within the Office of the Director of NIH an office to be known as the Office of Research on Women's Health (in this part referred to as the "Office"). The Office shall be headed by a director, who shall be appointed by the Director of NIH.

(b) Purpose

The Director of the Office shall—

(1) identify projects of research on women's health that should be conducted or supported by the national research institutes;

(2) identify multidisciplinary research relating to research on women's health that should be so conducted or supported;

(3) carry out paragraphs (1) and (2) with respect to the aging process in women, with priority given to menopause;

(4) promote coordination and collaboration among entities conducting research identified under any of paragraphs (1) through (3);

(5) encourage the conduct of such research by entities receiving funds from the national research institutes;

(6) recommend an agenda for conducting and supporting such research;

(7) promote the sufficient allocation of the resources of the national research institutes for conducting and supporting such research;

(8) assist in the administration of section 289a–2 of this title with respect to the inclusion of women as subjects in clinical research; and

(9) prepare the report required in section 287d–2 of this title.

(c) Coordinating Committee

(1) In carrying out subsection (b) of this section, the Director of the Office shall establish a committee to be known as the Coordinating Committee on Research on Women's Health (in this subsection referred to as the "Coordinating Committee").

(2) The Coordinating Committee shall be composed of the Directors of the national research institutes (or the designees of the Directors).

(3) The Director of the Office shall serve as the chair of the Coordinating Committee.

(4) With respect to research on women's health, the Coordinating Committee shall assist the Director of the Office in—

(A) identifying the need for such research, and making an estimate each fiscal year of the funds needed to adequately support the research;

(B) identifying needs regarding the coordination of research activities, including intramural and extramural multidisciplinary activities;

(C) supporting the development of methodologies to determine the circumstances in which obtaining data specific to women (including data relating to the age of women and the membership of women in ethnic or racial groups) is an appropriate function of clinical trials of treatments and therapies;

(D) supporting the development and expansion of clinical trials of treatments and therapies for which obtaining such data has been determined to be an appropriate function; and

(E) encouraging the national research institutes to conduct and support such research, including such clinical trials.

(d) Advisory Committee

(1) In carrying out subsection (b) of this section, the Director of the Office shall establish an advisory committee to be known as the Advisory Committee on Research on Women's Health (in this subsection referred to as the "Advisory Committee").

(2) The Advisory Committee shall be composed of no fewer than 12, and not more than 18 individuals, who are not officers or employees of the Federal Government. The Director of NIH shall make appointments to the Advisory Committee from among physicians, practitioners, scientists, and other health professionals, whose clinical practice, research specialization, or professional expertise includes a significant focus on research on women's health. A majority of the members of the Advisory Committee shall be women.

(3) The Director of the Office shall serve as the chair of the Advisory Committee.

(4) The Advisory Committee shall—

(A) advise the Director of the Office on appropriate research activities to be undertaken by the national research institutes with respect to—

(i) research on women's health;

(ii) research on gender differences in clinical drug trials, including responses to pharmacological drugs;

(iii) research on gender differences in disease etiology, course, and treatment;

(iv) research on obstetrical and gynecological health conditions, diseases, and treatments; and

(v) research on women's health conditions which require a multidisciplinary approach;


(B) report to the Director of the Office on such research;

(C) provide recommendations to such Director regarding activities of the Office (including recommendations on the development of the methodologies described in subsection (c)(4)(C) of this section and recommendations on priorities in carrying out research described in subparagraph (A)); and

(D) assist in monitoring compliance with section 289a–2 of this title regarding the inclusion of women in clinical research.


(5)(A) The Advisory Committee shall prepare a biennial report describing the activities of the Committee, including findings made by the Committee regarding—

(i) compliance with section 289a–2 of this title;

(ii) the extent of expenditures made for research on women's health by the agencies of the National Institutes of Health; and

(iii) the level of funding needed for such research.


(B) The report required in subparagraph (A) shall be submitted to the Director of NIH for inclusion in the report required in section 283 of this title.

(e) Representation of women among researchers

The Secretary, acting through the Assistant Secretary for Personnel and in collaboration with the Director of the Office, shall determine the extent to which women are represented among senior physicians and scientists of the national research institutes and among physicians and scientists conducting research with funds provided by such institutes, and as appropriate, carry out activities to increase the extent of such representation.

(f) Definitions

For purposes of this part:

(1) The term "women's health conditions", with respect to women of all age, ethnic, and racial groups, means all diseases, disorders, and conditions (including with respect to mental health)—

(A) unique to, more serious, or more prevalent in women;

(B) for which the factors of medical risk or types of medical intervention are different for women, or for which it is unknown whether such factors or types are different for women; or

(C) with respect to which there has been insufficient clinical research involving women as subjects or insufficient clinical data on women.


(2) The term "research on women's health" means research on women's health conditions, including research on preventing such conditions.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §486, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §141(a)(3), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 136; amended Pub. L. 105–340, title I, §106, Oct. 31, 1998, 112 Stat. 3193.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (d)(2). Pub. L. 105–340 substituted "NIH" for "the Office".

Termination of Advisory Committees

Advisory committees established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a committee established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such committee is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a committee established by Congress, its duration is otherwise provided for by law. See section 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 93–641, §6, Jan. 4, 1975, 88 Stat. 2275, set out as a note under section 217a of this title, provided that an advisory committee established pursuant to the Public Health Service Act shall terminate at such time as may be specifically prescribed by an Act of Congress enacted after Jan. 4, 1975.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 282 of this title.

§287d–1. National data system and clearinghouse on research on women's health

(a) Data system

(1) The Director of NIH, in consultation with the Director of the Office and the Director of the National Library of Medicine, shall establish a data system for the collection, storage, analysis, retrieval, and dissemination of information regarding research on women's health that is conducted or supported by the national research institutes. Information from the data system shall be available through information systems available to health care professionals and providers, researchers, and members of the public.

(2) The data system established under paragraph (1) shall include a registry of clinical trials of experimental treatments that have been developed for research on women's health. Such registry shall include information on subject eligibility criteria, sex, age, ethnicity or race, and the location of the trial site or sites. Principal investigators of such clinical trials shall provide this information to the registry within 30 days after it is available. Once a trial has been completed, the principal investigator shall provide the registry with information pertaining to the results, including potential toxicities or adverse effects associated with the experimental treatment or treatments evaluated.

(b) Clearinghouse

The Director of NIH, in consultation with the Director of the Office and with the National Library of Medicine, shall establish, maintain, and operate a program to provide information on research and prevention activities of the national research institutes that relate to research on women's health.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §486A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §141(a)(3), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 138.)

§287d–2. Biennial report

(a) In general

With respect to research on women's health, the Director of the Office shall, not later than February 1, 1994, and biennially thereafter, prepare a report—

(1) describing and evaluating the progress made during the preceding 2 fiscal years in research and treatment conducted or supported by the National Institutes of Health;

(2) describing and analyzing the professional status of women physicians and scientists of such Institutes, including the identification of problems and barriers regarding advancements;

(3) summarizing and analyzing expenditures made by the agencies of such Institutes (and by such Office) during the preceding 2 fiscal years; and

(4) making such recommendations for legislative and administrative initiatives as the Director of the Office determines to be appropriate.

(b) Inclusion in biennial report of Director of NIH

The Director of the Office shall submit each report prepared under subsection (a) of this section to the Director of NIH for inclusion in the report submitted to the President and the Congress under section 283 of this title.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §486B, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §141(a)(3), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 139.)

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 287d of this title.

Part G—Awards and Training

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §141(a)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 136, redesignated part F "Awards and Training" as G. Former part G "General Provisions" redesignated H.

§288. National Research Service Awards

(a) Biomedical and behavioral research and research training; programs and institutions included; restriction; special consideration

(1) The Secretary shall—

(A) provide National Research Service Awards for—

(i) biomedical and behavioral research at the National Institutes of Health in matters relating to the cause, diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of the diseases or other health problems to which the activities of the National Institutes of Health and Administration 1 are directed;

(ii) training at the National Institutes of Health and at the Administration 1 of individuals to undertake such research;

(iii) biomedical and behavioral research and health services research (including research in primary medical care) at public and nonprofit private entities; and

(iv) pre-doctoral and post-doctoral training at public and private institutions of individuals to undertake biomedical and behavioral research;


(B) make grants to public and nonprofit private institutions to enable such institutions to make National Research Service Awards for research (and training to undertake biomedical and behavioral research) in the matters described in subparagraph (A)(i) to individuals selected by such institutions; and

(C) provide contracts for scholarships and loan repayments in accordance with sections 288–4 and 288–5 of this title, subject to providing not more than an aggregate 50 such contracts during the fiscal years 1994 through 1996.


A reference in this subsection to the National Institutes of Health shall be considered to include the institutes, agencies, divisions, and bureaus included in the National Institutes of Health or under the Administration,1 as the case may be.

(2) National Research Service Awards may not be used to support residency training of physicians and other health professionals.

(3) In awarding National Research Service Awards under this section, the Secretary shall take account of the Nation's overall need for biomedical research personnel by giving special consideration to physicians who agree to undertake a minimum of two years of biomedical research.

(4) The Secretary shall carry out paragraph (1) in a manner that will result in the recruitment of women, and individuals from disadvantaged backgrounds (including racial and ethnic minorities), into fields of biomedical or behavioral research and in the provision of research training to women and such individuals.

(b) Prerequisites for Award; review and approval by appropriate advisory councils; Award period; uses for Award; payments to non-Federal public or nonprofit private institutions

(1) No National Research Service Award may be made by the Secretary to any individual unless—

(A) the individual has submitted to the Secretary an application therefor and the Secretary has approved the application;

(B) the individual provides, in such form and manner as the Secretary shall by regulation prescribe, assurances satisfactory to the Secretary that the individual will meet the service requirement of subsection (c) of this section; and

(C) in the case of a National Research Service Award for a purpose described in subsection (a)(1)(A)(iii) of this section, the individual has been sponsored (in such manner as the Secretary may by regulation require) by the institution at which the research or training under the award will be conducted.


An application for an award shall be in such form, submitted in such manner, and contain such information, as the Secretary may by regulation prescribe.

(2) The making of grants under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section for National Research Service Awards shall be subject to review and approval by the appropriate advisory councils within the Department of Health and Human Services (A) whose activities relate to the research or training under the awards, or (B) for the entity at which such research or training will be conducted.

(3) No grant may be made under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section unless an application therefor has been submitted to and approved by the Secretary. Such application shall be in such form, submitted in such manner, and contain such information, as the Secretary may by regulation prescribe. Subject to the provisions of this section (other than paragraph (1)), National Research Service Awards made under a grant under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section shall be made in accordance with such regulations as the Secretary shall prescribe.

(4) The period of any National Research Service Award made to any individual under subsection (a) of this section may not exceed—

(A) five years in the aggregate for pre-doctoral training; and

(B) three years in the aggregate for post-doctoral training;


unless the Secretary for good cause shown waives the application of such limit to such individual.

(5) National Research Service Awards shall provide for such stipends, tuition, fees, and allowances (including travel and subsistence expenses and dependency allowances), adjusted periodically to reflect increases in the cost of living, for the recipients of the awards as the Secretary may deem necessary. A National Research Service Award made to an individual for research or research training at a non-Federal public or nonprofit private institution shall also provide for payments to be made to the institution for the cost of support services (including the cost of faculty salaries, supplies, equipment, general research support, and related items) provided such individual by such institution. The amount of any such payments to any institution shall be determined by the Secretary and shall bear a direct relationship to the reasonable costs of the institution for establishing and maintaining the quality of its biomedical and behavioral research and training programs.

(c) Health research or teaching; service period; recovery upon noncompliance with service requirement, formula; cancellation or waiver of obligation

(1) Each individual who is awarded a National Research Service Award for postdoctoral research training shall, in accordance with paragraph (3), engage in research training, research, or teaching that is health-related (or any combination thereof) for the period specified in paragraph (2). Such period shall be served in accordance with the usual patterns of scientific employment.

(2)(A) The period referred to in paragraph (1) is 12 months, or one month for each month for which the individual involved receives a National Research Service Award for postdoctoral research training, whichever is less.

(B) With respect to postdoctoral research training, in any case in which an individual receives a National Research Service Award for more than 12 months, the 13th month and each subsequent month of performing activities under the Award shall be considered to be activities engaged in toward satisfaction of the requirement established in paragraph (1) regarding a period of service.

(3) The requirement of paragraph (1) shall be complied with by any individual to whom it applies within such reasonable period of time, after the completion of such individual's award, as the Secretary shall by regulation prescribe. The Secretary shall by regulation prescribe the type of research and teaching in which an individual may engage to comply with such requirement and such other requirements respecting research and teaching as the Secretary considers appropriate.

(4)(A) If any individual to whom the requirement of paragraph (1) is applicable fails, within the period prescribed by paragraph (3), to comply with such requirements, the United States shall be entitled to recover from such individual an amount determined in accordance with the formula—


     t−s  

A=φ  (——)

    t  


in which "A" is the amount the United States is entitled to recover; "φ" is the sum of the total amount paid under one or more National Research Service Awards to such individual; "t" is the total number of months in such individual's service obligation; and "s" is the number of months of such obligation served by such individual in accordance with paragraphs (1) and (2) of this subsection.

(B) Any amount which the United States is entitled to recover under subparagraph (A) shall, within the three-year period beginning on the date the United States becomes entitled to recover such amount, be paid to the United States. Until any amount due the United States under subparagraph (A) on account of any National Research Service Award is paid, there shall accrue to the United States interest on such amount at a rate fixed by the Secretary of the Treasury after taking into consideration private consumer rates of interest prevailing on the date the United States becomes entitled to such amount.

(5)(A) Any obligation of an individual under paragraph (1) shall be canceled upon the death of such individual.

(B) The Secretary shall by regulation provide for the waiver or suspension of any such obligation applicable to any individual whenever compliance by such individual is impossible or would involve substantial hardship to such individual or would be against equity and good conscience.

[See main edition for text of (a) to (c)]

(d) Authorization of appropriations; apportionment

For the purpose of carrying out this section, there are authorized to be appropriated $400,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 and 1996. Of the amounts appropriated under this subsection—

(1) not less than 15 percent shall be made available for payments under National Research Service Awards provided by the Secretary under subsection (a)(1)(A) of this section;

(2) not less than 50 percent shall be made available for grants under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section for National Research Service Awards;

[See main edition for text of (1) and (2)]

(3) 1 percent shall be made available to the Secretary, acting through the Administrator of the Health Resources and Services Administration, for payments under National Research Service Awards which (A) are made to individuals affiliated with entities which have received grants or contracts under section 293k, 293l,2 or 293m 2 of this title, and (B) are for research in primary medical care; and 1 percent shall be made available for payments under National Research Service Awards made for health services research by the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality under section 242b(a) of this title; and

[See main edition for text of (4)]

(4) not more than 4 percent may be obligated for National Research Service Awards for periods of three months or less.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §487, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 869; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §151, title VI, §635, Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3058, 3148; Pub. L. 101–93, §5(d), Aug. 16, 1989, 103 Stat. 612; Pub. L. 101–239, title VI, §6103(e)(7), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2208; Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §163(b)(4), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 376; Pub. L. 103–43, title XVI, §§1601, 1602, 1632, 1641, title XX, §2008(b)(14), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 181, 186, 211; Pub. L. 106–129, §2(b)(2), Dec. 6, 1999, 113 Stat. 1670.)

References in Text

Sections 293l and 293m of this title, referred to in subsec. (d)(3), were repealed, and a new section 293l, relating to different subject matter, was added by Pub. L. 105–392, title I, §102(4), Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3539.

Amendments

1999—Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 106–129 substituted "Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality" for "Agency for Health Care Policy and Research".

1993—Subsec. (a)(1)(C). Pub. L. 103–43, §1632, added subpar. (C).

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 103–43, §1601, added par. (4).

Subsec. (c)(1), (2). Pub. L. 103–43, §1602, added pars. (1) and (2) and struck out former pars. (1) and (2) which read as follows:

"(1) Each individual who is awarded a National Research Service Award (other than an individual who is a pre-baccalaureate student who is awarded a National Research Service Award for research training) shall, in accordance with paragraph (3), engage in health research or teaching or any combination thereof which is in accordance with the usual patterns of academic employment, for a period computed in accordance with paragraph (2).

"(2) For each month for which an individual receives a National Research Service Award which is made for a period in excess of twelve months, such individual shall engage in one month of health research or teaching or any combination thereof which is in accordance with the usual patterns of academic employment."

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 103–43, §1641(1), amended first sentence generally. Prior to amendment, first sentence read as follows: "For the purpose of making payments under National Research Service Awards and under grants for such Awards, there are authorized to be appropriated $300,000,000 for fiscal year 1989 and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1990."

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 103–43, §§1641(2), 2008(b)(14), substituted "1 percent" for "one-half of one percent" in two places, "293k, 293l, or 293m" for "295g, 295g–4, or 295g–6", and "242b(a)" for "242b(a)(3)".

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–321 struck out "and the Alcohol, Drug Abuse, and Mental Health Administration" before "in matters relating to" in subpar. (A)(i) and struck out "or the Alcohol, Drug Abuse, and Mental Health Administration" before "shall be considered" in last sentence.

1989—Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 101–93 directed that par. (3), as similarly amended by sections 151(2) and 635 of Pub. L. 100–607, be amended to read as if the amendment made by such section 635 had not been enacted. See 1988 Amendment note below.

Subsec. (d)(3)(B). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted "Agency for Health Care Policy and Research" for "National Center for Health Services Research and Health Care Technology Assessment".

1988—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 100–607, §151(1), amended first sentence generally. Prior to amendment, first sentence read as follows: "There are authorized to be appropriated to make payments under National Research Service Awards and under grants for such awards $244,000,000 for fiscal year 1986, $260,000,000 for fiscal year 1987, and $275,000,000 for fiscal year 1988."

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 100–607, §§151(2), 635, made identical amendments, inserting "to the Secretary, acting through the Administrator of the Health Resources and Services Administration," after first reference to "available".

Effective Date of 1992 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–321 effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as a note under section 236 of this title.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 242, 254m, 282, 284, 285a–3, 285b–4, 285c–2, 285d–2, 285e–2, 287c, 288–4, 288–5, 299a, 300cc–16 of this title.

1 So in original. Reference to Administration probably should not appear.

2 See References in Text note below.

§288–1. Loan repayment program for research with respect to acquired immune deficiency syndrome

(a) In general

The Secretary shall carry out a program of entering into agreements with appropriately qualified health professionals under which such health professionals agree to conduct, as employees of the National Institutes of Health, research with respect to acquired immune deficiency syndrome in consideration of the Federal Government agreeing to repay, for each year of such service, not more than $35,000 of the principal and interest of the educational loans of such health professionals.

(b) Applicability of certain provisions

With respect to the National Health Service Corps Loan Repayment Program established in subpart III of part D of subchapter II of this chapter, the provisions of such subpart shall, except as inconsistent with subsection (a) of this section, apply to the program established in such subsection (a) of this section in the same manner and to the same extent as such provisions apply to the National Health Service Corps Loan Repayment Program established in such subpart.

(c) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this section, there are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1994 through 2001.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §487A, as added Pub. L. 100–607, title VI, §634(a), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3148; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XVI, §1611(a), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 181; Pub. L. 105–392, title IV, §410(a), Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3589.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 105–392, §410(a)(1), substituted "$35,000" for "$20,000".

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 105–392, §410(a)(2), substituted "2001" for "1996".

1993Pub. L. 103–43 amended section generally, in subsec. (a) redesignating former par. (1) as entire subsec., striking out provisions setting a deadline for implementation of the program and former par. (2) containing a limitation that the health professional have a substantial amount of educational loans relative to income and not have been employed at the National Institutes of Health during the 1-year period preceding Nov. 4, 1988, reenacting subsec. (b) without change, and in subsec. (c) redesignating former par. (1) as entire subsec., substituting authorization of appropriations for fiscal years 1994 through 1996 for authorization of appropriations for fiscal years 1989 through 1991, and striking out former par. (2) relating to continued availability of appropriated amounts.

Effective Date of 1993 Amendment

Section 1611(b) of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "The amendment made by subsection (a) [amending this section] does not apply to any agreement entered into under section 487A of the Public Health Service Act [this section] before the date of the enactment of this Act [June 10, 1993]. Each such agreement continues to be subject to the terms of the agreement in effect on the day before such date."

§288–2. Loan repayment program for research with respect to contraception and infertility

(a) Establishment

The Secretary, in consultation with the Director of the National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, shall establish a program of entering into contracts with qualified health professionals (including graduate students) under which such health professionals agree to conduct research with respect to contraception, or with respect to infertility, in consideration of the Federal Government agreeing to repay, for each year of such service, not more than $35,000 of the principal and interest of the educational loans of such health professionals.

(b) Contracts, obligated service, breach of contract

The provisions of sections 254l–1, 254m, and 254o of this title shall, except as inconsistent with subsection (a) of this section, apply to the program established in subsection (a) of this section to the same extent and in the same manner as such provisions apply to the National Health Service Corps Loan Repayment Program established in subpart III of part D of subchapter II of this chapter.

(c) Availability of funds

Amounts available for carrying out this section shall remain available until the expiration of the second fiscal year beginning after the fiscal year for which the amounts were made available.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §487B, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title X, §1002, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 166; amended Pub. L. 105–392, title IV, §410(b), Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3589.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 105–392 substituted "$35,000" for "$20,000".

§288–3. Loan repayment program for research generally

(a) In general

(1) Authority for program

Subject to paragraph (2), the Secretary shall carry out a program of entering into contracts with appropriately qualified health professionals under which such health professionals agree to conduct research, as employees of the National Institutes of Health, in consideration of the Federal Government agreeing to repay, for each year of such service, not more than $35,000 of the principal and interest of the educational loans of such health professionals.

(2) Limitation

The Secretary may not enter into an agreement with a health professional pursuant to paragraph (1) unless such professional—

(A) has a substantial amount of educational loans relative to income; and

(B) agrees to serve as an employee of the National Institutes of Health for purposes of paragraph (1) for a period of not less than 3 years.

(b) Applicability of certain provisions

With respect to the National Health Service Corps Loan Repayment Program established in subpart III of part D of subchapter II of this chapter, the provisions of such subpart shall, except as inconsistent with subsection (a) of this section, apply to the program established in such subsection (a) of this section in the same manner and to the same extent as such provisions apply to the National Health Service Corps Loan Repayment Program established in such subpart.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §487C, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XVI, §1621, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 182; amended Pub. L. 105–392, title IV, §410(c), Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3589.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 105–392 substituted "$35,000" for "$20,000".

§288–4. Undergraduate scholarship program regarding professions needed by National Research Institutes

(a) Establishment of program

(1) In general

Subject to section 288(a)(1)(C) of this title, the Secretary, acting through the Director of NIH, may carry out a program of entering into contracts with individuals described in paragraph (2) under which—

(A) the Director of NIH agrees to provide to the individuals scholarships for pursuing, as undergraduates at accredited institutions of higher education, academic programs appropriate for careers in professions needed by the National Institutes of Health; and

(B) the individuals agree to serve as employees of the National Institutes of Health, for the period described in subsection (c) of this section, in positions that are needed by the National Institutes of Health and for which the individuals are qualified.

(2) Individuals from disadvantaged backgrounds

The individuals referred to in paragraph (1) are individuals who—

(A) are enrolled or accepted for enrollment as full-time undergraduates at accredited institutions of higher education; and

(B) are from disadvantaged backgrounds.

(b) Facilitation of interest of students in careers at National Institutes of Health

In providing employment to individuals pursuant to contracts under subsection (a)(1) of this section, the Director of NIH shall carry out activities to facilitate the interest of the individuals in pursuing careers as employees of the National Institutes of Health.

(c) Period of obligated service

(1) Duration of service

For purposes of subparagraph (B) of subsection (a)(1) of this section, the period of service for which an individual is obligated to serve as an employee of the National Institutes of Health is, subject to paragraph (2)(A), 12 months for each academic year for which the scholarship under such subsection is provided.

(2) Schedule for service

(A) Subject to subparagraph (B), the Director of NIH may not provide a scholarship under subsection (a) of this section unless the individual applying for the scholarship agrees that—

(i) the individual will serve as an employee of the National Institutes of Health full-time for not less than 10 consecutive weeks of each year during which the individual is attending the educational institution involved and receiving such a scholarship;

(ii) the period of service as such an employee that the individual is obligated to provide under clause (i) is in addition to the period of service as such an employee that the individual is obligated to provide under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section; and

(iii) not later than 60 days after obtaining the educational degree involved, the individual will begin serving full-time as such an employee in satisfaction of the period of service that the individual is obligated to provide under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section.


(B) The Director of NIH may defer the obligation of an individual to provide a period of service under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section, if the Director determines that such a deferral is appropriate.

(3) Applicability of certain provisions relating to appointment and compensation

For any period in which an individual provides service as an employee of the National Institutes of Health in satisfaction of the obligation of the individual under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section or paragraph (2)(A)(i), the individual may be appointed as such an employee without regard to the provisions of title 5 relating to appointment and compensation.

(d) Provisions regarding scholarship

(1) Approval of academic program

The Director of NIH may not provide a scholarship under subsection (a) of this section for an academic year unless—

(A) the individual applying for the scholarship has submitted to the Director a proposed academic program for the year and the Director has approved the program; and

(B) the individual agrees that the program will not be altered without the approval of the Director.

(2) Academic standing

The Director of NIH may not provide a scholarship under subsection (a) of this section for an academic year unless the individual applying for the scholarship agrees to maintain an acceptable level of academic standing, as determined by the educational institution involved in accordance with regulations issued by the Secretary.

(3) Limitation on amount

The Director of NIH may not provide a scholarship under subsection (a) of this section for an academic year in an amount exceeding $20,000.

(4) Authorized uses

A scholarship provided under subsection (a) of this section may be expended only for tuition expenses, other reasonable educational expenses, and reasonable living expenses incurred in attending the school involved.

(5) Contract regarding direct payments to institution

In the case of an institution of higher education with respect to which a scholarship under subsection (a) of this section is provided, the Director of NIH may enter into a contract with the institution under which the amounts provided in the scholarship for tuition and other educational expenses are paid directly to the institution.

(e) Penalties for breach of scholarship contract

The provisions of section 254o of this title shall apply to the program established in subsection (a) of this section to the same extent and in the same manner as such provisions apply to the National Health Service Corps Loan Repayment Program established in section 254l–1 of this title.

(f) Requirement of application

The Director of NIH may not provide a scholarship under subsection (a) of this section unless an application for the scholarship is submitted to the Director and the application is in such form, is made in such manner, and contains such agreements, assurances, and information as the Director determines to be necessary to carry out this section.

(g) Availability of authorization of appropriations

Amounts appropriated for a fiscal year for scholarships under this section shall remain available until the expiration of the second fiscal year beginning after the fiscal year for which the amounts were appropriated.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §487D, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XVI, §1631, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 183.)

References in Text

The provisions of title 5 relating to appointment and compensation, referred to in subsec. (c)(3), are classified generally to section 3301 et seq. and section 5301 et seq., respectively, of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 288 of this title.

§288–5. Loan repayment program regarding clinical researchers from disadvantaged backgrounds

(a) Implementation of program

(1) In general

Subject to section 288(a)(1)(C) of this title, the Secretary, acting through the Director of NIH may, subject to paragraph (2), carry out a program of entering into contracts with appropriately qualified health professionals who are from disadvantaged backgrounds under which such health professionals agree to conduct clinical research as employees of the National Institutes of Health in consideration of the Federal Government agreeing to pay, for each year of such service, not more than $35,000 of the principal and interest of the educational loans of the health professionals.

(2) Limitation

The Director of NIH may not enter into a contract with a health professional pursuant to paragraph (1) unless such professional has a substantial amount of education loans relative to income.

(3) Applicability of certain provisions regarding obligated service

Except to the extent inconsistent with this section, the provisions of sections 254l–1, 254m and 254o of this title shall apply to the program established in paragraph (1) to the same extent and in the same manner as such provisions apply to the National Health Service Corps Loan Repayment Program established in section 254l–1 of this title.

(b) Availability of authorization of appropriations

Amounts appropriated for a fiscal year for contracts under subsection (a) of this section shall remain available until the expiration of the second fiscal year beginning after the fiscal year for which the amounts were appropriated.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §487E, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title XVI, §1631, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 185; amended Pub. L. 105–392, title IV, §410(d), Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3589.)

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 105–392, §410(d)(1), substituted "$35,000" for "$20,000".

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 105–392, §410(d)(2), substituted "254l–1, 254m" for "254m".

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 288 of this title.

§288a. Visiting Scientist Awards

(a) The Secretary may make awards (hereafter in this section referred to as "Visiting Scientist Awards") to outstanding scientists who agree to serve as visiting scientists at institutions of postsecondary education which have significant enrollments of disadvantaged students. Visiting Scientist Awards shall be made by the Secretary to enable the faculty and students of such institutions to draw upon the special talents of scientists from other institutions for the purpose of receiving guidance, advice, and instruction with regard to research, teaching, and curriculum development in the biomedical and behavioral sciences and such other aspects of these sciences as the Secretary shall deem appropriate.

(b) The amount of each Visiting Scientist Award shall include such sum as shall be commensurate with the salary or remuneration which the individual receiving the award would have been entitled to receive from the institution with which the individual has, or had, a permanent or immediately prior affiliation. Eligibility for and terms of Visiting Scientist Awards shall be determined in accordance with regulations the Secretary shall prescribe.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §488, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 872.)

§288b. Studies respecting biomedical and behavioral research personnel

(a) Scope of undertaking

The Secretary shall, in accordance with subsection (b) of this section, arrange for the conduct of a continuing study to—

(1) establish (A) the Nation's overall need for biomedical and behavioral research personnel, (B) the subject areas in which such personnel are needed and the number of such personnel needed in each such area, and (C) the kinds and extent of training which should be provided such personnel;

(2) assess (A) current training programs available for the training of biomedical and behavioral research personnel which are conducted under this chapter, at or through national research institutes under the National Institutes of Health, and (B) other current training programs available for the training of such personnel;

(3) identify the kinds of research positions available to and held by individuals completing such programs;

(4) determine, to the extent feasible, whether the programs referred to in clause (B) of paragraph (2) would be adequate to meet the needs established under paragraph (1) if the programs referred to in clause (A) of paragraph (2) were terminated; and

(5) determine what modifications in the programs referred to in paragraph (2) are required to meet the needs established under paragraph (1).

(b) Arrangement with National Academy of Sciences or other nonprofit private groups or associations

(1) The Secretary shall request the National Academy of Sciences to conduct the study required by subsection (a) of this section under an arrangement under which the actual expenses incurred by such Academy in conducting such study will be paid by the Secretary. If the National Academy of Sciences is willing to do so, the Secretary shall enter into such an arrangement with such Academy for the conduct of such study.

(2) If the National Academy of Sciences is unwilling to conduct such study under such an arrangement, then the Secretary shall enter into a similar arrangement with other appropriate nonprofit private groups or associations under which such groups or associations will conduct such study and prepare and submit the reports thereon as provided in subsection (c) of this section.

(3) The National Academy of Sciences or other group or association conducting the study required by subsection (a) of this section shall conduct such study in consultation with the Director of NIH.

(c) Report to Congressional committees

A report on the results of the study required under subsection (a) of this section shall be submitted by the Secretary to the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate at least once every four years.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §489, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 872; amended Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §163(b)(5), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 376.)

Amendments

1992—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–321 struck out "and institutes under the Alcohol, Drug Abuse, and Mental Health Administration" after "National Institutes of Health".

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

Effective Date of 1992 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–321 effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as a note under section 236 of this title.

Part H—General Provisions

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §141(a)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 136, redesignated part G "General Provisions" as H. Former part H "National Foundation for Biomedical Research" redesignated I.

§289. Institutional review boards; ethics guidance program

(a) The Secretary shall by regulation require that each entity which applies for a grant, contract, or cooperative agreement under this chapter for any project or program which involves the conduct of biomedical or behavioral research involving human subjects submit in or with its application for such grant, contract, or cooperative agreement assurances satisfactory to the Secretary that it has established (in accordance with regulations which the Secretary shall prescribe) a board (to be known as an "Institutional Review Board") to review biomedical and behavioral research involving human subjects conducted at or supported by such entity in order to protect the rights of the human subjects of such research.

(b)(1) The Secretary shall establish a program within the Department of Health and Human Services under which requests for clarification and guidance with respect to ethical issues raised in connection with biomedical or behavioral research involving human subjects are responded to promptly and appropriately.

(2) The Secretary shall establish a process for the prompt and appropriate response to information provided to the Director of NIH respecting incidences of violations of the rights of human subjects of research for which funds have been made available under this chapter. The process shall include procedures for the receiving of reports of such information from recipients of funds under this chapter and taking appropriate action with respect to such violations.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §491, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 873.)

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 280e, 283f, 287c, 289a–1 of this title.

§289a. Peer review requirements

(a) Applications for biomedical and behavioral research grants, cooperative agreements, and contracts; regulations

(1) The Secretary, acting through the Director of NIH, shall by regulation require appropriate technical and scientific peer review of—

(A) applications made for grants and cooperative agreements under this chapter for biomedical and behavioral research; and

(B) applications made for biomedical and behavioral research and development contracts to be administered through the National Institutes of Health.


(2) Regulations promulgated under paragraph (1) shall require that the review of applications made for grants, contracts, and cooperative agreements required by the regulations be conducted—

(A) to the extent practical, in a manner consistent with the system for technical and scientific peer review applicable on November 20, 1985, to grants under this chapter for biomedical and behavioral research, and

(B) to the extent practical, by technical and scientific peer review groups performing such review on or before November 20, 1985,


and shall authorize such review to be conducted by groups appointed under sections 282(b)(6) and 284(c)(3) of this title.

(b) Periodic review of research at National Institutes of Health

The Director of NIH shall establish procedures for periodic technical and scientific peer review of research at the National Institutes of Health. Such procedures shall require that—

(1) the reviewing entity be provided a written description of the research to be reviewed, and

(2) the reviewing entity provide the advisory council of the national research institute involved with such description and the results of the review by the entity,


and shall authorize such review to be conducted by groups appointed under sections 282(b)(6) and 284(c)(3) of this title.

(c) Compliance with requirements for inclusion of women and minorities in clinical research

(1) In technical and scientific peer review under this section of proposals for clinical research, the consideration of any such proposal (including the initial consideration) shall, except as provided in paragraph (2), include an evaluation of the technical and scientific merit of the proposal regarding compliance with section 289a–2 of this title.

(2) Paragraph (1) shall not apply to any proposal for clinical research that, pursuant to subsection (b) of section 289a–2 of this title, is not subject to the requirement of subsection (a) of such section regarding the inclusion of women and members of minority groups as subjects in clinical research.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §492, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 874; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §132, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 135.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–43 added subsec. (c).

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 280e, 282, 283f, 284, 284a, 287a–2, 287c, 289a–1, 289c of this title.

§289a–1. Certain provisions regarding review and approval of proposals for research

(a) Review as precondition to research

(1) Protection of human research subjects

(A) In the case of any application submitted to the Secretary for financial assistance to conduct research, the Secretary may not approve or fund any application that is subject to review under section 289(a) of this title by an Institutional Review Board unless the application has undergone review in accordance with such section and has been recommended for approval by a majority of the members of the Board conducting such review.

(B) In the case of research that is subject to review under procedures established by the Secretary for the protection of human subjects in clinical research conducted by the National Institutes of Health, the Secretary may not authorize the conduct of the research unless the research has, pursuant to such procedures, been recommended for approval.

(2) Peer review

In the case of any proposal for the National Institutes of Health to conduct or support research, the Secretary may not approve or fund any proposal that is subject to technical and scientific peer review under section 289a of this title unless the proposal has undergone such review in accordance with such section and has been recommended for approval by a majority of the members of the entity conducting such review.

(b) Ethical review of research

(1) Procedures regarding withholding of funds

If research has been recommended for approval for purposes of subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary may not withhold funds for the research because of ethical considerations unless—

(A) the Secretary convenes an advisory board in accordance with paragraph (5) to study such considerations; and

(B)(i) the majority of the advisory board recommends that, because of such considerations, the Secretary withhold funds for the research; or

(ii) the majority of such board recommends that the Secretary not withhold funds for the research because of such considerations, but the Secretary finds, on the basis of the report submitted under paragraph (5)(B)(ii), that the recommendation is arbitrary and capricious.

(2) Rules of construction

Paragraph (1) may not be construed as prohibiting the Secretary from withholding funds for research on the basis of—

(A) the inadequacy of the qualifications of the entities that would be involved with the conduct of the research (including the entity that would directly receive the funds from the Secretary), subject to the condition that, with respect to the process of review through which the research was recommended for approval for purposes of subsection (a) of this section, all findings regarding such qualifications made in such process are conclusive; or

(B) the priorities established by the Secretary for the allocation of funds among projects of research that have been so recommended.

(3) Applicability

The limitation established in paragraph (1) regarding the authority to withhold funds because of ethical considerations shall apply without regard to whether the withholding of funds on such basis is characterized as a disapproval, a moratorium, a prohibition, or other characterization.

(4) Preliminary matters regarding use of procedures

(A) If the Secretary makes a determination that an advisory board should be convened for purposes of paragraph (1), the Secretary shall, through a statement published in the Federal Register, announce the intention of the Secretary to convene such a board.

(B) A statement issued under subparagraph (A) shall include a request that interested individuals submit to the Secretary recommendations specifying the particular individuals who should be appointed to the advisory board involved. The Secretary shall consider such recommendations in making appointments to the board.

(C) The Secretary may not make appointments to an advisory board under paragraph (1) until the expiration of the 30-day period beginning on the date on which the statement required in subparagraph (A) is made with respect to the board.

(5) Ethics advisory boards

(A) Any advisory board convened for purposes of paragraph (1) shall be known as an ethics advisory board (in this paragraph referred to as an "ethics board").

(B)(i) An ethics board shall advise, consult with, and make recommendations to the Secretary regarding the ethics of the project of biomedical or behavioral research with respect to which the board has been convened.

(ii) Not later than 180 days after the date on which the statement required in paragraph (4)(A) is made with respect to an ethics board, the board shall submit to the Secretary, and to the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate, a report describing the findings of the board regarding the project of research involved and making a recommendation under clause (i) of whether the Secretary should or should not withhold funds for the project. The report shall include the information considered in making the findings.

(C) An ethics board shall be composed of no fewer than 14, and no more than 20, individuals who are not officers or employees of the United States. The Secretary shall make appointments to the board from among individuals with special qualifications and competence to provide advice and recommendations regarding ethical matters in biomedical and behavioral research. Of the members of the board—

(i) no fewer than 1 shall be an attorney;

(ii) no fewer than 1 shall be an ethicist;

(iii) no fewer than 1 shall be a practicing physician;

(iv) no fewer than 1 shall be a theologian; and

(v) no fewer than one-third, and no more than one-half, shall be scientists with substantial accomplishments in biomedical or behavioral research.


(D) The term of service as a member of an ethics board shall be for the life of the board. If such a member does not serve the full term of such service, the individual appointed to fill the resulting vacancy shall be appointed for the remainder of the term of the predecessor of the individual.

(E) A member of an ethics board shall be subject to removal from the board by the Secretary for neglect of duty or malfeasance or for other good cause shown.

(F) The Secretary shall designate an individual from among the members of an ethics board to serve as the chair of the board.

(G) In carrying out subparagraph (B)(i) with respect to a project of research, an ethics board shall conduct inquiries and hold public hearings.

(H) In carrying out subparagraph (B)(i) with respect to a project of research, an ethics board shall have access to all relevant information possessed by the Department of Health and Human Services, or available to the Secretary from other agencies.

(I) Members of an ethics board shall receive compensation for each day engaged in carrying out the duties of the board, including time engaged in traveling for purposes of such duties. Such compensation may not be provided in an amount in excess of the maximum rate of basic pay payable for GS–18 of the General Schedule.

(J) The Secretary, acting through the Director of the National Institutes of Health, shall provide to each ethics board reasonable staff and assistance to carry out the duties of the board.

(K) An ethics board shall terminate 30 days after the date on which the report required in subparagraph (B)(ii) is submitted to the Secretary and the congressional committees specified in such subparagraph.

(6) "Ethical considerations" defined

For purposes of this subsection, the term "ethical considerations" means considerations as to whether the nature of the research involved is such that it is unethical to conduct or support the research.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §492A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §101, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 126.)

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

References in Other Laws to GS–16, 17, or 18 Pay Rates

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 283f of this title.

§289a–2. Inclusion of women and minorities in clinical research

(a) Requirement of inclusion

(1) In general

In conducting or supporting clinical research for purposes of this subchapter, the Director of NIH shall, subject to subsection (b) of this section, ensure that—

(A) women are included as subjects in each project of such research; and

(B) members of minority groups are included as subjects in such research.

(2) Outreach regarding participation as subjects

The Director of NIH, in consultation with the Director of the Office of Research on Women's Health and the Director of the Office of Research on Minority Health, shall conduct or support outreach programs for the recruitment of women and members of minority groups as subjects in projects of clinical research.

(b) Inapplicability of requirement

The requirement established in subsection (a) of this section regarding women and members of minority groups shall not apply to a project of clinical research if the inclusion, as subjects in the project, of women and members of minority groups, respectively—

(1) is inappropriate with respect to the health of the subjects;

(2) is inappropriate with respect to the purpose of the research; or

(3) is inappropriate under such other circumstances as the Director of NIH may designate.

(c) Design of clinical trials

In the case of any clinical trial in which women or members of minority groups will under subsection (a) of this section be included as subjects, the Director of NIH shall ensure that the trial is designed and carried out in a manner sufficient to provide for a valid analysis of whether the variables being studied in the trial affect women or members of minority groups, as the case may be, differently than other subjects in the trial.

(d) Guidelines

(1) In general

Subject to paragraph (2), the Director of NIH, in consultation with the Director of the Office of Research on Women's Health and the Director of the Office of Research on Minority Health, shall establish guidelines regarding the requirements of this section. The guidelines shall include guidelines regarding—

(A) the circumstances under which the inclusion of women and minorities as subjects in projects of clinical research is inappropriate for purposes of subsection (b) of this section;

(B) the manner in which clinical trials are required to be designed and carried out for purposes of subsection (c) of this section; and

(C) the operation of outreach programs under subsection (a) of this section.

(2) Certain provisions

With respect to the circumstances under which the inclusion of women or members of minority groups (as the case may be) as subjects in a project of clinical research is inappropriate for purposes of subsection (b) of this section, the following applies to guidelines under paragraph (1):

(A)(i) In the case of a clinical trial, the guidelines shall provide that the costs of such inclusion in the trial is not a permissible consideration in determining whether such inclusion is inappropriate.

(ii) In the case of other projects of clinical research, the guidelines shall provide that the costs of such inclusion in the project is not a permissible consideration in determining whether such inclusion is inappropriate unless the data regarding women or members of minority groups, respectively, that would be obtained in such project (in the event that such inclusion were required) have been or are being obtained through other means that provide data of comparable quality.

(B) In the case of a clinical trial, the guidelines may provide that such inclusion in the trial is not required if there is substantial scientific data demonstrating that there is no significant difference between—

(i) the effects that the variables to be studied in the trial have on women or members of minority groups, respectively; and

(ii) the effects that the variables have on the individuals who would serve as subjects in the trial in the event that such inclusion were not required.

(e) Date certain for guidelines; applicability

(1) Date certain

The guidelines required in subsection (d) of this section shall be established and published in the Federal Register not later than 180 days after June 10, 1993.

(2) Applicability

For fiscal year 1995 and subsequent fiscal years, the Director of NIH may not approve any proposal of clinical research to be conducted or supported by any agency of the National Institutes of Health unless the proposal specifies the manner in which the research will comply with this section.

(f) Reports by advisory councils

The advisory council of each national research institute shall prepare biennial reports describing the manner in which the institute has complied with this section. Each such report shall be submitted to the Director of the institute involved for inclusion in the biennial report under section 283 of this title.

(g) Definitions

For purposes of this section:

(1) The term "project of clinical research" includes a clinical trial.

(2) The term "minority group" includes subpopulations of minority groups. The Director of NIH shall, through the guidelines established under subsection (d) of this section, define the terms "minority group" and "subpopulation" for purposes of the preceding sentence.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §492B, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §131, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 133.)

Inapplicability to Current Projects

Section 133 of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "Section 492B of the Public Health Service Act, as added by section 131 of this Act [this section], shall not apply with respect to projects of clinical research for which initial funding was provided prior to the date of the enactment of this Act [June 10, 1993]. With respect to the inclusion of women and minorities as subjects in clinical research conducted or supported by the National Institutes of Health, any policies of the Secretary of Health and Human Services regarding such inclusion that are in effect on the day before the date of the enactment of this Act shall continue to apply to the projects referred to in the preceding sentence."

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 283b, 287d, 289a of this title; title 38 sections 317, 318.

§289b. Office of Research Integrity

(a) In general

(1) Establishment of Office

Not later than 90 days after June 10, 1993, the Secretary shall establish an office to be known as the Office of Research Integrity (referred to in this section as the "Office"), which shall be established as an independent entity in the Department of Health and Human Services.

(2) Appointment of Director

The Office shall be headed by a Director, who shall be appointed by the Secretary, be experienced and specially trained in the conduct of research, and have experience in the conduct of investigations of research misconduct. The Secretary shall carry out this section acting through the Director of the Office. The Director shall report to the Secretary.

(3) Definitions

(A) The Secretary shall by regulation establish a definition for the term "research misconduct" for purposes of this section.

(B) For purposes of this section, the term "financial assistance" means a grant, contract, or cooperative agreement.

(b) Existence of administrative processes as condition of funding for research

The Secretary shall by regulation require that each entity that applies for financial assistance under this chapter for any project or program that involves the conduct of biomedical or behavioral research submit in or with its application for such assistance—

(1) assurances satisfactory to the Secretary that such entity has established and has in effect (in accordance with regulations which the Secretary shall prescribe) an administrative process to review reports of research misconduct in connection with biomedical and behavioral research conducted at or sponsored by such entity;

(2) an agreement that the entity will report to the Director any investigation of alleged research misconduct in connection with projects for which funds have been made available under this chapter that appears substantial; and

(3) an agreement that the entity will comply with regulations issued under this section.

(c) Process for response of Director

The Secretary shall by regulation establish a process to be followed by the Director for the prompt and appropriate—

(1) response to information provided to the Director respecting research misconduct in connection with projects for which funds have been made available under this chapter;

(2) receipt of reports by the Director of such information from recipients of funds under this chapter;

(3) conduct of investigations, when appropriate; and

(4) taking of other actions, including appropriate remedies, with respect to such misconduct.

(d) Monitoring by Director

The Secretary shall by regulation establish procedures for the Director to monitor administrative processes and investigations that have been established or carried out under this section.

(e) Protection of whistleblowers

(1) In general

In the case of any entity required to establish administrative processes under subsection (b) of this section, the Secretary shall by regulation establish standards for preventing, and for responding to the occurrence of retaliation by such entity, its officials or agents, against an employee in the terms and conditions of employment in response to the employee having in good faith—

(A) made an allegation that the entity, its officials or agents, has engaged in or failed to adequately respond to an allegation of research misconduct; or

(B) cooperated with an investigation of such an allegation.

(2) Monitoring by Secretary

The Secretary shall by regulation establish procedures for the Director to monitor the implementation of the standards established by an entity under paragraph (1) for the purpose of determining whether the procedures have been established, and are being utilized, in accordance with the standards established under such paragraph.

(3) Noncompliance

The Secretary shall by regulation establish remedies for noncompliance by an entity, its officials or agents, which has engaged in retaliation in violation of the standards established under paragraph (1). Such remedies may include termination of funding provided by the Secretary for such project or recovery of funding being provided by the Secretary for such project, or other actions as appropriate.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §493, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 874; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §§161, 163, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 140, 142.)

Codification

June 10, 1993, referred to in subsec. (a)(1), was in the original "the date of enactment of this section" which was translated as meaning the date of enactment of Pub. L. 103–43, which amended this section generally, to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43, §161, amended section generally. Prior to amendment, section read as follows:

"(a) The Secretary shall by regulation require that each entity which applies for a grant, contract, or cooperative agreement under this chapter for any project or program which involves the conduct of biomedical or behavioral research submit in or with its application for such grant, contract, or cooperative agreement assurances satisfactory to the Secretary that such entity—

"(1) has established (in accordance with regulations which the Secretary shall prescribe) an administrative process to review reports of scientific fraud in connection with biomedical and behavioral research conducted at or sponsored by such entity; and

"(2) will report to the Secretary any investigation of alleged scientific fraud which appears substantial.

"(b) The Director of NIH shall establish a process for the prompt and appropriate response to information provided the Director of NIH respecting scientific fraud in connection with projects for which funds have been made available under this chapter. The process shall include procedures for the receiving of reports of such information from recipients of funds under this chapter and taking appropriate action with respect to such fraud."

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 103–43, §163, added subsec. (e).

Regulations

Section 165 of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that:

"(a) Issuance of Final Rules.—

"(1) In general.—Not later than 180 days after the date of the enactment of this Act [June 10, 1993], the Secretary shall, subject to paragraph (2), issue the final rule for each regulation required in section 493 or 493A of the Public Health Service Act [this section and section 289b–1 of this title].

"(2) Definition of research misconduct.—Not later than 90 days after the date on which the report required in section 162(e) [107 Stat. 142] is submitted to the Secretary, the Secretary shall issue the final rule for the regulations required in section 493 of the Public Health Service Act with respect to the definition of the term 'research misconduct'.

"(b) Applicability to Ongoing Investigations.—The final rule issued pursuant to subsection (a) for investigations under section 493 of the Public Health Service Act [this section] does not apply to investigations commenced before the date of the enactment of this Act [June 10, 1993] under authority of such section as in effect before such date.

"(c) Definitions.—For purposes of this section:

"(1) The term 'section 493 of the Public Health Service Act' means such section as amended by sections 161 and 163 of this Act [this section], except as indicated otherwise in subsection (b).

"(2) The term 'section 493A of the Public Health Service Act' means such section as added by section 164 of this Act [section 289b–1 of this title].

"(3) The term 'Secretary' means the Secretary of Health and Human Services."

§289b–1. Protection against financial conflicts of interest in certain projects of research

(a) Issuance of regulations

The Secretary shall by regulation define the specific circumstances that constitute the existence of a financial interest in a project on the part of an entity or individual that will, or may be reasonably expected to, create a bias in favor of obtaining results in such project that are consistent with such financial interest. Such definition shall apply uniformly to each entity or individual conducting a research project under this chapter. In the case of any entity or individual receiving assistance from the Secretary for a project of research described in subsection (b) of this section, the Secretary shall by regulation establish standards for responding to, including managing, reducing, or eliminating, the existence of such a financial interest. The entity may adopt individualized procedures for implementing the standards.

(b) Relevant projects

A project of research referred to in subsection (a) of this section is a project of clinical research whose purpose is to evaluate the safety or effectiveness of a drug, medical device, or treatment and for which such entity is receiving assistance from the Secretary.

(c) Identifying and reporting to Secretary

The Secretary shall by regulation require that each entity described in subsection (a) of this section that applies for assistance under this chapter for any project described in subsection (b) of this section submit in or with its application for such assistance—

(1) assurances satisfactory to the Secretary that such entity has established and has in effect an administrative process under subsection (a) of this section to identify financial interests (as defined under subsection (a) of this section) that exist regarding the project; and

(2) an agreement that the entity will report to the Secretary such interests identified by the entity and how any such interests identified by the entity will be managed or eliminated in order that the project in question will be protected from bias that may stem from such interests; and

(3) an agreement that the entity will comply with regulations issued under this section.

(d) Monitoring of process

The Secretary shall monitor the establishment and conduct of the administrative process established by an entity pursuant to subsection (a) of this section.

(e) Response

In any case in which the Secretary determines that an entity has failed to comply with subsection (c) of this section regarding a project of research described in subsection (b) of this section, the Secretary—

(1) shall require that, as a condition of receiving assistance, the entity disclose the existence of a financial interest (as defined under subsection (a) of this section) in each public presentation of the results of such project; and

(2) may take such other actions as the Secretary determines to be appropriate.

(f) Definitions

For purposes of this section:

(1) The term "financial interest" includes the receipt of consulting fees or honoraria and the ownership of stock or equity.

(2) The term "assistance", with respect to conducting a project of research, means a grant, contract, or cooperative agreement.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §493A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §164, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 142.)

Regulations

Final rule for regulations required in this section to be issued not later than 180 days after June 10, 1993, see section 165 of Pub. L. 103–43, set out as a note under section 289b of this title.

§289c. Research on public health emergencies; report to Congressional committees

(a) If the Secretary determines, after consultation with the Director of NIH, the Commissioner of the Food and Drug Administration, or the Director of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, that a disease or disorder constitutes a public health emergency, the Secretary, acting through the Director of NIH—

(1) shall expedite the review by advisory councils under section 284a of this title and by peer review groups under section 289a of this title of applications for grants for research on such disease or disorder or proposals for contracts for such research;

(2) shall exercise the authority in section 5 of title 41 respecting public exigencies to waive the advertising requirements of such section in the case of proposals for contracts for such research;

(3) may provide administrative supplemental increases in existing grants and contracts to support new research relevant to such disease or disorder; and

(4) shall disseminate, to health professionals and the public, information on the cause, prevention, and treatment of such disease or disorder that has been developed in research assisted under this section.


The amount of an increase in a grant or contract provided under paragraph (3) may not exceed one-half the original amount of the grant or contract.

(b) Not later than 90 days after the end of a fiscal year, the Secretary shall report to the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate on actions taken under subsection (a) of this section in such fiscal year.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §494, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 875; amended Pub. L. 102–531, title III, §312(d)(9), Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3504.)

Amendments

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–531 substituted "Centers for Disease Control and Prevention" for "Centers for Disease Control".

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

§289c–1. Collaborative use of certain health services research funds

The Secretary shall ensure that amounts made available under subparts 14, 15 and 16 of part C for health services research relating to alcohol abuse and alcoholism, drug abuse and mental health be used collaboratively, as appropriate, and in consultation with the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §494A, as added Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §125, July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 366; amended Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2016(c), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 218; Pub. L. 104–66, title I, §1062(b), Dec. 21, 1995, 109 Stat. 720; Pub. L. 105–362, title VI, §601(a)(1)(F), Nov. 10, 1998, 112 Stat. 3285; Pub. L. 106–129, §2(b)(2), Dec. 6, 1999, 113 Stat. 1670.)

References in Text

Subparts 14, 15 and 16 of part C, referred to in text, are classified to sections 285n et seq., 285o et seq., and 285p et seq., respectively, of this title.

Amendments

1999Pub. L. 106–129, which directed the substitution of "Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality" for "Agency for Health Care Policy and Research", was executed by making the substitution for "Agency for Health Care Policy Research", to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

1998Pub. L. 105–362 struck out heading and designation of subsec. (a) and heading and text of subsec. (b). Text of subsec. (b) read as follows: "Not later than December 30, 1993, and each December 30 thereafter, the Secretary shall prepare and submit to the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate, a report concerning the activities carried out with the amounts referred to in subsection (a) of this section."

1995—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 104–66 substituted "December 30, 1993, and each December 30 thereafter" for "September 30, 1993, and annually thereafter".

1993—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "September 30, 1993" for "May 3, 1993".

Effective Date

Section effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment note under section 236 of this title.

§289d. Animals in research

(a) Establishment of guidelines

The Secretary, acting through the Director of NIH, shall establish guidelines for the following:

(1) The proper care of animals to be used in biomedical and behavioral research.

(2) The proper treatment of animals while being used in such research. Guidelines under this paragraph shall require—

(A) the appropriate use of tranquilizers, analgesics, anesthetics, paralytics, and euthanasia for animals in such research; and

(B) appropriate pre-surgical and post-surgical veterinary medical and nursing care for animals in such research.


Such guidelines shall not be construed to prescribe methods of research.

(3) The organization and operation of animal care committees in accordance with subsection (b) of this section.

(b) Animal care committees; establishment; membership; functions

(1) Guidelines of the Secretary under subsection (a)(3) of this section shall require animal care committees at each entity which conducts biomedical and behavioral research with funds provided under this chapter (including the National Institutes of Health and the national research institutes) to assure compliance with the guidelines established under subsection (a) of this section.

(2) Each animal care committee shall be appointed by the chief executive officer of the entity for which the committee is established, shall be composed of not fewer than three members, and shall include at least one individual who has no association with such entity and at least one doctor of veterinary medicine.

(3) Each animal care committee of a research entity shall—

(A) review the care and treatment of animals in all animal study areas and facilities of the research entity at least semi-annually to evaluate compliance with applicable guidelines established under subsection (a) of this section for appropriate animal care and treatment;

(B) keep appropriate records of reviews conducted under subparagraph (A); and

(C) for each review conducted under subparagraph (A), file with the Director of NIH at least annually (i) a certification that the review has been conducted, and (ii) reports of any violations of guidelines established under subsection (a) of this section or assurances required under paragraph (1) which were observed in such review and which have continued after notice by the committee to the research entity involved of the violations.


Reports filed under subparagraph (C) shall include any minority views filed by members of the committee.

(c) Assurances required in application or contract proposal; reasons for use of animals; notice and comment requirements for promulgation of regulations

The Director of NIH shall require each applicant for a grant, contract, or cooperative agreement involving research on animals which is administered by the National Institutes of Health or any national research institute to include in its application or contract proposal, submitted after the expiration of the twelve-month period beginning on November 20, 1985—

(1) assurances satisfactory to the Director of NIH that—

(A) the applicant meets the requirements of the guidelines established under paragraphs (1) and (2) of subsection (a) of this section and has an animal care committee which meets the requirements of subsection (b) of this section; and

(B) scientists, animal technicians, and other personnel involved with animal care, treatment, and use by the applicant have available to them instruction or training in the humane practice of animal maintenance and experimentation, and the concept, availability, and use of research or testing methods that limit the use of animals or limit animal distress; and


(2) a statement of the reasons for the use of animals in the research to be conducted with funds provided under such grant or contract.


Notwithstanding subsection (a)(2) of section 553 of title 5, regulations under this subsection shall be promulgated in accordance with the notice and comment requirements of such section.

(d) Failure to meet guidelines; suspension or revocation of grant or contract

If the Director of NIH determines that—

(1) the conditions of animal care, treatment, or use in an entity which is receiving a grant, contract, or cooperative agreement involving research on animals under this subchapter do not meet applicable guidelines established under subsection (a) of this section;

(2) the entity has been notified by the Director of NIH of such determination and has been given a reasonable opportunity to take corrective action; and

(3) no action has been taken by the entity to correct such conditions;


the Director of NIH shall suspend or revoke such grant or contract under such conditions as the Director determines appropriate.

(e) Disclosure of trade secrets or privileged or confidential information

No guideline or regulation promulgated under subsection (a) or (c) of this section may require a research entity to disclose publicly trade secrets or commercial or financial information which is privileged or confidential.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §495, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 875.)

Prohibition on Funding of Projects Involving Use of Chimpanzees Obtained From the Wild

Pub. L. 102–394, title II, §213, Oct. 6, 1992, 106 Stat. 1812, provided that: "No funds appropriated under this Act or subsequent Departments of Labor, Health and Human Services, and Education, and Related Agencies Appropriations Acts shall be used by the National Institutes of Health, or any other Federal agency, or recipient of Federal funds on any project that entails the capture or procurement of chimpanzees obtained from the wild. For purposes of this section, the term 'recipient of Federal funds' includes private citizens, corporations, or other research institutions located outside of the United States that are recipients of Federal funds."

Similar provisions were contained in the following prior appropriation acts:

Pub. L. 102–170, title II, §213, Nov. 26, 1991, 105 Stat. 1127.

Pub. L. 101–517, title II, §211, Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 2209.

Pub. L. 101–166, title II, §214, Nov. 21, 1989, 103 Stat. 1178.

Plan for Research Involving Animals

Section 4 of Pub. L. 99–158 directed Director of National Institutes of Health to establish, not later than Oct. 1, 1986, a plan for research into methods of biomedical research and experimentation which reduces the use of animals in research or which produce less pain and distress in animals to develop methods found to be valid and reliable, to train scientists in use of such methods, to disseminate information on such methods and to establish an Interagency Coordinating Committee to assist in development of the plan, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–43, title II, §205(b), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 148. See section 283e of this title.

§289e. Use of appropriations

(a) Appropriations to carry out the purposes of this subchapter, unless otherwise expressly provided, may be expended in the District of Columbia for—

(1) personal services;

(2) stenographic recording and translating services;

(3) travel expenses (including the expenses of attendance at meetings when specifically authorized by the Secretary);

(4) rental;

(5) supplies and equipment;

(6) purchase and exchange of medical books, books of reference, directories, periodicals, newspapers, and press clippings;

(7) purchase, operation, and maintenance of passenger motor vehicles;

(8) printing and binding (in addition to that otherwise provided by law); and

(9) all other necessary expenses in carrying out this subchapter.


Such appropriations may be expended by contract if deemed necessary, without regard to section 5 of title 41.

(b)(1) None of the amounts appropriated under this chapter for the purposes of this subchapter may be obligated for the construction of facilities (including the acquisition of land) unless a provision of this subchapter establishes express authority for such purpose and unless the Act making appropriations under such provision specifies that the amounts appropriated are available for such purpose.

(2) Any grants, cooperative agreements, or contracts authorized in this subchapter for the construction of facilities may be awarded only on a competitive basis.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §496, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 877; amended Pub. L. 101–190, §8, Nov. 29, 1989, 103 Stat. 1695; Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2008(b)(15), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 211.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "Appropriations to carry out the purposes of this subchapter" for "Such appropriations".

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–190 designated existing provisions as subsec. (a), struck out first sentence which read as follows: "Appropriations to carry out the purposes of this subchapter shall be available for the acquisition of land or the erection of buildings only if so specified.", and added subsec. (b).

Construction of Biomedical Facilities for Development and Breeding of Specialized Strains of Mice

Sections 1 to 7 of Pub. L. 101–190, as amended by Pub. L. 101–374, §4(a), (c)(1), Aug. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 458, 459, authorized a reservation of funds for making a grant to construct facilities for development and breeding of specialized strains of mice for use in biomedical research, provided for a competitive grant award process, required applicant for the grant to agree to a twenty-year transferable obligation, restricted grant applicant to public or nonprofit private status, with assurances of sufficient financial resources, set forth other grant requirements, and specified consequences of failure to comply with agreements and violation of the twenty-year obligation.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in sections 285a–3, 285b–4, 285o–4 of this title.

§289f. Gifts and donations; memorials

The Secretary may, in accordance with section 238 of this title, accept conditional gifts for the National Institutes of Health or a national research institute or for the acquisition of grounds or for the erection, equipment, or maintenance of facilities for the National Institutes of Health or a national research institute. Donations of $50,000 or over for the National Institutes of Health or a national research institute for carrying out the purposes of this subchapter may be acknowledged by the establishment within the National Institutes of Health or a national research institute of suitable memorials to the donors.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §497, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 877; amended Pub. L. 99–660, title III, §311(b)(1), Nov. 14, 1986, 100 Stat. 3779; Pub. L. 100–607, title II, §204(3), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3079; Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2620(b)(2), Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4244; Pub. L. 101–381, title I, §102(5), Aug. 18, 1990, 104 Stat. 586; Pub. L. 103–43, title XX, §2010(b)(6), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 214.)

Amendments

1993Pub. L. 103–43 substituted "section 238" for "section 300aaa".

1990Pub. L. 101–381 made technical amendment to reference to section 300aaa of this title to reflect renumbering of corresponding section of original act.

1988Pub. L. 100–690 made technical amendment to reference to section 300aaa of this title to reflect renumbering of corresponding section of original act.

Pub. L. 100–607 substituted "300aaa" for "300cc".

1986Pub. L. 99–660 substituted "section 300cc of this title" for "section 300aa of this title".

Effective Date of 1988 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–690 effective immediately after enactment of Pub. L. 100–607, which was approved Nov. 4, 1988, see section 2600 of Pub. L. 100–690, set out as a note under section 242m of this title.

Effective Date of 1986 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–660 effective Dec. 22, 1987, see section 323 of Pub. L. 99–660, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 300aa–1 of this title.

§289g. Fetal research

(a) Conduct or support by Secretary; restrictions

The Secretary may not conduct or support any research or experimentation, in the United States or in any other country, on a nonviable living human fetus ex utero or a living human fetus ex utero for whom viability has not been ascertained unless the research or experimentation—

(1) may enhance the well-being or meet the health needs of the fetus or enhance the probability of its survival to viability; or

(2) will pose no added risk of suffering, injury, or death to the fetus and the purpose of the research or experimentation is the development of important biomedical knowledge which cannot be obtained by other means.

(b) Risk standard for fetuses intended to be aborted and fetuses intended to be carried to term to be same

In administering the regulations for the protection of human research subjects which—

(1) apply to research conducted or supported by the Secretary;

(2) involve living human fetuses in utero; and

(3) are published in section 46.208 of part 46 of title 45 of the Code of Federal Regulations;


or any successor to such regulations, the Secretary shall require that the risk standard (published in section 46.102(g) of such part 46 or any successor to such regulations) be the same for fetuses which are intended to be aborted and fetuses which are intended to be carried to term.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §498, as added Pub. L. 99–158, §2, Nov. 20, 1985, 99 Stat. 877; amended Pub. L. 100–607, title I, §§156, 157(b), Nov. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 3059; Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §121(b)(1), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 133.)

Amendments

1993—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–43 struck out subsec. (c) which directed Biomedical Ethics Advisory Committee to conduct a study of the nature, advisability, and biomedical and ethical implications of exercising any waiver of the risk standard published in section 46.102(g) of part 46 of title 45 of the Code of Federal Regulations and to report its finding to the Biomedical Ethics Board not later than 24 months after Nov. 4, 1988, which report was to be then transmitted to specified Congressional committees.

1988—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 100–607, §157(b), substituted "24 months after November 4, 1988" for "thirty months after November 20, 1985".

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 100–607, §156(1), substituted "24-month period beginning on November 4, 1988" for "thirty-six month period beginning on November 20, 1985".

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 100–607, §156(2), substituted "1990" for "1988".

Nullification of Certain Provisions

Section 121(c) of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that: "The provisions of Executive Order 12806 (57 Fed. Reg. 21589 (May 21, 1992)) [formerly set out below] shall not have any legal effect. The provisions of section 204(d) of part 46 of title 45 of the Code of Federal Regulations (45 CFR 46.204(d)) shall not have any legal effect."

Executive Order No. 12806. Establishment of Fetal Tissue Bank

Ex. Ord. No. 12806, May 19, 1992, 57 F.R. 21589, which established a human fetal tissue bank, was nullified by Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §121(c), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 133, set out above.

Federal Funding of Fetal Tissue Transplantation Research

Memorandum of President of the United States, Jan. 22, 1993, 58 F.R. 7457, provided:

Memorandum for the Secretary of Health and Human Services

On March 22, 1988, the Assistant Secretary for Health of Health and Human Services ("HHS") imposed a temporary moratorium on Federal funding of research involving transplantation of fetal tissue from induced abortions. Contrary to the recommendations of a National Institutes of Health advisory panel, on November 2, 1989, the Secretary of Health and Human Services extended the moratorium indefinitely. This moratorium has significantly hampered the development of possible treatments for individuals afflicted with serious diseases and disorders, such as Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease, diabetes, and leukemia. Accordingly, I hereby direct that you immediately lift the moratorium.

You are hereby authorized and directed to publish this memorandum in the Federal Register.

William J. Clinton.      

§289g–1. Research on transplantation of fetal tissue

(a) Establishment of program

(1) In general

The Secretary may conduct or support research on the transplantation of human fetal tissue for therapeutic purposes.

(2) Source of tissue

Human fetal tissue may be used in research carried out under paragraph (1) regardless of whether the tissue is obtained pursuant to a spontaneous or induced abortion or pursuant to a stillbirth.

(b) Informed consent of donor

(1) In general

In research carried out under subsection (a) of this section, human fetal tissue may be used only if the woman providing the tissue makes a statement, made in writing and signed by the woman, declaring that—

(A) the woman donates the fetal tissue for use in research described in subsection (a) of this section;

(B) the donation is made without any restriction regarding the identity of individuals who may be the recipients of transplantations of the tissue; and

(C) the woman has not been informed of the identity of any such individuals.

(2) Additional statement

In research carried out under subsection (a) of this section, human fetal tissue may be used only if the attending physician with respect to obtaining the tissue from the woman involved makes a statement, made in writing and signed by the physician, declaring that—

(A) in the case of tissue obtained pursuant to an induced abortion—

(i) the consent of the woman for the abortion was obtained prior to requesting or obtaining consent for a donation of the tissue for use in such research;

(ii) no alteration of the timing, method, or procedures used to terminate the pregnancy was made solely for the purposes of obtaining the tissue; and

(iii) the abortion was performed in accordance with applicable State law;


(B) the tissue has been donated by the woman in accordance with paragraph (1); and

(C) full disclosure has been provided to the woman with regard to—

(i) such physician's interest, if any, in the research to be conducted with the tissue; and

(ii) any known medical risks to the woman or risks to her privacy that might be associated with the donation of the tissue and that are in addition to risks of such type that are associated with the woman's medical care.

(c) Informed consent of researcher and donee

In research carried out under subsection (a) of this section, human fetal tissue may be used only if the individual with the principal responsibility for conducting the research involved makes a statement, made in writing and signed by the individual, declaring that the individual—

(1) is aware that—

(A) the tissue is human fetal tissue;

(B) the tissue may have been obtained pursuant to a spontaneous or induced abortion or pursuant to a stillbirth; and

(C) the tissue was donated for research purposes;


(2) has provided such information to other individuals with responsibilities regarding the research;

(3) will require, prior to obtaining the consent of an individual to be a recipient of a transplantation of the tissue, written acknowledgment of receipt of such information by such recipient; and

(4) has had no part in any decisions as to the timing, method, or procedures used to terminate the pregnancy made solely for the purposes of the research.

(d) Availability of statements for audit

(1) In general

In research carried out under subsection (a) of this section, human fetal tissue may be used only if the head of the agency or other entity conducting the research involved certifies to the Secretary that the statements required under subsections (b)(2) and (c) of this section will be available for audit by the Secretary.

(2) Confidentiality of audit

Any audit conducted by the Secretary pursuant to paragraph (1) shall be conducted in a confidential manner to protect the privacy rights of the individuals and entities involved in such research, including such individuals and entities involved in the donation, transfer, receipt, or transplantation of human fetal tissue. With respect to any material or information obtained pursuant to such audit, the Secretary shall—

(A) use such material or information only for the purposes of verifying compliance with the requirements of this section;

(B) not disclose or publish such material or information, except where required by Federal law, in which case such material or information shall be coded in a manner such that the identities of such individuals and entities are protected; and

(C) not maintain such material or information after completion of such audit, except where necessary for the purposes of such audit.

(e) Applicability of State and local law

(1) Research conducted by recipients of assistance

The Secretary may not provide support for research under subsection (a) of this section unless the applicant for the financial assistance involved agrees to conduct the research in accordance with applicable State law.

(2) Research conducted by Secretary

The Secretary may conduct research under subsection (a) of this section only in accordance with applicable State and local law.

(f) Report

The Secretary shall annually submit to the Committee on Energy and Commerce of the House of Representatives, and to the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate, a report describing the activities carried out under this section during the preceding fiscal year, including a description of whether and to what extent research under subsection (a) of this section has been conducted in accordance with this section.

(g) "Human fetal tissue" defined

For purposes of this section, the term "human fetal tissue" means tissue or cells obtained from a dead human embryo or fetus after a spontaneous or induced abortion, or after a stillbirth.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §498A, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §111, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 129.)

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

Nullification of Moratorium

Section 113 of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that:

"(a) In General.—Except as provided in subsection (c), no official of the executive branch may impose a policy that the Department of Health and Human Services is prohibited from conducting or supporting any research on the transplantation of human fetal tissue for therapeutic purposes. Such research shall be carried out in accordance with section 498A of the Public Health Service Act [this section] (as added by section 111 of this Act), without regard to any such policy that may have been in effect prior to the date of the enactment of this Act [June 10, 1993].

"(b) Prohibition Against Withholding of Funds in Cases of Technical and Scientific Merit.—

"(1) In general.—Subject to subsection (b)(2) of section 492A of the Public Health Service Act [section 289a–1(b)(2) of this title] (as added by section 101 of this Act), in the case of any proposal for research on the transplantation of human fetal tissue for therapeutic purposes, the Secretary of Health and Human Services may not withhold funds for the research if—

"(A) the research has been approved for purposes of subsection (a) of such section 492A;

"(B) the research will be carried out in accordance with section 498A of such Act [this section] (as added by section 111 of this Act); and

"(C) there are reasonable assurances that the research will not utilize any human fetal tissue that has been obtained in violation of section 498B(a) of such Act [section 289g–2(a) of this title] (as added by section 112 of this Act).

"(2) Standing approval regarding ethical status.—In the case of any proposal for research on the transplantation of human fetal tissue for therapeutic purposes, the issuance in December 1988 of the Report of the Human Fetal Tissue Transplantation Research Panel shall be deemed to be a report—

"(A) issued by an ethics advisory board pursuant to section 492A(b)(5)(B)(ii) of the Public Health Service Act (as added by section 101 of this Act); and

"(B) finding, on a basis that is neither arbitrary nor capricious, that the nature of the research is such that it is not unethical to conduct or support the research.

"(c) Authority for Withholding Funds From Research.—In the case of any research on the transplantation of human fetal tissue for therapeutic purposes, the Secretary of Health and Human Services may withhold funds for the research if any of the conditions specified in any of subparagraphs (A) through (C) of subsection (b)(1) are not met with respect to the research.

"(d) Definition.—For purposes of this section, the term 'human fetal tissue' has the meaning given such term in section 498A(f) of the Public Health Service Act [subsec. (f) of this section] (as added by section 111 of this Act)."

Report by General Accounting Office on Adequacy of Requirements

Section 114 of Pub. L. 103–43 provided that, with respect to research on the transplantation of human fetal tissue for therapeutic purposes, the Comptroller General of the United States was to conduct an audit for the purpose of determining whether and to what extent such research conducted or supported by Secretary of Health and Human Services had been conducted in accordance with this section and whether and to what extent there have been violations of section 289g–2 of this title and directed the Comptroller General to complete the audit and report the findings to Congress, not later than May 19, 1995.

Section Referred to in Other Sections

This section is referred to in section 289g–2 of this title.

§289g–2. Prohibitions regarding human fetal tissue

(a) Purchase of tissue

It shall be unlawful for any person to knowingly acquire, receive, or otherwise transfer any human fetal tissue for valuable consideration if the transfer affects interstate commerce.

(b) Solicitation or acceptance of tissue as directed donation for use in transplantation

It shall be unlawful for any person to solicit or knowingly acquire, receive, or accept a donation of human fetal tissue for the purpose of transplantation of such tissue into another person if the donation affects interstate commerce, the tissue will be or is obtained pursuant to an induced abortion, and—

(1) the donation will be or is made pursuant to a promise to the donating individual that the donated tissue will be transplanted into a recipient specified by such individual;

(2) the donated tissue will be transplanted into a relative of the donating individual; or

(3) the person who solicits or knowingly acquires, receives, or accepts the donation has provided valuable consideration for the costs associated with such abortion.

(c) Criminal penalties for violations

(1) In general

Any person who violates subsection (a) or (b) of this section shall be fined in accordance with title 18, subject to paragraph (2), or imprisoned for not more than 10 years, or both.

(2) Penalties applicable to persons receiving consideration

With respect to the imposition of a fine under paragraph (1), if the person involved violates subsection (a) or (b)(3) of this section, a fine shall be imposed in an amount not less than twice the amount of the valuable consideration received.

(d) Definitions

For purposes of this section:

(1) The term "human fetal tissue" has the meaning given such term in section 289g–1(f) 1 of this title.

(2) The term "interstate commerce" has the meaning given such term in section 321(b) of title 21.

(3) The term "valuable consideration" does not include reasonable payments associated with the transportation, implantation, processing, preservation, quality control, or storage of human fetal tissue.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §498B, as added Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §112, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 131.)

1 So in original. Probably should be section "289g–1(g)".

§289h. Repealed. Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §121(b)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 133

Section, act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §499, as added Nov. 20, 1985, Pub. L. 99–158, §2, 99 Stat. 878, related to construction of subchapter.

§290. National Institutes of Health Management Fund; establishment; advancements; availability; final adjustments of advances

For the purpose of facilitating the economical and efficient conduct of operations in the National Institutes of Health which are financed by two or more appropriations where the costs of operation are not readily susceptible of distribution as charges to such appropriations, there is established the National Institutes of Health Management Fund. Such amounts as the Director of the National Institutes of Health may determine to represent a reasonable distribution of estimated costs among the various appropriations involved may be advanced each year to this fund and shall be available for expenditure for such costs under such regulations as may be prescribed by said Director, including the operation of facilities for the sale of meals to employees and others at rates to be determined by said Director to be sufficient to cover the reasonable value of the meals served and the proceeds thereof shall be deposited to the credit of this fund: Provided, That funds advanced to this fund shall be available only in the fiscal year in which they are advanced: Provided further, That final adjustments of advances in accordance with actual costs shall be effected wherever practicable with the appropriations from which such funds are advanced.

(Pub. L. 85–67, title II, §201, June 29, 1957, 71 Stat. 220; Pub. L. 87–290, title II, §201, Sept. 22, 1961, 75 Stat. 603.)

Codification

Section was enacted as a part of the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare Appropriation Act, 1958, and not as a part of the Public Health Service Act which comprises this chapter.

Amendments

1961Pub. L. 87–290 substituted "reasonable value of the meals served" for "cost of such operation".

§290a. Victims of fire

(a) Research on burns, burn injuries, and rehabilitation

The Secretary of Health and Human Services shall establish, within the National Institutes of Health and in cooperation with the Secretary of Commerce, an expanded program of research on burns, treatment of burn injuries, and rehabilitation of victims of fires. The National Institutes of Health shall—

(1) sponsor and encourage the establishment throughout the Nation of twenty-five additional burn centers, which shall comprise separate hospital facilities providing specialized burn treatment and including research and teaching programs and twenty-five additional burn units, which shall comprise specialized facilities in general hospitals used only for burn victims;

(2) provide training and continuing support of specialists to staff the new burn centers and burn units;

(3) sponsor and encourage the establishment of ninety burn programs in general hospitals which comprise staffs of burn injury specialists;

(4) provide special training in emergency care for burn victims;

(5) augment sponsorship of research on burns and burn treatment;

(6) administer and support a systematic program of research concerning smoke inhalation injuries; and

(7) sponsor and support other research and training programs in the treatment and rehabilitation of burn injury victims.

(b) Authorization of appropriations

For purposes of this section, there are authorized to be appropriated not to exceed $5,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1975 and not to exceed $8,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1976.

(Pub. L. 93–498, §19, Oct. 29, 1974, 88 Stat. 1547; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695.)

Codification

In subsec. (a), "Secretary of Commerce" substituted for "Secretary" pursuant to section 4(6) of the Federal Fire Prevention and Control Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–498, which is classified to section 2203(6) of Title 15, Commerce and Trade.

Section was enacted as part of the Federal Fire Prevention and Control Act of 1974 (which is classified principally to chapter 49 (§2201 et seq.) of Title 15), and not as a part of the Public Health Service Act which comprises this chapter.

Change of Name

"Secretary of Health and Human Services" substituted for "Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare" in subsec. (a) pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

Part I—Foundation for the National Institutes of Health

Amendments

1998Pub. L. 105–392, title IV, §418(1), Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3591, substituted "Foundation for the National Institutes of Health" for "National Foundation for Biomedical Research" in part heading.

1993Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §141(a)(2), June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 136, redesignated part H "National Foundation for Biomedical Research" as I.

§290b. Establishment and duties of Foundation

(a) In general

The Secretary shall, acting through the Director of NIH, establish a nonprofit corporation to be known as the Foundation for the National Institutes of Health (hereafter in this section referred to as the "Foundation"). The Foundation shall not be an agency or instrumentality of the United States Government.

(b) Purpose of Foundation

The purpose of the Foundation shall be to support the National Institutes of Health in its mission, and to advance collaboration with biomedical researchers from universities, industry, and nonprofit organizations.

(c) Certain activities of Foundation

(1) In general

In carrying out subsection (b) of this section, the Foundation may solicit and accept gifts, grants, and other donations, establish accounts, and invest and expend funds in support of the following activities with respect to the purpose described in such subsection:

(A) A program to provide and administer endowed positions that are associated with the research program of the National Institutes of Health. Such endowments may be expended for the compensation of individuals holding the positions, for staff, equipment, quarters, travel, and other expenditures that are appropriate in supporting the endowed positions.

(B) A program to provide and administer fellowships and grants to research personnel in order to work and study in association with the National Institutes of Health. Such fellowships and grants may include stipends, travel, health insurance benefits and other appropriate expenses. The recipients of fellowships shall be selected by the donors and the Foundation upon the recommendation of the National Institutes of Health employees in the laboratory where the fellow would serve, and shall be subject to the agreement of the Director of the National Institutes of Health and the Executive Director of the Foundation.

(C) Supplementary programs to provide for—

(i) scientists of other countries to serve in research capacities in the United States in association with the National Institutes of Health or elsewhere, or opportunities for employees of the National Institutes of Health or other public health officials in the United States to serve in such capacities in other countries, or both;

(ii) the conduct and support of studies, projects, and research, which may include stipends, travel and other support for personnel in collaboration with national and international non-profit and for-profit organizations;

(iii) the conduct and support of forums, meetings, conferences, courses, and training workshops that may include undergraduate, graduate, post-graduate, and post-doctoral accredited courses and the maintenance of accreditation of such courses by the Foundation at the State and national level for college or continuing education credits or for degrees;

(iv) programs to support and encourage teachers and students of science at all levels of education and programs for the general public which promote the understanding of science;

(v) programs for writing, editing, printing, publishing, and vending of books and other materials; and

(vi) the conduct of other activities to carry out and support the purpose described in subsection (b) of this section.

(2) Fees

The Foundation may assess fees for the provision of professional, administrative and management services by the Foundation in amounts determined reasonable and appropriate by the Executive Director.

(3) Authority of Foundation

The Foundation shall be the sole entity responsible for carrying out the activities described in this subsection.

(d) Board of Directors

(1) Composition

(A) The Foundation shall have a Board of Directors (hereafter referred to in this section as the "Board"), which shall be composed of ex officio and appointed members in accordance with this subsection. All appointed members of the Board shall be voting members.

(B) The ex officio members of the Board shall be—

(i) the Chairman and ranking minority member of the Subcommittee on Health and the Environment (Committee on Energy and Commerce) or their designees, in the case of the House of Representatives;

(ii) the Chairman and ranking minority member of the Committee on Labor and Human Resources or their designees, in the case of the Senate; and

(iii) the Director of the National Institutes of Health.


(C) The ex officio members of the Board under subparagraph (B) shall appoint to the Board 11 individuals from among a list of candidates to be provided by the National Academy of Science. Of such appointed members—

(i) 4 shall be representative of the general biomedical field;

(ii) 2 shall be representatives of the general biobehavorial field; and

(iii) 5 shall be representatives of the general public.


(D)(i) Not later than 30 days after June 10, 1993, the Director of the National Institutes of Health shall convene a meeting of the ex officio members of the Board to—

(I) incorporate the Foundation and establish the general policies of the Foundation for carrying out the purposes of subsection (b) of this section, including the establishment of the bylaws of the Foundation; and

(II) appoint the members of the Board in accordance with subparagraph (C).


(ii) Upon the appointment of the members of the Board under clause (i)(II), the terms of service of the ex officio members of the Board as members of the Board shall terminate.

(E) The agreement of not less than three-fifths of the members of the ex officio members of the Board shall be required for the appointment of each member to the initial Board.

(F) No employee of the National Institutes of Health shall be appointed as a member of the Board.

(G) The Board may, through amendments to the bylaws of the Foundation, provide that the number of members of the Board shall be greater than the number specified in subparagraph (C).

(2) Chair

(A) The ex officio members of the Board under paragraph (1)(B) shall designate an individual to serve as the initial Chair of the Board.

(B) Upon the termination of the term of service of the initial Chair of the Board, the appointed members of the Board shall elect a member of the Board to serve as the Chair of the Board.

(3) Terms and vacancies

(A) The term of office of each member of the Board appointed under paragraph (1)(C) shall be 5 years, except that the terms of offices for the initial appointed members of the Board shall expire as determined by the ex officio members and the Chair.

(B) Any vacancy in the membership of the Board shall be filled in the manner in which the original position was made and shall not affect the power of the remaining members to execute the duties of the Board.

(C) If a member of the Board does not serve the full term applicable under subparagraph (A), the individual appointed to fill the resulting vacancy shall be appointed for the remainder of the term of the predecessor of the individual.

(D) A member of the Board may continue to serve after the expiration of the term of the member until a successor is appointed.

(4) Compensation

Members of the Board may not receive compensation for service on the Board. Such members may be reimbursed for travel, subsistence, and other necessary expenses incurred in carrying out the duties of the Board, as set forth in the bylaws issued by the Board.

(5) Meetings and quorum

A majority of the members of the Board shall constitute a quorum for purposes of conducting the business of the Board.

(6) Certain bylaws

(A) In establishing bylaws under this subsection, the Board shall ensure that the following are provided for:

(i) Policies for the selection of the officers, employees, agents, and contractors of the Foundation.

(ii) Policies, including ethical standards, for the acceptance, solicitation, and disposition of donations and grants to the Foundation and for the disposition of the assets of the Foundation. Policies with respect to ethical standards shall ensure that officers, employees and agents of the Foundation (including members of the Board) avoid encumbrances that would result in a conflict of interest, including a financial conflict of interest or a divided allegiance. Such policies shall include requirements for the provision of information concerning any ownership or controlling interest in entities related to the activities of the Foundation by such officers, employees and agents and their spouses and relatives.

(iii) Policies for the conduct of the general operations of the Foundation.

(iv) Policies for writing, editing, printing, publishing, and vending of books and other materials.


(B) In establishing bylaws under this subsection, the Board shall ensure that such bylaws (and activities carried out under the bylaws) do not—

(i) reflect unfavorably upon the ability of the Foundation or the National Institutes of Health to carry out its responsibilities or official duties in a fair and objective manner; or

(ii) compromise, or appear to compromise, the integrity of any governmental agency or program, or any officer or employee involved in such program.

(e) Redesignated (g)

(f) Incorporation

The initial members of the Board shall serve as incorporators and shall take whatever actions necessary to incorporate the Foundation.

(g) Nonprofit status

The Foundation shall be considered to be a corporation under section 501(c) of title 26, and shall be subject to the provisions of such section.

(h) Executive Director

(1) In general

The Foundation shall have an Executive Director who shall be appointed by the Board and shall serve at the pleasure of the Board. The Executive Director shall be responsible for the day-to-day operations of the Foundation and shall have such specific duties and responsibilities as the Board shall prescribe.

(2) Compensation

The rate of compensation of the Executive Director shall be fixed by the Board.

(i) Powers

In carrying out subsection (b) of this section, the Foundation may—

(1) operate under the direction of its Board;

(2) adopt, alter, and use a corporate seal, which shall be judicially noticed;

(3) provide for 1 or more officers, employees, and agents, as may be necessary, define their duties, and require surety bonds or make other provisions against losses occasioned by acts of such persons;

(4) hire, promote, compensate, and discharge officers and employees of the Foundation, and define the duties of the officers and employees;

(5) with the consent of any executive department or independent agency, use the information, services, staff, and facilities of such in carrying out this section;

(6) sue and be sued in its corporate name, and complain and defend in courts of competent jurisdiction;

(7) modify or consent to the modification of any contract or agreement to which it is a party or in which it has an interest under this part;

(8) establish a process for the selection of candidates for positions under subsection (c) of this section;

(9) enter into contracts with public and private organizations for the writing, editing, printing, and publishing of books and other material;

(10) take such action as may be necessary to obtain patents and licenses for devices and procedures developed by the Foundation and its employees;

(11) solicit 1 accept, hold, administer, invest, and spend any gift, devise, or bequest of real or personal property made to the Foundation;

(12) enter into such other contracts, leases, cooperative agreements, and other transactions as the Executive Director considers appropriate to conduct the activities of the Foundation;

(13) appoint other groups of advisors as may be determined necessary from time to time to carry out the functions of the Foundation;

(14) enter into such other contracts, leases, cooperative agreements, and other transactions as the Executive Director considers appropriate to conduct the activities of the Foundation; and

(15) exercise other powers as set forth in this section, and such other incidental powers as are necessary to carry out its powers, duties, and functions in accordance with this part.

(j) Administrative control

No participant in the program established under this part shall exercise any administrative control over any Federal employee.

(k) General provisions

(1) Foundation integrity

The members of the Board shall be accountable for the integrity of the operations of the Foundation and shall ensure such integrity through the development and enforcement of criteria and procedures relating to standards of conduct (including those developed under subsection (d)(2)(B)(i)(II)),2 financial disclosure statements, conflict of interest rules, recusal and waiver rules, audits and other matter determined appropriate by the Board.

(2) Financial conflicts of interest

Any individual who is an officer, employee, or member of the Board of the Foundation may not (in accordance with policies and requirements developed under subsection (d)(2)(B)(i)(II)) 2 personally or substantially participate in the consideration or determination by the Foundation of any matter that would directly or predictably affect any financial interest of the individual or a relative (as such term is defined in section 109(16) of the Ethics in Government Act of 1978) of the individual, of any business organization or other entity, or of which the individual is an officer or employee, or is negotiating for employment, or in which the individual has any other financial interest.

(3) Audits; availability of records

The Foundation shall—

(A) provide for annual audits of the financial condition of the Foundation; and

(B) make such audits, and all other records, documents, and other papers of the Foundation, available to the Secretary and the Comptroller General of the United States for examination or audit.

(4) Reports

(A) Not later than 5 months following the end of each fiscal year, the Foundation shall publish a report describing the activities of the Foundation during the preceding fiscal year. Each such report shall include for the fiscal year involved a comprehensive statement of the operations, activities, financial condition, and accomplishments of the Foundation.

(B) With respect to the financial condition of the Foundation, each report under subparagraph (A) shall include the source, and a description of, all gifts or grants to the Foundation of real or personal property, and the source and amount of all gifts or grants to the Foundation of money. Each such report shall include a specification of any restrictions on the purposes for which gifts or grants to the Foundation may be used.

(C) The Foundation shall make copies of each report submitted under subparagraph (A) available for public inspection, and shall upon request provide a copy of the report to any individual for a charge not exceeding the cost of providing the copy.

(D) The Board shall annually hold a public meeting to summarize the activities of the Foundation and distribute written reports concerning such activities and the scientific results derived from such activities.

(5) Service of Federal employees

Federal employees may serve on committees advisory to the Foundation and otherwise cooperate with and assist the Foundation in carrying out its function, so long as the employees do not direct or control Foundation activities.

(6) Relationship with existing entities

The Foundation may, pursuant to appropriate agreements, merge with, acquire, or use the resources of existing nonprofit private corporations with missions similar to the purposes of the Foundation, such as the Foundation for Advanced Education in the Sciences.

(7) Intellectual property rights

The Board shall adopt written standards with respect to the ownership of any intellectual property rights derived from the collaborative efforts of the Foundation prior to the commencement of such efforts.

(8) National Institutes of Health Amendments of 1990

The activities conducted in support of the National Institutes of Health Amendments of 1990 (Public Law 101–613), and the amendments made by such Act, shall not be nullified by the enactment of this section.3

(9) Limitation of activities

The Foundation shall exist solely as an entity to work in collaboration with the research programs of the National Institutes of Health. The Foundation may not undertake activities (such as the operation of independent laboratories or competing for Federal research funds) that are independent of those of the National Institutes of Health research programs.

(10) Transfer of funds

The Foundation may transfer funds to the National Institutes of Health. Any funds transferred under this paragraph shall be subject to all Federal limitations relating to federally-funded research.

(l) Duties of Director

(1) Applicability of certain standards to non-Federal employees

In the case of any individual who is not an employee of the Federal Government and who serves in association with the National Institutes of Health, with respect to financial assistance received from the Foundation, the Foundation may not provide the assistance of, or otherwise permit the work at the National Institutes of Health to begin until a memorandum of understanding between the individual and the Director of the National Institutes of Health, or the designee of such Director, has been executed specifying that the individual shall be subject to such ethical and procedural standards of conduct relating to duties performed at the National Institutes of Health, as the Director of the National Institutes of Health determines is appropriate.

(2) Support services

The Director of the National Institutes of Health may provide facilities, utilities and support services to the Foundation if it is determined by the Director to be advantageous to the research programs of the National Institutes of Health.

(m) Funding

(1) Authorization of appropriations

For the purpose of carrying out this part, there is authorized to be appropriated an aggregate $500,000 for each fiscal year.

(2) Limitation regarding other funds

Amounts appropriated under any provision of law other than paragraph (1) may not be expended to establish or operate the Foundation.

(July 1, 1944, ch. 373, title IV, §499, formerly §499A, as added Pub. L. 101–613, §2, Nov. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 3224; amended Pub. L. 102–170, title II, §216, Nov. 26, 1991, 105 Stat. 1128; Pub. L. 102–321, title I, §163(b)(6), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 376; renumbered §499 and amended Pub. L. 103–43, title I, §121(b)(3), title XVII, §1701, June 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 133, 186; Pub. L. 104–316, title I, §122(b), Oct. 19, 1996, 110 Stat. 3836; Pub. L. 105–392, title IV, §418(2), Nov. 13, 1998, 112 Stat. 3591.)

References in Text

Section 109(16) of the Ethics in Government Act of 1978, referred to in subsec. (k)(2), is section 109(16) of Pub. L. 95–521, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The National Institutes of Health Amendments of 1990, referred to in subsec. (k)(8), is Pub. L. 101–613, Nov. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 3224, as amended, which enacted this section, section 285g–4 of this title, and provisions set out as notes under section 201 and 285g–4 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1990 Amendments note set out under section 201 of this title and Tables.

Prior Provisions

A prior section 499 of act July 1, 1944, was classified to section 289h of this title prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–43.

Amendments

1998—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 105–392, §418(2)(A), substituted "Foundation for the National Institutes of Health" for "National Foundation for Biomedical Research".

Subsec. (k)(10). Pub. L. 105–392, §418(2)(B), struck out "not" after "may" and inserted at end "Any funds transferred under this paragraph shall be subject to all Federal limitations relating to federally-funded research."

Subsec. (m)(1). Pub. L. 105–392, §418(2)(C), substituted "$500,000 for each fiscal year" for "$200,000 for the fiscal years 1994 and 1995".

1996—Subsec. (n). Pub. L. 104–316 struck out subsec. (n) which required Comptroller General to conduct audit and prepare report to Congress on adequacy of compliance of the Foundation with guidelines established under this section.

1993—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(1), inserted ", acting through the Director of NIH," after "Secretary shall" and struck out ", except for the purposes of the Ethics in Government Act and the Technology Transfer Act," after "shall not".

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(3), added subsec. (b) and struck out heading and text of former subsec. (b). Text related to duties of Foundation.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(3), added subsec. (c). Former subsec. (c) redesignated (d).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(2), redesignated subsec. (c) as (d). Former subsec. (d) redesignated (f).

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(4)(A), substituted "appointed members of the Board" for "members of the Foundation" in subpar. (A), "Board" for "Council" in subpar. (B), and "appoint to the Board" for "appoint to the Council" in subpar. (C), and added subpars. (D) to (G).

Subsec. (d)(2). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(4)(B), designated existing provisions as subpar. (A), substituted "an individual to serve as the initial Chair" for "an appointed member of the Board to serve as the Chair", and added subpar. (B).

Subsec. (d)(3)(A). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(4)(C), substituted "(1)(C)" for "(2)(C)".

Subsec. (d)(5), (6). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(4)(D), added pars. (5) and (6).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(2), redesignated subsec. (e) as (g).

Subsecs. (f) to (h). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(2), redesignated subsecs. (d) to (f) as (f) to (h), respectively. Former subsecs. (g) and (h) redesignated (i) and (j), respectively.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(2), redesignated subsec. (g) as (i). Former subsec. (i) redesignated (m).

Subsec. (i)(4). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(5)(A), inserted before period at end ", and define the duties of the officers and employees".

Subsec. (i)(5), (6). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(5)(B), (C), redesignated par. (6) as (5) and struck out former par. (5) which read as follows: "prescribe by its Board its bylaws, that shall be consistent with law, and that shall provide for the manner in which—

"(A) its officers, employees, and agents are selected;

"(B) its property is acquired, held, and transferred;

"(C) its general operations are to be conducted; and

"(D) the privileges granted by law are exercised and enjoyed;".

Subsec. (i)(7). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(5)(C), (D), redesignated par. (8) as (7) and substituted "part" for "subtitle". Former par. (7) redesignated (6).

Subsec. (i)(8). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(5)(C), (E), redesignated par. (9) as (8) and substituted "establish a process for the selection of candidates for positions under subsection (c) of this section" for "establish a mechanism for the selection of candidates, subject to the approval of the Director of the National Institutes of Health, for the endowed scientific positions within the organizational structure of the intramural research programs of the National Institutes of Health and candidates for participation in the National Institutes of Health Scholars program".

Subsec. (i)(9), (10). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(5)(C), redesignated pars. (10) and (11) as (9) and (10), respectively. Former par. (9) redesignated (8).

Subsec. (i)(11). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(5)(C), (F), redesignated par. (12) as (11) and inserted "solicit" before "accept". Former par. (11) redesignated (10).

Subsec. (i)(12), (13). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(5)(C), redesignated pars. (13) and (14) as (12) and (13), respectively. Former par. (12) redesignated (11).

Subsec. (i)(14). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(5)(G), (H), added par. (14). Former par. (14) redesignated (13).

Subsec. (i)(15). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(5)(I), substituted "part" for "subtitle".

Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(2), redesignated subsec. (h) as (j).

Subsecs. (k), (l). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(6), added subsecs. (k) and (l).

Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(7), amended heading and text of subsec. (m) generally. Prior to amendment, text read as follows:

"(1) Authorization of appropriations.—Subject to paragraph (2), for the purpose of carrying out this part, there are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1991 through 1995.

"(2) Limitations.—

"(A) Amounts appropriated under paragraph (1) or made available under subparagraph (C) may not be provided to the fund established under subsection (b)(1)(A) of this section.

"(B) For the first fiscal year for which amounts are appropriated under paragraph (1), $200,000 is authorized to be appropriated.

"(C) With respect to the first fiscal year for which amounts are appropriated under paragraph (1), the Secretary may, from amounts appropriated for such fiscal year for the programs of the Department of Health and Human Services, make available not more than $200,000 for carrying out this part, subject to subparagraph (A)."

Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(2), redesignated subsec. (i) as (m).

Subsec. (n). Pub. L. 103–43, §1701(8), added subsec. (n).

1992—Subsec. (g)(9). Pub. L. 102–321 struck out "or the Administrator of the Alcohol, Drug Abuse, and Mental Health Administration" after "Director of the National Institutes of Health" and "and the Alcohol, Drug Abuse, and Mental Health Administration" after "research programs of the National Institutes of Health".

1991—Subsec. (c)(1)(C). Pub. L. 102–170, §216(1), substituted "11" for "9".

Subsec. (c)(1)(C)(iii). Pub. L. 102–170, §216(2), substituted "5" for "3".

Change of Name

Committee on Energy and Commerce of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Commerce of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress.

Effective Date of 1992 Amendment

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–321 effective Oct. 1, 1992, with provision for programs providing financial assistance, see section 801(c), (d) of Pub. L. 102–321, set out as a note under section 236 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be followed by a comma.

2 So in original. Probably should be subsection "(d)(6)(A)".

3 So in original. Probably should be "subsection".